@prefix edm: .
@prefix dcterms: .
@prefix dc: .
@prefix skos: .
edm:dataProvider "CONTENTdm"@en ;
dcterms:isReferencedBy "http://resolve.library.ubc.ca/cgi-bin/catsearch?bid=1209095"@en ;
dcterms:isPartOf "University Publications"@en ;
dcterms:issued "2016-06-22"@en, "1944"@en ;
edm:aggregatedCHO "https://open.library.ubc.ca/collections/calendars/items/1.0169864/source.json"@en ;
dc:format "application/pdf"@en ;
skos:note """ B B
Wbt Stotoersfttp
OF
prtttef) Columbia
CALENDAR
THIRTIETH SESSION
1944-1945
VANCOUVER, BRITISH COLUMBIA
1944
B B IMPORTANT NOTICES
According to the regulations of National Selective Service any physically
fit male student
(1) who refuses to enrol in the C. O. T. C. or other training unit, or
(2) who fails to perform therein the required training, or
(3) who fails to pass any term or yearly academic examination, unless
such failure is considered to be due to circumstances beyond his
control,
shall be reported to the Divisional Registrar and shall be called out
forthwith.
No student with unsatisfactory standing will be permitted to register
in September without the permission of Faculty. (Page 34.)
Attention is called to the following Calendar changes:
Degree and Course in Home Economics. (Pages 100 and 178.)
Geography 1 as a laboratory science. (Pages 83 and 169.)
Course for B.Com.: 60 per cent required in Economics 1. (Pages 89
and 319.)
Summary of Training Provisions of the Post-Discharge Re-establishment Order P.C. 7633. (Page 364.)
New Awards:
The Powell River Company Limited Scholarship. (Page 47.)
The British Columbia Electric Railway Company Limited Research
Scholarship. (Page 47.)
The Consolidated Mining and Smelting Company of Canada Limited
Fellowship. (Page 47.)
The R. Randolph Bruce Scholarship. (Page 52.)
The British Columbia Electric Railway Company Limited Scholarships.
(Page 52.)
The Ahepa Prize. (Page 55.)
The Dorothy and William Dorbils Prize in Zoology. (Page 56.)
The Timber Preservers Limited Prizes. (Page 57.)
The Alberta Meat Company Bursary. (Page 63.)
The Mary C. Lipsett Bursary. (Page 63.)
The Rotary Memorial Bursaries. (Page 63.)
THE DOMINION-PROVINCIAL YOUTH
TRAINING BURSARIES
Under the Dominion-Provincial Youth Training Programme a sum of
money has been set aside to aid University students who can offer proof
of scholastic ability and financial need.
Applications may be filed under one of the following sections.
SECTION I.
Regular students in any year, in any Faculty, who are not eligible under
Section II.
SECTION II
Regular students (but not First Year students) who are proceeding to
degrees in Engineering, Science (Mathematics, Physics, or Chemistry),
Medicine, Dentistry, or Nursing.
Application forms may be secured from Colonel F. T. Fairey, Director
of Technical Education, Victoria, B. C, to whom they must be returned
by September 1st, 1944. The awards will be made on the recommendation
of the Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries, in
consultation with Colonel Fairey. TOje 3Bntoer£ttp
OF
prttfef) Columbia
CALENDAR
THIRTIETH SESSION
1944-1945
VANCOUVER. BRITISH COLUMBIA
1944 CONTENTS Page
Academic Year 5
Visitor 7
Chancellor , 7
President 7
The Board of Governors 7
The Senate 7
Officers and Staff 9
Historical Sketch 17
The Constitution of the University 19
Location and Buildings 20
Endowments and Donations 25
General Information 28
Admission to the University - 32
Registration and Attendance 34
Fees 37
Medals, Scholarships, Prizes, Bursaries, and Loans 41
Faculty op Arts and Science
Time Table of Lectures 72
Regulations in Reference to Courses:
Courses Leading to the Degree of B.A. 81
Course Leading to the Degree of B.Com. 97
Course Leading to the Degree of B.H.E 100
Course Leading to the Degree of B.Ed 101
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A 102
Teacher Training Course Ill
Course Leading to the Diploma in Social Work 114
Pre-Medical Courses 115
Examinations and Advancement 116
Courses of Instruction:
Department of Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine 118
" " Biology and Botany 121
" Chemistry 129
" Classics 135
" " Commerce 141
" " Economics, Political Science, Sociology, Social Work 143
" " Education 154
" English 158
" " Geology and Geography 163
" History 171
" " Home Economics 178
" " Mathematics 183
" " Modern Languages 187
" " Philosophy and Psychology 193
" Physics 200
" " Zoology 206
Faculty op Applied Science
Time Table 215
Foreword 219
Admission 220
Regulations in Reference to Courses 221
General Outline of Courses 223
Courses in
Chemical Engineering 227
Civil Engineering 228
Electrical Engineering 230
Forestry and Forest Engineering 232
Geological Engineering 234
Mechanical Engineering 236
Metallurgical Engineering 237 Page
Mining Engineering 239
Nursing and Health 241
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.Sc. 249
Examinations and Advancement 250
Courses of Instruction:
Department of Biology and Botany 252
" Chemistry 253
" Civil Engineering 256
" English 263
" Forestry 264
" Geology and Geography 268
" Mathematics " 270
" Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 271
" Mining and Metallurgy 279
" Nursing and Health 283
" Physics 286
" Zoology 287
Faculty of Agriculture
General Information 291
Regulations in Reference to Courses:
For the B.S.A. Degree 292
The Occupational Course, Short Courses, Extension Courses 293
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.S.A. 295
Teacher Training Course 296
Examinations and Advancement 297
Courses of Instruction:
Department of Agricultural Economics 299
" " Agronomy 300
" " Animal Husbandry 302
" " Dairying 304
" " Horticulture 305
" Poultry Husbandry 308
" English 311
Genetics 311
Double Courses
For B.A. and B.A.Sc:
Arts and Science, and Nursing 317
Arts and Science, and Engineering 317
For B.A. and B.S.F.:
Biology and Botany (Forestry Option), and Forestry 318
Economics or Political Science, and Forestry 318
For B.Com. and B.S.F 319
For B.A. and B.S.A. 320
For B.Com. and B.S.A 320
List of Students in Attendance, Session 1943-44 321
Degrees Conferred, 1943 343
Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes Awarded, 1943 352
University Summer Session 357
Department of University Extension 360
University Service Training Corps 362
Government Training Provisions for Discharged Men 364
Student Organization 367
Alumni Association 370
Summer Session Students' Association 372
Inter-University Exchange of Undergraduates 372
Affiliated Colleges:
Victoria College 373
Union College of British Columbia 374
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia 374 ACADEMIC YEAR
1944
August
llth Friday )
12th Saturday j
15th Tuesday
15th Tuesday
September
1st Friday
4th Monday
5th Tuesday to 1
12th Tuesday j
13th Wednesday
15th Friday
15th Friday, 9 a.m. to
4 p.m.
16th Saturday, 9 a.m. to |
12 Noon
18th Monday
29th Friday
October
2nd Monday
2nd Monday
Supplemental examinations — Second Year Nursing.
Last day for submission of applications for supplemental examinations.
Last day for submission of applications for admission to Second Year Nursing and to the
Teacher Training Course.
ACADEMIC YEAR begins.
Labour Day. University closed September 2nd to
4th inclusive.
Supplemental examinations.
Last day for registration of all First and Second
Year students. (See August 15th, above.)
Last day for registration of all other undergraduates except students in Extra-Sessional
Classes and Directed Reading Courses.
2nd Monday
4th Wednesday
4th Wednesday
6th Friday
13th Friday
18th Wednesday
25th Wednesday
November
29th Wednesday
December
1st Friday
13th Wednesday
19th Tuesday
25th Monday
Programme for students registering for the first
time.
Lectures begin at 8:30 a.m.
Meeting of the Faculty Council. (Subsequent
meetings to be held at the call of the President.)
Last day for change in students' courses.
Last day for handing in graduation essays and
theses (Autumn Congregation).
Last day for payment of First Term fees of all
undergraduates except students in Extra-Sessional Classes and Directed Reading Courses.
Payment of first instalment of scholarship
money.
Last day for payment of fees for Autumn Graduation.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Thanksgiving Day. University closed.
Last day for registration and payment of fees
of graduate students and of students in Extra-
Sessional Classes and Directed Reading Courses.
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Senate.
First Term ends.
Christmas Day. University closed December 23rd
to 26th inclusive. The University of Beitish Columbia
19 4 5
January
1st
Monday
3rd
10th
Wednesday
Wednesday
31st
Wednesday
February
2nd
14th
. Friday
Wednesday
March
30th
Friday
April
12th
12th
Thursday
Thursday
14th
27th
Saturday to )
Friday J
27th
Friday
May
1st
Tuesday
5th
7th
8th
10th
10th
24th
Saturday
Monday
Tuesday
Thursday
Thursday
Thursday
June
July
1st
Sunday
3rd
Tuesday
August
15th
Wednesday
17th
24th
24th
31st
Friday
Friday
Friday
Friday
New Year's Day. University closed December
30th to January 1st inclusive.
Second Term begins.
Last day for payment of Second Term fees. Payment of second instalment of scholarship money.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Senate.
Good Friday. University closed March 30th lo
April 2nd inclusive.
Last day of lectures.
Last day for handing in graduation essays and
theses.
Sessional examinations.
Field work in Applied Science begins immediately
at the close of the examinations.
Last day for payment of graduation fees.
Last day for handing in applications for scholarships.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Meeting of Convocation.
Victoria Day. University closed.
King's Birthday. University closed.
Dominion Day. University closed July 1st and
2nd.
Summer Session begins.
Last day for submission of applications for supplemental examinations.
Summer Session ends.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Senate.
ACADEMIC YEAR ends. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA
VISITOR
Col. The Hon. W. C. Woodward, Lieutenant-Governor of
British Columbia.
CHANCELLOR
PRESIDENT
L. S. Klinck, M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D., Officier de'l'Instruction Publique, F.R.S.C.
(Retiring June 30, 1944.)
Norman A. M*. MacKenzie, M.M., B.A., LL.B., LL.M., LL.D., K.C, F.R.S.C.
(From July 1, 1944.)
BOARD OF GOVERNORS
(a) Ex-officio:
The Chancellor (Chairman).
L. S. Klinck, M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D., Officier de l'Instruction Publique, F.R.S.C. (Retiring June 30, 1944.)
Norman A. M. MacKenzie, M.M., B.A., LL.B., LL.M., LL.D., K.C,
F.R.S.C. (From July 1, 1944.)
(b) Elected by Senate:
Arthur E. Lord, B.A., Vancouver.
H.'T. Logan, M.C, M.A., Duncan.
Terms expire 1944.
J. F. Walker, B.A.Sc, Ph.D., F.R.C.S., F.G.S.A., Victoria.
Term expires 1946.
(c) Appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council:
William George Mtjrrin, Vancouver,. Term expires 1949.
Edward H. Barton, Chilliwack. Term expires 1949.
The Hon. Mr. Justice Denis Murphy, B.A., LL.D., Vancpuver.
Term expires 1945.
Joseph Badenoch Clearihue, M.C, M.A., B.C.L., K.C, Victoria.
Term expires 1945.
Term expires 1947.
George T. Cunningham, Vancouver. Term expires 1947.
SENATE
(a) The Chancellor
The President (Chairman): L. S. Klinck, M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D., Officier
de l'Instruction Publique, F.R.S.C. (Retiring June 30, 1944.)
Norman A. M. MacKenzie, M.M., B.A., LL.B. (Dalhousie), LL.M.
(Harvard), LL-D.(Mount Allison and New Brunswick), K.C, F.R.S.C
(From July 1, 1944.)
(b) Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, B.S.A., M.A.
bean of the Faculty of Applied Science, John Norison Finlayson, M.Sc,
LL.D., M.E.I.C, M.Am.Soc.C.E.
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan, M.A.,
Ph.D., LL.D., F.R.S.C
Representatives of the Faculty of Agriculture:
J. C. Berry, M.S.A., Ph.D.; G. H. Harris, B.S.A., M.S., Ph.D. Terms
expire 1945. 8 The University of British Columbia
Representatives of the Faculty of Applied Science:
F. A. Forward, B.A.Sc, M.C.I.M., Mem.A.I.M.E., M.Aust.I.M.M.;
H. J. MacLeod, O.B.E., B.Sc, M.Sc, A.M., Ph.D., Mem.A.I.E.E.,
M.E.I.C, Mem.I.R.E. Terms expire 1945.
Representatives of the Faculty of Arts and Science:
Walter H. Gage, M.A., O. J. Todd, A.B., Ph.D., F.R.S.C. Terms expire
1945.
(c) Appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council:
H. N. MacCorkindale, B.A.,- Vancouver. Term expires 1946.
Francis J. Burd, Vancouver. Term expires 1946.
John W. Spencer, Victoria. Term expires 1946.
(d) The Principal of the Provincial Normal School, Vancouver, A. R.
Lord, B.A.
The Principal of the Provincial Normal School, Victoria,
(e) Representative of the High School Principals and Assistants, W. R.
McDougall; B.A., North Vancouver. Term expires 1947.
(f) Representatives of Affiliated Colleges:
Victoria College, Victoria, H. L. Campbell, B.A., M.Ed. Term expires 1945.
Union College of British Columbia, Vancouver (Theological), Rev.
J. G. Brown, M.A., D.D. Term expires 1945.
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia, Vancouver,
Rev. H. R. Trumpour, M.A., B.D., D.D. Term expires 1945.
(g) Elected by Convocation:
H. T. Logan, M.C, M.A., Duncan.
G. G. Sedgewick, B.A., Ph.D., Vancouver.
Miss M. Dorothy Mawdsley, B.A., M.A., Ph.D., Vancouver.
A. E. Lord, B.A., Vancouver.
H. V. Warren, B.A., B.A.Sc, B.Sc, D.Phil., Assoc.Tnst.M.M.,
F.G.S.A., Vancouver.
A. E. D. Grauer, B.A., Ph.D., Vancouver.
Miss Isobel Harvey, M.A., Vancouver.
J. F. Walker, B.A.Sc, Ph.D., F.R.S.C, F.G.S.A., Victoria.
Sherwood Lett, D.S.O., M.C, E.D., B.A., Vancouver.
Mrs. Sally Murphy Creighton, B.A., M.A., Vancouver.
L. A. Atkinson, M.S.A., Vancouver.
C A. H. Wright, M.Sc, Ph.D., Trail.
Fergus Mutrie, B.S.A., Vancouver.
A. S. Matheson. B.A., Kelowna.
His Grace The Most Rev. A. U. dePencier, O.B.E., M.A., D.D., LL.D.,
Vancouver.
Terms expire 1945.
(h) Representative of the British Columbia Teachers' Federation:
Miss Flobence S. Mulloy, B.A., Vancouver. Term expires 1946.
CONVOCATION
i
Chancellor of the University of British Columbia, Chairman.
F. D. Bolton, B.A., B.A.Sc, Secretary. Office as axd Staff
OFFICERS AND STAFF
L. S. Klinck, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S.A., D.Sc. (Iowa State College), LL.D.
(Western Ontario), Officier de l'Instruction Publique, F.R.S.C, President.
(Retiring June 30, 1944.)
Norman A. M. MacKenzie, M.M., B.A., LL.B. (Dalhousie), LL.M. (Harvard),
LL.D. (Mount Allison and New Brunswick), K.C, F.R.S.C, President.
(Fr-om July 1, 1944.)
Daniel Buchanan, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), LL.D. (McMaster),
F.R.S.C, Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
John Norison Finlayson, M.Sc. (McGill), LL.D. (Manitoba), M.E.I.C.,
M.Am.Soc.C.E., Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science.
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Dean of the Faculty of
Agriculture.
Miss M. Dorothy Mawdsley, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Dean of Women.
Maxwell A. Cameron, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Toronto), Director of the
Summer Session.
Charles B. Wood, B.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Registrar.
Miss M. G. Morrison, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Registrar.
Angus MacLucas, Bursar.
William Kaye Lamb, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (London), Librarian.
Miss M. W. Johnston, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Secretary to the President.
John D. Lee, Superintendent of Buildings and Grounds.
FACULTY COUNCIL
The President (Chairman): L. S: Klinck, M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D., Officier
de l'Instruction Publique, F.R.S.C. (Retiring June 30, 1944.)
Norman A. M. MacKenzie, M.M., B.A., LL.B., LL.M., LL.D., K.C, F.R.S.C.
(From July 1, 1944.)
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan, M.A., Ph.D.,
LL.D., F.R.S.C.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, John Norison Finlayson, M.Sc,
LL.D., M.E.I.C, M.Am.Soc.C.E.
Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, B.S.A., M.A.
Representatives of the Faculties: A. F. Barss, A.B., B.S.inAgr., M.S., Ph.D.;
Miss M. Dorothy Mawdsley, B.A., M.A., Ph.D.; J. F. Muir, B.Sc; W. L.
MacDonald, B.A., M.A., Ph.D.; W. O. Richmond, B.A.Sc, M.S.,
Mem.A.S.M.E.
Emeritus Professors
George E. Robinson, B.A. (Dal.), Emeritus Professor of Mathematics.
James Henderson, M.A. (Glasgow), Emeritus Professor of Philosophy.
P. A. Boving, Cand.Ph. (Malmo, Sweden), Cand.Agr. (Alnarp, Agriculture,
Sweden), LL.D. (Brit. Col.), Emeritus Professor of Agronomy.
C McLean Fraser, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Iowa), LL.D. (Brit. Col.),
F.R.S.C, Emeritus Professor of Zoology.
Lemuel Robertson, M.A. (McGill), LL.D. (Brit. Col.), Emeritus Professor
of Classics.
K H. Archibald, B.Sc. (Dal.), A.M., Ph.D. (Harvard), F.R.S.E.&C,
Emeritus Professor of Chemistry.
°mn Ridington, Emeritus Librarian. 10 The University of British Columbia
Department of Agricultural Economics
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Professor and Head
of the Department.
Department of Agronomy
G. G. Moe, B.S.A., M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Cornell), Professor and Head of
the Department.
D. G. Laird, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S., Ph.D. (Wisconsin), Professor of Soils.
Vernon C. Brink, M.S.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Wisconsin), Assistant Professor.
Department of Animal Husbandry
H. M. King, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College), Professor
and Head of the Department.
Stanley N. Wood, B.S.A. (Sask.), D.V.M. (Iowa State College), Associate
Professor.
J. C. Berry, M.S.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Iowa State College), Assistant
Professor.
Department of Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine
C E. Dolman, M.R.C.S. (England), M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., D.P.H., Ph.D.
(London), F.A.P.H.A., Professor and Head of the Department.
D. C. B. Duff, M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), Associate Professor.
Lawrence E. Ranta, M.D., D.P.H. (Toronto), Assistant Professor.
, Instructor.
Department of Biology and Botany
Andrew H. Hutchinson, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), F.R.S.C., Professor and Head of the Department.
Frank Dickson, B.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Cornell), Professor.
John Davidson, F.L.S., F.B.S.E., Associate Professor.
John Allardyce, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (McGill), F.A.A.A.S., Associate
Professor.
Miss Ruth E. Fields, B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (California), Instructor.
Department of Chemistry
Robert H. Clark, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Leipzig), F.R.S.C, Professor and
Head of the Department.
W. F. Seyer, B.A., M.Sc. (Alberta), Ph.D. (McGill), M.A.I.Ch.E., Professor.
M. J. Marshall, M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology), F.R.S.C,
Professor.
William Ure, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Cal. Inst, of Technology),
F.R.S.C, Associate Professor.
J. Allen Harris, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Illinois), Associate Professor.
J. Gilbert Hooley, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology),
Assistant Professor.
Lionel A. Cox, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Lecturer.
Department of Civil Engineering
John Norison Finlayson, M.Sc. (McGill), LL.D. (Manitoba), M.E.I.C,
M.Am.Soc.C.E., Professor and Head of the Department.
J. Fred Mum, B.Sc. (Manitoba), Professor.
Allan H. Finlay, M.C, B.A.Sc (Brit. Col.), M.S. in C.E. (Illinois),
Assoc.M.Am.Soc.C.E., Professor. Officers and Staff 11
A. Lighthall, B.Sc. (McGill), Associate Professor.
Edward S. Pretious, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.Sc. (Iowa), Assoc.
M.Am.Soc.C.E., Assistant Professor.
Archie Peebles, B.A.Sc, B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.Sc. (Iowa State College),
M.E.I.C, Assoc.M.Am.Soc.C.E., Assistant Professor.
Alexander Hrennikoff, Grad., Inst, of Communication Engineering, Moscow,
Russia, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Sc.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology), Assoc
M.Am.Soc.C.E., Assistant Professor.
J. B. Alexander, M.Sc (New Brunswick), Part-time Lecturer.
Department of Classics
O. J. Todd, A.B., Ph.D. (Harvard), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the
Department.
Louis A. MacKay, M.A. (Toronto), B.A. (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
Geoffrey B. Riddehough, M.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (California), Assistant
Professor.
Patrick C. F. Guthrie, B.A. (Manitoba), M.A. (Toronto), Instructor. (On
leave of absence.)
Department of Commerce
Ellis H. Morrow, B.A. (Queen's), M.B.A. (Harvard), Professor and Head
of the Department.
Archibald W. Cubrie, B.A., B.Com. (Queen's), M.B.A., Dr.Com.Sc (Harvard), Associate Professor.
Frederick Field, C.A., Lecturer in Accountancy.
, Lecturer in Commercial Law.
, Lecturer in Commercial Law.
Department of Dairying
Blythe Eagles, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Toronto), Professor and Head of
the Department.
Miss Lois Campbell, M.S.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
Department of Economics, Political Science, and Sociology
Henry F. Angus, B.A. (McGill), B.C.L., M.A. (Oxon.), F.R.S.C, Professor
and Head of the Department. (On leave of absence.)
Daniel Buchanan, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), LL.D. (McMaster),
F.R.S.C, Acting Head of the Department.
G. F. Drummond, M.A. (St. Andrew's), M.Sc. (Econ.) (London), Professor.
C. W. Topping, B.A. (Queen's), S.T.D. (Wesleyan Theol. College), A.M, Ph.D.
(Columbia), Associate Professor.
Joseph A. Crumb, B.B.A. (Wash.), M.S., Ph.D. (Calif.), Associate Professor.
Miss Marjorie J. Smith, A.B. (Minn.), A.M. (Chicago), Associate Professor
of Social Work.
Miss Mary C. Gleason, A.B. (Vassar), M.S.S. (Smith), Assistant Professor
of Social Work.
Department of Education
George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D.Paed. (Queen's), Professor
and Head of the Department. (On leave of absence.)
Maxwell A. Cameron, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Toronto), Professor and
Acting Head of the Department.
*Mderick T. Tyler, B.Sc, M.A, B.Ed. (Alberta), Ph.D. (California), Assist-
ant Professor of Education and Psychology.
Charles B. Wood, B.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Lecturer. 12 The University of British Columbia
Department of English
G. G. Sedgewick, B.A. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor and Head of the
Department.
W. L. MacDonald, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Ph.D. (Harvard),
Professor.
Frederick G. C. Wood, B.A. (McGill), A.M. (Harvard), Professor.
Thorleif Larsen, M.A. (Toronto), B.A. (Oxon.), F.R.S.C, Professor.
Miss M. Dorothy Mawdsley, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D.
(Chicago), Associate Professor.
Hunter Campbell Lewis, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Professor.
Mrs. Dorothy Blakey Smith, M.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D.
(London), Assistant Professor.
Edmund Morrison, B.A. (Brit. Col.), A.M., Ph.D. (California), Assistant
Professor.
F. E. L. Priestley, M.A. (Alberta), Ph.D. (Toronto), Assistant Professor.
John H. Creighton, M.A. (Toronto), Assistant Professor.
G. Philip V. Akrigg, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
Department of Forestry
John Edward Liersch, B.A, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.F. (Washington),.
M.CS.F.E, M.S.A.F, Professor and Head of the Department. (On leave
of absence.)
F. Malcolm Knapp, B.S.F. (Syracuse), M.S.F. (Wash.), M.CS.F.E, M.S.A.F,
Associate Professor and Acting Head of the Department.
Braham G. Griffith, M.A. (Brit. Col.), M.F. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Washington), M.CS.F.E, Assistant Professor.
Thomas G. Wright, B.F. (Penn. State), M.F. (Duke), M.CS.F.E, M.S.A.F,
Assistant Professor. (On leave of absence.)
J. L. Alexander, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Special Lecturer.
R. M. Brown, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), M.CS.F.E, Honorary Lecturer in Forest
Products.
L. B. Dixon, Part-time Lecturer.
William Byers, M.CS.F.E, Part-time Lecturer.
Department of Geology and Geography
M. Y. Williams, B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Yale), F.G.S.A, F.R.S.C, Professor
and Head of the Department.
Clarence Otto Swanson, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Wisconsin), F.G.S.A,
F.R.S.C, Professor of Mineralogy and Petrography.
Henry Cecil Gunning, B.A.Sc. (Brit. CoL), M.S., Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of
Technology), F.G.S.A, F.R.S.C, Professor of Economic Geology.
H. V. Warren, B.A, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), B.Sc, D.Phil. (Oxon.), Assoc
Inst. M.M, F.G.S.A, Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrography.
Vladimir J. Okulitch, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (McGill), Assistant Professor.
Mrs. Gwendolen O'Brien, B.A. (London), Lecturer.
Department of History
W. N. Sage, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Oxon.), Ph.D. (Toronto), F.R.Hist.S,
F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
F. H. Soward, B.A. (Toronto), B.Litt, (Oxon.), Professor. (On leave of
absence.)
A. C Cooke, B.A. (Manitoba), M.A. (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
Miss Sylvia Thrupp, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (London), F.R.Hist.S, Instructor. (On leave of absence.)
Miss Margaret A. Ormsby, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Bryn Mawr), Lecturer. Officers and Staff 13
Department of Home Economics
Miss Dorothy P. Lefebvhe, B.H.Sc (Sask.), M.S. (Iowa State College), Associate Professor and Acting Head of the Department.
Miss Stella Beil, B.S, M.S. (Kansas State College), Assistant Professor.
Miss Charlotte S. Black, B.Sc. (H.Ec.) (Manitoba), A.M. (Columbia),
Assistant Professor.
Department of Horticulture
A. F. Barss, A.B. (Rochester), B.S. in Agr. (Cornell), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head of the Department.
G. H. Harris, B.S.A. (Brit. Col.), M.S. (Oregon State College), Ph.D. (California), Associate Professor.
Frank E. Buck, B.S.A. (McGill), Lecturer.
Department of Mathematics
Daniel Buchanan, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), LL.D. (McMaster),
F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
F. S. Nowlan, B.A. (Acadia), A.M. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor.
R. D. James, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Chicago), F.R.S.C, Professor.
, Professor.
Walter H. Gage, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Professor.
S. A. Jennings, M.A, Ph.D. (Toronto), Associate Professor.
Miss May L. Barclay, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
Hector John MacLeod, O.B.E, B.Sc. (McGill). M.Sc (Alberta), A.M, Ph.D.
(Harvard), Mem.A.I.E.E, M.E.I.C, Mem.I.R.E, Professor and Head of
the Department.
F. W. Vernon, B.Sc. Eng. (London), Wh.Sch, A.M.I.Mech.E, A.F.R.A.S,
Professor of Mechanical Engineering.
S. C. Morgan, B.Sc. (Queen's), M.Sc. (Alberta), M.S. (Calif. Inst, of Tech.),
Assoc.A.I.E.E, As.MJ.E.S, Professor of Electrical Engineering.
W. B. Coulthard, B.Sc. (London), Mem.A.I.E.E, A.M.I.E.E, Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering.
W. 0. Richmond, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.S. (Pittsburg), Mem.A.S.M.E,
_ Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering.
H. M. McIlroy, M.Sc. (Queen's), Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering.
D. W. Thomson, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.A.Sc. (Illinois), Assistant Professor
of Mechanical Engineering.
Lorne R. Kersey, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
J- M. Turnbull, B.A.Sc. (McGill), M.C.I.M, M.Inst.Met, Professor and
Head of the Department.
George A. Gillies, M.Sc (McGill), M.C.I.M, M.A.I.M.E, Professor of
Metallurgy.
Frank A.Forward,B.A.Sc. (Toronto),M.C.I.M, Mem.A.I.M.E, M.Aust.I.M.M,
Professor of Metallurgy.
Department of Modern Languages
David Owen Evans, M.A, D.Phil. (Oxon.), D.Lett. (Univ. of Paris), Profes-
A w°r-tfnd Head of the Department.
FP e Clark' b-a- (Toronto), Ph.D. (Harvard), Officier d'Academie,
-r-tt.S.C.. Professor of French. 14 The University of British Columbia
Miss Isabel MacInnes, M.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (California), Professor of
German.
Miss Janet T. Greio, B.A. (Queen's), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Officier d'Academie,
Assistant Professor of French.
Miss Dorothy Dallas, M.A. (Brit. Col.), D.Lett. (Univ. of Paris), Assistant
Professor of French.
Miss Joyce Hallamore, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Munich), Assistant Professor of German.
Charles Ernest Borden, M.A, Ph.D. (California), Assistant Professor of
German.
Charles Vyner Brooke, B.A. (Queen's), A.M., Ph.D. (Harvard), Assistant
Professor of Spanish.
Madame Y. Darlington, Instructor in French.
Miss Ethel Harris, A.B. (Columbia), M.A. (Toronto), D.Lett. (Paris), Officier
de l'Instruction Publique, Lecturer.
Department of Nursing and Health
C. E. Dolman, M.R.C.S. (England), M.B, B.S, M.R.C.P, D.P.H, Ph.D.
(London), F.A.P.H.A, Professor and Head of the Department.
Miss H. Evelyn Mallory, R.N., B.Sc. (Columbia), Associate Professor.
Miss Margaret E. Kerr, R.N, B.A.Sc (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Columbia), Assistant Professor.
Miss Mary E. Henderson, R.N, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Cert.P.H.N, (Toronto),
Instructor.
Miss Pauline Capelle, R.N, B.A, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
Lawrence E. Ranta, M.D, D.P.H. (Toronto), Lecturer.
Department of Philosophy and Psychology
John Allan Irving, M.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Cambridge), Professor and Head
of the Department.
Thomas Greenshields Henderson, M.A. (McGill), Ph.D. (Harvard), Associate Professor of Philosophy. (On leave of absence.)
Joseph E. Morsh, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins), Associate Professor.
Alexander P. Maslow, A.B, A.M. (Michigan), Ph.D. (California), Associate
Professor.
Frederick T. Tyler, B.Sc, M.A, B.Ed. (Alberta), Ph.D. (California), Assistant Professor of Psychology and Education.
Department of Physics
Gordon Merritt Shrum, M.M, M.A, Ph.D. (Toronto), F.R.S.C, Professor
and Head of the Department.
A. E. Hennings, M.A. (Lake Forest College), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor.
Harold D. Smith, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Toronto), Associate Professor.
A. M. Crooker, B.A. (McMaster), M.A, Ph.D. (Toronto), Assistant Professor. (On leave of absence.)
Kenneth C. Mann, B.A. (Sask.), Ph.D. (Toronto), Assistant Professor. (On
leave of absence.)
George Michael Volkoff, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (California), Assistant
Professor. (On leave of absence.)
R. Eric Langton, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Lecturer.
William Petrie, B.A. (Brit. Col.), A.M, Ph.D. (Harvard), Lecturer.
R. Keith Brown, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Lecturer.
J. H. L. Watson, B.A. (McMaster), M.A, Ph.D. (Toronto), Lecturer.
Kenneth O. Wright, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Michigan), Lecturer. Officers and Staff 15
Department of Poultry Husbandry
E. A. Lloyd, B.S.A. (Sask.), M.S.A. (Washington State College), Professor
and Head of the Department.
Jacob Biely, M.S.A. (Brit. Col.), M.S. (Kansas State College), Assistant
Professor.
Department of Zoology
W. A. Clemens, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Cornell), F.R.S.C, Professor and
Head of the Department.
G. J- Spencer, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Illinois), Associate Professor.
Ian McTaggart Cowan, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Ph.D. (California), Assistant
Professor.
Department of University Extension
Gordon Merritt Shrum, M.M, M.A, Ph.D. (Toronto), F.R.S.C, Director.
Robert T. McKenzie, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant to the Director. (On leave
of absence.)
Miss Dorothy Somerset, A.B. (Radcliffe), Assistant in Dramatics.
Miss Marjorie V. Smith, B.A. (Sask.), Assistant.
University Health Service
Stewart Murray, M.D, D.P.H. (Toronto), Medical Health Officer, Metropolitan Health Committee, University Health Officer.
J. S. Kitching, B.A, M.D, D.P.H. (Toronto), Assistant Senior Medical
Health Officer of the Metropolitan Health Department of Vancouver and
Director of the University Health Service.
C. H. Gundry, M.D, Director of Mental Hygiene, Metropolitan Health Committee. (On leave of absence.)
George T. Cunningham, Esa, University representative on the Metropolitan
Health Committee.
Miss Muriel Upshall, R.N, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Public Health Nurse.
Physical Education
Maurice Van Vliet, M.S. (Oregon), Assistant Director of Physical Education.
Miss Gertrude E. Moore, Instructor in Physical Education for Women.
Assistants
Awmack, Joseph W, B.S.A. (Brit. Col.) Animal Husbandry
Bartholomew, Gilbert A, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Physics
Barton, Norman, M.A. (Brit. Col.) Physics
Boyd, Miss Ottilie, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Zoology
Buck, F. A. Mackinnon, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.) Mathematics
Butler, Mrs. Jean, B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Toronto) English
Carlisle, Donald, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.) Geology and Geography
Casselman, W. G. Bruce, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
Clareoge, Charles A, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine
■--•Mmens, Miss Ann M, B.A. (Brit. Col.)
„ Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine, Zoology
fOopER, W. Charles, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
"auphinee, Thomas McG, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Physics
eu-en, John Louis, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.) Geology and Geography
unkin, Mrs. Katherine, B.A. (McMaster) Biology and Botany, Zoology
airai.l, Wallace Henry, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Zoology
Rguson, William C, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Physics 16 The University of British Columbia.
Fowle, C Da™, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Zoology
Frith, Mrs. Mary E, B.Sc. in Home Econ. (Alberta) Home Economics
Gilmour, Campbell, B.S.A. (Brit. Col.) Agronomy
Graham, Harold M, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.) Mathematics
Grigg, Vernon H, B.Com. (Brit. Col.) Statistics
Jenkinson, Miss D. Elizabeth, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Mathematics
Lazenby, Mrs. Doris E, M.A. (Brit. Col.) Economics
Matheson, Miss Helen R, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
Metcalfe, Stanley W, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
Morrison, Bernard H, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.) Mining and Metallurgy
Mulvin, Miss Mary, B.S.A. (Brit. Col.) Biology and Botany
Mundell, Percy M, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
McCulloch, James P, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.) Mining and Metallurgy
MacDonald, Miss Marion, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Philosophy and Psychology
McLeod, A. Allan, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
McLeod, R. Raymond, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Physics
MacLeod, Robert A, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
O'Neill, Albert N, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
Polglase, Wm. James, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
Rattenbury, John A, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Biology and Botany, Zoology
Rice-Jones, W. Geoffrey, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
Roussel, David M, B.Com. (Brit. Col.) Statistics
Shephard, Alfred H, B.A. (Brit. Col.) ':.:,...... Philosophy and Psychology
Smith, Wm. Roy, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.) Mining and Metallurgy
Stusiak, Michael, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.) Chemistry
Tamboline, Miss Florence, B.S.A. (Brit. Col.) Dairying
Taylor, Mrs. Pauline, M.A. (Brit. Col.) German
Thomson, Miss J. Lorraine, B.S.A. (Brit. Col.) Horticulture
Todd, Miss Marjorie D, M.A. (Brit. Col.)
Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine
Underhill, Miss Anne B, B.A. (Brit. Col.) Physics
Warden, John, B.A. (Toronto) Biology and Botany THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA
HISTORICAL SKETCH
The creation of a university in British Columbia was first
advocated by Superintendent Jessop in 1877, but it was not until
1890 that the Provincial Legislature passed an act establishing
a body politic and corporate named "The University of British
Columbia." In 1891 this act was amended to require that a meeting of the Senate be held within one month after the election of
the Senators by Convocation. The Senators were elected, but a
quorum did not assemble on the date fixed by the Chancellor, Dr.
I. W. Powell, of Victoria. Thus the first attempt to establish a
university in British Columbia failed.
However, some of the work normally done in a university was
begun in 1894, when an act was passed which permitted the
affiliation of high schools in the Province with recognized Canadian
universities. In 1899 Vancouver High School was affiliated with
McGill University in order to provide First Year work in Arts,
and took the name of Vancouver College. First Year work in
Arts was offered by Victoria High School when it became Victoria
College by affiliation with McGill University in 1902. In the same
year Vancouver College undertook the Second Year in Arts.
In 1906 an act was passed incorporating the Royal Institution
for the Advancement of Learning of British Columbia, which, in
the same year, established at Vancouver the McGill University
College of British Columbia. The scope of the work undertaken
by this college was gradually increased until at the time it was
taken over by the University of British Columbia it was giving
three years in Arts and Science and two years in Applied Science.
When the University of British Columbia opened in the autumn
of 1915, both the McGill University College of Vancouver and
Victoria College, which since 1907 had been a part of it, ceased
to exist.
Definite steps to establish the University were taken by Dr.
H. E. Young, Minister of Education, in 1907, when he introduced
a "University Endowment Act." This act was followed in 1908
by an act establishing and incorporating the University of British
Columbia and repealing the old act of 1890-1. This act, with its
subsequent amendments, determines the present constitution of the
University.
As authorized by an act passed by the Provincial Legislature
in 1910, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed a Site
Commission to decide upon a site for the proposed University. The
Commission held its first meeting on May 25th, 1910, in Victoria,
and after a thorough examination of the Province recommended 18 The University of British Columbia
the vicinity of Vancouver. In the autumn the Executive Council
decided to place the University at Point Grey—the site which the
Commission had named as its first choice. In 1911 the Legislature
passed an act authorizing the Lieutenant-Governor in Council to
grant this site to the University. The grant was increased in 1915,
so that it now consists of 548 acres at the extremity of Point Grey.
The waters of the Gulf of Georgia form more than half the
boundary of the University campus. A tract of some 3,000 acres
of Government land immediately adjoining the site, and lying
between it and the City of Vancouver, has been set aside by the
Government in order that University revenue may be provided by
its sale or lease.
In February, 1912, the Hon. H. E. Young, Minister of Education, called for competitive plans which should include plans in
detail for four buildings to be erected immediately, and a block
plan showing all the proposed buildings on the campus. Messrs.
Sharp and Thompson, of Vancouver, B. C, were the successful
competitors, and were appointed University Architects.
The first Convocation, held on August 21st, 1912, chose Mr.
F. L. Carter-Cotton as first Chancellor of the University. In March,
1913, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed as President
of the University F. F. Wesbrook, M.A., M.D, CM., LL.D. On
April 4th, 1918, Dr. R. E. McKechnie was elected Chancellor.
Dr. McKechnie has been re-elected continuously since that date
and entered on his ninth term in May, 1942. On the death of
President Wesbrook, October 20th, 1918, L. S. Klinck, Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture, was appointed acting President, and on
June 1st, 1919, President. Dr. Norman A. M. MacKenzie, President
of the University of New Brunswick, has been appointed as the third
President of the University of British Columbia, his appointment
to be effective upon the retirement of President Klinck on June
30th, 1944.
From its opening in 1915 till the Summer of 1925, the University
carried on its work in temporary quarters on part of the site of the
General Hospital in Fairview.
Construction work was commenced on the Science Building at
the permanent site in Point Grey in 1914, but was interrupted
because of war conditions. Work on this building was resumed in
1923, and in the autumn of the same year the contract was let for
the Library. These two buildings, which are of stone and are
fireproof, conform closely to the original plans as prepared by the
architects in 1914. The initial units of these structures, as well
as nine other buildings which are of a less permanent character,
were completed in 1925, and at the beginning- uZ Session 1925-26
the University commenced work in its new quarters. Historical Sketch 19
The inauguration of the new buildings was held on October 15th
and 16th, 1925, on which occasion honorary degrees were granted
by the University for the first time.
THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNIVERSITY
The Constitution of the University is governed by the British
Columbia University Act, B.C.R.S. 1936, c. 299, and Amending
Acts, which provide
That the University shall consist of a Chancellor, Convocation,
Board of Governors, Senate, Faculty Council, and the
Faculties; that the Convocation shall be composed of the
Chancellor, the Senate, all persons who became members
of the Convocation prior to the first day of January,
1919, all persons holding academic appointments within the
University and whose names are added to the roll of
Convocation by the Registrar of the University from time
to time upon instructions from the President, and all
persons who have become graduates of the'University; that
the Chancellor shall be elected by the members of the
Convocation; that the Board of Governors shall consist of
eleven members—the Chancellor, who shall be the Chairman thereof, the President, three persons elected by. the
Senate from among its members, and six members appointed
by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council; that the Senate shall
consist of: (a) The Chancellor, and the President of the
University, who shall be chairman thereof; (b) the deans
and two professors of each of the Faculties elected by
members of the Faculty; (c) three members to be appointed
by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council; (d) the principals
of the normal schools; (e) one member elected by the high
school principals and assistants who are actually engaged in
teaching; (f) one member to be elected by the governing
body of every affiliated college or school in this Province;
(g) fifteen members to be elected by Convocation from the
members thereof; (h) one member elected by the British
Columbia Teachers' Federation.
It is further provided that the University shall be non-sectarian.
The University Act gives the University full powers to grant
such degrees in the several Faculties and different branches of
knowledge as the Senate may from time to time determine. It
reserves for the University the sole right in this Province to confer
degrees, except in Theology, and it expressly enacts that'' No other
university having corporate powers capable of being exercised
within the Province shall be known by the same name, nor shall
any such university have power to grant degrees." LOCATION AND BUILDINGS
Location
The University is situated on the promontory which forms the
western extremity of the Point Grey Peninsula. On three sides it
is bounded by the Gulf of Georgia. The site comprises an area of
548 acres, of which approximately one-half is campus. In all
directions appear snow-capped mountains, strikingly rugged and
impressive.
Buildings
The buildings, planned to meet the requirements of fifteen
hundred students, are of two classes, permanent and semi-permanent. The former were designed by the University architects,
Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, the latter by architects of the
Department of Public Works of the Provincial Government. The
permanent buildings have been erected in the location originally
assigned for them; the others in the quadrangle designated as
"unassigned" in the original plan. By utilizing the "unassigned"
area for the semi-permanent buildings, all the locations intended
for future expansion have been left available.
The entire mechanical equipment of these buildings was
designed after a close study had been made not only of present
requirements, but of the ultimate development of the institution.
This consideration accounts for the fact that only a part of the
present equipment is permanent. After a careful survey of the
whole situation, a forced hot water system was found to present
advantages that made its adoption advisable. Direct radiation with
a system of warmed air supply and extraction for ventilation is
used to take care of the heat losses in the buildings. A separate
system of ventilation is installed for all sanitary conveniences, and
a specially constructed system for fume closets. The various
services throughout these buildings, such as hot and cold water,
distilled water, gas and steam for laboratory purposes, compressed
air, etc., with the necessary apparatus, are all of a modern type.
An attempt has been made to reduce vibration and noise to a
minimum by installing all moving apparatus on floating slabs, with
a further insulation of cork.
Library
The University Library consists of more than 140,000 volumes,
and almost- 100,000 pamphlets. It includes representative works
in all the courses offered by the University, and a growing collection
of books in other subjects. It is notable for its high percentage Location and Buildings 21
of the transactions and proceedings of learned societies, and its
long runs of scholarly periodicals — the materials essential to
research.
It is one of three Canadian Depositories of the Library of
Congress Catalogue, a collection of 1,750,000 printed cards. The
catalogue is kept fully up to date, and between 50,000 and 60,000
new cards, issued each year, are interfiled as received.
The Library also possesses a College Art Teaching Equipment
Set, organized and presented by the Carnegie Corporation of New
York. This consists of about 185 specially selected works covering
the fine and applied arts, and of more than 2,000 reproductions,
photographed or coloured, illustrating these.
Another notable gift to the University, made by the Carnegie
Corporation of New York, is the College Music Set. This now consists of over 1,250 records representing musical development in all
its forms, with reproducing instruments specially designed for a
large auditorium, and a collection of books on musical theory and
history, together with a large number of orchestral scores. The
Set is regularly used for student recitals, and to illustrate lectures
on the appreciation of music. '
The Library receives regularly over 900 serial publications.
The book collection is classified throughout on the Congressional
system.
Books to which the teaching staff have specially referred their
students are placed in a " Reserved'' class. These are shelved apart
from the main collection, and are loaned only for use in the building, and for a limited period.
Unbound periodicals are not loaned. Bound periodicals, and
books that are costly, rare, or unsuitable for general circulation,
are loaned only under special conditions.
While the Library is primarily for the staff and students of
the University, its resources are available to those of the general
public engaged in research or special study, and who make personal
application to the Librarian for the privilege of its use. Such
persons are known as "extra-mural readers." By order of the
Board of Governors a fee of $1.00 per calendar year is charged
such readers. In addition, they pay necessary mailing costs, a
deposit being required from those unable to call personally for
books loaned.
The Library also administers the book collection of the University
Extension Department. This consists of about 1200 volumes, and
is increasing as the Department's work develops. The University or British Columbia
The Extension Department's collection also includes more than
3,500 plays, for the service of dramatic groups and theatre students
throughout the Province.
The extension Department's book and play collections are available to those who have registered with the Department.
The University is deeply indebted to all who have made gifts to
the Library. These have been both valuable and numerous. Their
number prevents detailed acknowledgment, but recognition should
be made of a number of sets of transactions, and complete or partial
sets of scientific periodicals, given by societies and friends of the
University. The most interesting and valuable of these gifts are
listed in the annual report of the Library to the Senate.
Museums
These consist of (1) the Burnet Collection of South Seas and
other ethnological specimens, housed on the main floor of the
Library; (2) the Geological and Geographical Museum, in Room
116, Applied Science Building; (3) the Zoological Museum, housed
in various rooms of the Applied Science Building.
The Burnet Collection was made by the late Frank Burnet, who
donated it and arranged it in its present home. It contains groups
of artifacts representative of the ethnology and archaeology of
various parts of the Pacific Basin. The largest unit, 1170 catalogued
items, is from the islands of the South Pacific, but Malaysia and
North and South America are also strongly represented.
The Geological and Geographical Museum has been developed as
a medium for the visual instruction of students and visitors. It is
closely coordinated with the Department of Geology and Geography, but is used freely by students of sociology and history, as
well as by art students from city studios. The exhibits include the
Dr. H. M. Ami collection of pre-historical artifacts from Les Eyzies,
France; the Buttimer collection of Indian baskets; the R. A. Cumming collection of over 700 artifacts from the Marpole Kitchen
Midden; the Michell Pierce collection of Eskimo clothing and
utensils; the Peach and Home geological model of the Assynt
Mountains, Scotland; suites of fossils, minerals, birds, and
mammals, relief map-models, and many other things of interest.
The Zoological Museum, containing material representative of
both the vertebrate and the invertebrate fields, is housed mainly in
the northern wing of the Applied Science Building. Owing to lack
of room in the museum, the collection is scattered in hallways and
rooms wherever space can be found. The collection of marine in- Location and Buildings 23
vertebrates of the northeastern Pacific Ocean is one of the largest
extant. A collection of 12 beautifully mounted heads of B. C.
game, donated by Messrs. G. L. and R. J. Pop, hangs on the walls
of Room 100, Applied Science Building, and a fine suite of African
game horns, donated by Mr. W. F. Byers, hangs in Room 120 of
the same building.
The collections are freely available to students and research
institutions.
Gymnasium
This building was completed in 1929 and presented to the
University by the Alma Mater Society. It is situated adjacent to
the tennis courts and conveniently close to the playing fields. The
style of architecture and exterior finish harmonizes well with that
of the other buildings on the campus. The playing floor has an
area of 6,000 square feet, and is surrounded on three sides by tiers
of benches which will accommodate 1,400 persons. In the space
behind these seats are located the dressing rooms, drying rooms,
locker rooms, and shower baths. Approximately one-third of this
space has been set aside for the exclusive use of the women
students. The offices of the instructors in physical education are
located in the gymnasium. In the building are included also a
properly equipped training and first-aid room, an equipment room,
and a kitchen. Facilities for general gymnasium and indoor athletic
work have been provided.
Stadium and Playing Fields
In accordance with the original landscape plan prepared by
Mawson in 1913, the main playing field area, consisting of about
16 acres, is situated east of the East Mall and north of the University Boulevard. Development work was started early in
January, 1931, as an aid to the acute unemployment situation, and
was made possible by funds provided chiefly by subscriptions from
the Faculty, students, and friends of the University. Much of the
labour was obtained through the courtesy of the Relief Department
of the City of Vancouver. Twenty thousand cubic yards of soil
and gravel were used to bring the track and field to grade.
In addition to the main playing field of the stadium, there are
three other full-size fields and a number of smaller areas set aside
for outdoor games.
The first section of the grandstand for the stadium was erected
in the summer of 1937 on the west side of the main playing field. 24 The University of British Columbia
It is a covered, reinforced concrete structure, 126 feet long and
provides seating accommodation for 1,600 spectators. On either
side are two wooden bleacher sections of 500 seats each. The plan
provides for the ultimate continuance of the main section around
the field and therefore the present bleachers are constructed in
movable sections. Underneath the present main stand there are
locker rooms, dressing rooms, showers, ticket booths, and specially
constructed drying rooms. Space is also provided for two squash
racket courts, which will be completed as soon as funds are available. Funds for the construction of the grandstand were provided
through a $40,000 bond issue by the Alma Mater Society. The
Provincial Government has undertaken to assume the annual
charges for interest on the bonds.
The Brock Memorial Building
In connection with the celebration of the twenty-first anniversary of the opening of the University in 1936, it was decided
that a memorial be established by general appeal to students,
graduates, and friends of the University throughout Canada. A
committee representing all branches of the University decided
that the memorial should take the form of a student union building,
dedicated to the memory of the late Dean of Applied Science,
Reginald W. Brock, and Mrs. Brock, by whose tragic deaths as a
result of an aeroplane accident the University suffered a great loss.
The original fund for the construction of the building was
subscribed by relatives of Dean and Mrs. Brock, friends of the
University throughout Canada and the United States, alumni
and students of the University, and former colleagues of Dean
Brock. The balance of the amount required to complete construction was provided by the students and the Board of Governors
in cash and through a bond issue of the Alma Mater Society.
Furnishings for the building were provided from a fund raised
over a period of years by the Women's Union Building Committee
of the University.
The building is situated adjacent to the playing fields and
gymnasium. In it are located the offices of the Alma Mater Society
and various clubs and student activities. The building contains,
also, common rooms, lunch and tea rooms, and accommodation for
social activities. In architectural design and exterior finish, it
harmonizes well with the other buildings on the campus.
The Brock Memorial Building was dedicated in January, 1940. Location and Buildings 25
Forest Products Laboratories
The Forest Products Laboratories of Canada, Vancouver Laboratory, which is maintained by the Forest Service of the Department
of Mines and Resources, Canada, occupies three buildings provided
and kept up through a co-operative agreement between the
University and the Dominion Government.
Plan of Campus
The plan at the back of the Calendar shows the buildings which
have been erected and indicates the nature of their construction.
It also shows their relation to the other groups of buildings which
are to be erected in the future.
ENDOWMENTS AND DONATIONS
It has become a tradition for each graduating class to make a
gift to the University. The Class of 1943 presented a public address system for the Brock Memorial Building and made a donation
to the Library fund.
A list of the other most important gifts received during last
year is given below under the various departments or in the Annual
Report of the Library. 1
Department of Biology and Botany
(For Herbarium and Botanical Gardens)
SEEDS
CANADA Montreal Botanical Garden.
UNITED STATES Mr. J. F. Davidson, California.
The John H. Holliday Park, Indianapolis.
U. S. Department of Agriculture, "Washington.
BRITAIN Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew.
Botanic Garden, University of St. Andrews.
Botanic Gardens, Glasnevin, Dublin.
PORTUGAL Botanic Garden, University of Coimbra.
HERBARIUM SPECIMENS
Dr. C H. Crickmay, Haney.
Mr. J. F. Davidson, California.
Mr. Fred Fodor, Kimberley.
Dr. Ian McT. Cowan.
Department of Geology and Geography
1. Dr. E. M. Burwash: Oyster shells from Scarborough, Toronto.
2. Consolidated Mining and Smelting Company: Specimens of boulangerite.
3. Mr. J. A. Eddleston: Indian stone mortar from Delia, Alberta.
4. Highland Bell Mining Company: Suites of rich silver ores.
5. Mr. F. R. Joubin: Miscellaneous ores and minerals.
6. Mr. S. N. Ross: Miscellaneous ores and minerals.
7. Mr. J. M. Turnbull: Miscellaneous ores and minerals.
Department of History
Mr, E. G. Baynes: Photographic study of Sir James Douglas. 26 The University of British Columbia
Department of Zoology
(For Museum of Zoology)
Insects:
Mr. E. R. Buckell, Dominion Entomological Laboratory, Kamloops: Collections of Vespine wasps.
Mr. Phillip Carter, Vancouver: Collection of insects from the Cariboo
highway.
Dr. I. McT. Cowan, Vancouver: Ectoparasites of birds and mammals.
Mr. Hugh B. Leech, Dominion Entomological Laboratory, Vernon: Collections of named Coleoptera and other insects.
Mr. J. H. Munro, Okanagan Landing: Ectoparasites of birds and mammals.
Mr. K. Racey, Vancouver: Ectoparasites of birds and mammals.
Dr. M. V. Williams, Vancouver: Ectoparasites of birds and mammals from
the Alaska Highway.
Other invertebrates:
Miss O. Boyd, Cowichan Lake: Polychaeta.
Dr. I. McT. Cowan, Vancouver: Marine molluscs.
Mr. D. Foskett, New Westminster: Fresh-water molluscs.
Professor W. J. K. Harkness, Toronto: Fresh-water Crustacea.
Mr. Lynn Harvey, Chilliwack: Molluscs.
Mr. H. F. Olds, Vancouver: Hawaiian coral.
Fishes:
Mr. K. Alexander, Gambier Island: Several species.
Mr. W. E. Barraclough, Nanaimo: Several species.
Dr. G. C. Carl, Provincial Museum, Victoria: 1 Remilegia australis.
Mr. S. Killick, Vancouver: Several species.
Amphibians and Reptiles:
Miss O. Boyd, Cowichan Lake: 1 rusty salamander.
Dr. V. C. Brink, Vancouver: 2 rattlesnakes.
Dr. I. McT. Cowan, Vancouver: 2 red salamanders, 2 northern wood frogs.
Mr. R. W. Pillsbury, Vancouver: Several collections of larval frogs and
salamanders. ■
Birds:
Major Allan Brooks, Okanagan Landing: 1 prairie falcon.
Dr. G. C. Carl, Victoria: 1 whistling swan.
Dr. I. McT. Cowan, Vancouver: 16 birds of 10 species.
Professor G. J. Spencer, Vancouver: 1 long-eared owl.
Mr. L. Smith, Surrey: 1 turkey vulture.
Mr. J. W. P. Wardlaw, Penticton: 1 rosy finch, 1 burrowing owl.
Dr. M. Y. Williams, Vancouver: 1 barred owl.
Department of Mines and Resources, Ottawa, per J. A. Munro: 2
trumpeter swans.
Mammals:
Dr. R. M. Anderson, Ottawa: 2 bats.
Mr. J. E. Bastin, Vancouver: Otter skeleton.
Mr. M. J. Biken, Vancouver: Skull of striped dolphin.
Mr. A. C. Brooks, Okanagan Landing: 1 bat.
Miss D. Dalziell, Okanagan Landing: 1 bat, 6 skulls of small mammals.
Mr. R. S. Hayes, Duncan: Skull of Roosevelt elk.
Mrs. E. Hearle, Kamloops: 1 buffalo skull.
Mr. L. Jobin, "Williams Lake: 4 bats.
Mr. F. W. Johnson, U. S. Forest Service, New Mexico: 6 specimens of
desert mule deer and 3 specimens of elk.
Mr. R. E. Luscher, Vancouver: 1 red fox.
Mr. E. A. Schwantje, Vancouver: 1 weasel.
Mr. F. M. Shillaker, Chezacut: 5 lynx skulls.
Mr. H. Wearne, Quick: Skulls of 2 mule deer and 2 moose.
(General Acknowledgments)
B. C. Packers, Vancouver: Materials for class use.
Dr. J. Bequaert, Harvard School of Tropical Medicine, Boston: Identification
of B. C. Vespine -wasps.
Mr. E. R. Buckell, Dominion Entomological Laboratory, Kamloops: Further
additions to the card index catalogue of the Journal of Economic
Entomology. Endowments and Donations 27
Mr. G. Holland, Dominion Entomological Laboratory, Kamloops: Identification
of B. C. Aphaniptera.
Dr. Harry Lange, University of California: Identification of B. C. Pter-
ophoridae.
Mr. H. B. Leech, Dominion Entomological Laboratory, Vernon: A further
contribution of entomological books, bulletins, and separates.
Mr. Allen Mail, Dominion Entomological Laboratory, Kamloops: Entomological
literature.
Dr. C. R. Twinn, Division of Entomology, Ottawa: Samples of recent wartime
insecticides.
Gratefully acknowledged is the close cooperation and assistance of the
Provincial Museum, through Director Dr. G. C. Carl; of the Provincial Game
Department, through Commissioners F. R. Butler and J. G. Cunningham; of
the Pacific Biological Station, through Director Dr. R. E. Foerster; and of
the Dominion Division of Entomology, through Mr. E. R. Buckell of the
Kamloops laboratory. These organizations have contributed most valuable
assistance, particularly in supplying travelling and collecting facilities, for
obtaining class, museum, and research materials, providing facilities for
research work, loaning books, donating and loaning class and research
specimens, etc. 28 The University of British Columbia
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Session
The academic year begins on the first of September and ends
on the last day of August. The Winter Session is divided into two
terms—the first, September to December; the second, January to
May. The Summer Session consists of seven weeks' instruction in
July and August. For Admission to the University, see page 32,
and for Registration and Attendance, see page 34.
Courses of Study
The University offers instruction in each of the three Faculties,
Arts and Science, Applied Science (including Nursing), and Agriculture, leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of
Commerce, Bachelor of Education, Bachelor of Home Economics,
Bachelor of Applied Science, Bachelor of Science in Forestry, and
Bachelor of Science in Agriculture. In the Faculty of Arts and
Science courses are offered leading to a Diploma in Social Work
and a Teacher Training Diploma. Advanced courses of instruction
and facilities for research leading to a Master's degree are offered
in each Faculty. Admission to these advanced courses, or to the
privileges of research, does not in itself imply admission to candidacy for a higher degree.
Academic Dress
The undergraduate's gown is black in colour and of the ordinary
stuff material, of ankle length, and with long sleeves and the yoke
edged with khaki cord. The graduate's gown is the same, without
cord. The Bachelor's hood is of the Cambridge pattern, black
bordered with the distinctive colour of the particular Faculty; the
Master's hood is the same, lined with the distinctive colour. The
Bachelor of Commerce hood differs from that of Bachelor of Arts
by the addition of a white cord; that of the Bachelor of Science in
Forestry from that of Bachelor of Applied Science by the addition
of a green cord; while the Bachelor of Education hood has a border
of white edged with a cord of University blue. The colours are, for
Arts and Science, the University blue; for Applied Science, red;
for Agriculture, maize.
University Health Service
This service was begun in 1925 when the Lieutenant-Governor
in Council, upon the recommendation of the Provincial Health
Officer, appointed a Medical Health Officer for the University Area. General Information 29
In the Fall of 1927, the Provincial Health Officer added to the
University Health Service a Public Health Nurse, thus commencing
the continuous operation of a full-time local Health Department on
the campus and University Endowment Area.
In November, 1936, the University Endowment Area became
part of the Metropolitan Health Area under the direction of the
Metropolitan Health Committee, thus affording the University the
extra services and facilities enjoyed by the larger organization,
which provides through its Health Units a Public Health Service
to the entire Greater Vancouver Area. The University Area is
now Health Unit 3A of the Greater Vancouver Area.
The offices of the University Health Service are located in the
Auditorium Building. The first aid furniture and supplies for
this office were the generous gift of the Graduating Class of 1927.
Purposes of the University Health Service
The first purpose of the Health Service for Students is to supervise the physical and mental health of the student from the time
of admission to the University until graduation, so that as the
student takes his place in the outside world he will not be handicapped by physical defects or mental breakdown during the period
in which he is adjusting himself to his career.
On admission to the University, each student is given a complete
physical examination; also all students who have not had an examination by this University for more than four years. All students
who have been absent from the University for a year or more are
to report to the Health Service Office within a month of return.
Students who are to participate in strenuous athletics will be
given an examination to determine their status of physical fitness.
Later the Medical Officer has a personal conference during the
First Term with those who received examination. This conference
is for the purpose of individualizing the previous examination and
for the re-checking and "following-up" of any physical defects
which were found at the time. Evidence, satisfactory to the
medical officer, of successful immunization against smallpox is
required. Preventive vaccinations and inoculations are given by
the Health Service.
The Medical Officer is available at specified hours for consultations with students on health problems.
One of the most important tasks of the Health Service is the
control of communicable disease. Much valuable time can be
saved the student body by the prompt and immediate application
of preventive measures in checking the spread of communicable
disease. 30 The University of British Columbia
Tuberculosis Control
Because tuberculosis occupies first place as a cause of death of
persons of college age, it is given special attention. The University
Health Service therefore gives to each new student at the time of
his entrance examination a tuberculin skin test and provides for
an X-ray of the chest to those showing a skin reaction to tuberculosis. This project is of very great value, for when tuberculosis
is diagnosed and treatment instituted before physical breakdown
occurs, the patient is saved from years of invalidism and perhaps
death, and his fellow students are protected from infection.
Rules Governing Communicable and Other Illnesses
Students developing any illness or suffering from any injury
while on the campus should apply for first aid to the University
Health Service. This is particularly required if the student
develops any illness of a communicable nature, including the
common cold.
Students developing any illness or suffering any injury while
at home, boarding house, fraternity house, etc., are required to
report the same to the University Health Service. The development of any communicable disease in a University Student or
any person living in the same house, must be reported by the student
to the University Health Service without delay. Students exposed
to a communicable disease may be permitted, by special order of
the Medical Health Officer, to attend the University for a prescribed
period, despite the exposure.
Such students shall report daily (or oftener, at the discretion
of the Medical Health Officer) to the University Health Service
for such prescribed period. Failure to so report will result in
immediate exclusion from the University.
Students absent on account of illness must present medical certificates. Immediately on return t.o the University and before attending lectures, the student must appear in person, with the certificate,
at the University Health Service. The University Health Service
will examine the person concerned and will immediately forward
the certificate, with report thereon, to the Dean of the Faculty.
If the absence occurs during the examinations, the medical certificate must be received within one day after the termination of the
examination period. A medical certificate must show the nature
and the period of the disability. Medical report forms may be
obtained from the Health Service office.
The Health Service is a preventive service and can not provide
treatment for sick students. General Information 31
Summer Session
The University Health Service provides a health service for
students attending the Summer Session. Details of this service
may be found in the Announcement of the Summer Session.
Physical Education
Physical Education was organized at the University during the
session 1935-36. The work for the present is under the general
supervision of a committee appointed by the President of the
University. War-time conditions serve to emphasize the need for
physical fitness. All medically fit men and women students are now
required to devote at least one hour a week to physical training.
The men take their work as part of the military training programme.
Particular attention is given to activities which develop all-round
physical condition rather than special techniques and skills in
recreational or team sports.
The Physical Education programme contributes to the mental
and physical health of the student body. Participation is encouraged
in physical activities which will be useful as a health measure and
in providing social opportunities in adult life. The activities are
limited by the accommodation at the gymnasium. They include
for men: badminton, basketball, boxing, cross-country running,
golf, tumbling, volleyball, wrestling, track and field, football, and
rugby. The women's activities are: archery, badminton, basketball, dancing, gymnastics, group games, light apparatus, and volleyball.
A course in recreational leadership is given for those who are
interested in play leadership in schools, playgrounds, social centres,
and leisure time organizations.
The geographic location of the University precludes the possibility of any extensive intercollegiate athletic competition and
consequently great emphasis is placed for both men and women
upon intramural athletics.
Dean of Women
During the session the Dean of Women may be consulted by
parents and students on matters pertaining to living conditions,
vocational guidance, and other questions that directly affect the
social and intellectual life of the women students.
Board and Residence
A list of boarding-houses which receive men students may be
obtained from the Eegistrar, and a similar list for women students
may be obtained from the Dean of Women. Men and women 32 The University of British Columbia
students are not permitted to lodge in the same house, unless they
are members of the same family, or receive special permission from
the Senate. Women students under twenty-five years of age are
permitted to occupy suites in apartment houses only when accompanied by some older person. The Dean of Women undertakes the
inspection of all boarding houses and housekeeping rooms listed for
the accommodation of women students. Any residence accommodation arranged by women students for themselves must also meet
with the approval of the Dean of Women, who should be informed
of such plans in advance. The cost of good board and lodging is
from $33 to $40 a month; of a room alone, $10 to $15 a month. A
grill is operated under the supervision of the University, and lunch,
afternoon tea, and light supper may be obtained there at very
reasonable prices.
General Conduct
The University authorities do not assume responsibilities which
naturally rest with parents. This being so, it is the policy of the
University to rely on the good sense and on the home training of
students for the preservation of good moral standards.
ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY
All enquiries relating to admission to the University should be
addressed to the Registrar.
The accommodation for students in the University is limited.
The University, therefore, reserves the right to limit the attendance.
The Faculty of Applied Science reserves the right of selection
and admission of students entering the Second Year of the Combined Course and the Third Year of the Double Course in Arts
and Science and Nursing.
The University reserves the right to limit the registration in, or
to cancel, any of the courses listed. Limitation may be imposed if
the numbers desiring any course are found to be too large for the
lecture rooms and laboratories available for that course, or for
the number of instructors in the department concerned, or for the
equipment and supplies which can be obtained. Certain courses
may be cancelled if the numbers of instructors in the departments
concerned prove to be inadequate to offer all the courses listed.
1. Except under special circumstances, no student under the
age of sixteen is admitted to the University. For admission to the
Second Year of the course in Nursing (or the Third Year of the
Double Course in Arts and Nursing) a student must be eighteen Admission to the University 33
years of age, and for admission to any course in Social Work,
twenty-one years of age.
2. Candidates for admission to the courses in the First Year of
the Faculty of Arts and Science or the Faculty of Agriculture
and to the course in Nursing in Applied Science are required to
pass the University Entrance (Junior Matriculation) examination
of the Province of British Columbia or to submit certificates showing that they have passed an equivalent examination elsewhere.
Special regulations are prescribed for admission to courses in
Applied Science, and are given under the heading of Admission in
the Applied Science section of the Calendar.
3. Students who have passed the Senior Matriculation examination are admitted to the courses of the Second Year in the
Faculty of Arts and Science. Students who have partial Senior
Matriculation standing will be granted credit in the First Year in
each subject in which they have made 50 per cent, or over.
4. A student who has a failure in a subject of the University
Entrance examination standing against him will not be admitted
to the University.
5. The University Entrance and Senior Matriculation examinations of the Province of British Columbia are conducted by the
High School and University Matriculation Board of the Province.
This Board consists of members appointed by the Department of
Education and by the University. . The requirements for these
examinations are stated in the publication, Requirements for
University Entrance and Senior Matriculation, issued by the University. The courses of study for the various grades in the high
schools are given in the Programme of Studies for the High Schools,
issued by the Provincial Department of Education.
6. Certificates or diplomas showing that a candidate has passed
the matriculation examination of another university will be
accepted in lieu of the University Entrance or Senior Matriculation
examinations if the Faculty concerned considers that the examination has covered the same subjects and required the same standards. If, however, the examinations cover some but not all of
the necessary subjects, the candidate will be required to pass the
examinations in the subjects not covered.
7. A candidate who wishes to enter by certificates other than a
Matriculation or University Entrance certificate issued in British
Columbia should submit to the Registrar the original certificates.
If he wishes these returned to him, he must present also a copy of
each certificate for record at the University. He should under no
circumstances come to the University without having first obtained 34 The University of British Columbia
from the Registrar a statement of the value of the certificates he
holds, as these may lack one or more essential subjects, or the work
done in a subject may not be adequate, or, again, the percentage
gained may not be sufficiently high. Moreover, it must be remembered that a certificate may admit to one Faculty and not to
another. When an applicant's diploma or certificate does not show
the marks obtained in the several subjects of the examination, he
must arrange to have a statement of his marks sent to the Registrar
by the Education Department or University issuing such diploma
or certificate.
8. A student of another university applying for exemption from
any subject or subjects which he has already studied is required
to submit with his application a calendar of the university in
which he has previously studied, together with a complete statement of the course he has followed and a certificate of the standing
gained in the several subjects.* The Faculty concerned will determine the standing of such a student in this University.
REGISTRATION AND ATTENDANCE
Those who intend to register as students of the University are
required to make application to the Registrar, on forms to b«
obtained from the Registrar's office. This application should be
made in person or by mail early in August, or as soon as the results
of the matriculation examinations are known, and must be accompanied by the registration fee of $5.00. (See regulations in reference to Admission to the University, page 32.)
No student with unsatisfactory standing will be permitted to
register in September without the permission of Faculty.
The Faculty of Applied Science reserves the right of selection
and admission of students entering the Second Year of the Combined Course and the Third Year of the Double Course in Arts and
Science and Nursing.
Application for admission to Second Year Nursing or the Teacher
Training Course must be made to the Registrar on or before August
15th. A selection of candidates will be made immediately thereafter
on the basis of qualifications. Forms of application for admission to
these courses may be obtained from the Registrar's office.
*Fot the conditions under which exemption is granted in the Faculty of Arts and
Science, see Courses Leading to the Degree of B.A. Registration and Attendance 35
The last days for registration are: for First and Second Year
students, Wednesday, September 13th; for other undergraduate
students of the regular Winter Session, Friday, September 15th;
for graduate students,'and for students in Extra-Sessional Classes
and Directed Reading Courses, Friday, October 13th.
1. There are four classes of students:
(a) Graduate students—Students who are pursuing courses of
study in a Faculty in which they hold a degree, whether
they are proceeding to a Master's degree or not. Students,
however, who are proceeding to a Bachelor's degree in
another course in the same Faculty in which they hold a
degree, or in another Faculty, will register as undergraduates.
(b) Full undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree in
any Faculty who have passed all the examinations precedent
to the year in which they are registered.
(c) Conditioned undergraduates — Students proceeding to a
degree with defects in their standing which do not prevent
their entering a higher year under the regulations governing Examinations and Advancement of the Faculty in
which they are registered.
(d) Partial students — Students not belonging to one of the
three preceding classes. (See 7, below.)
2. All students are required to register at the office of the
Registrar on or before the last day for registration, to furnish the
information necessary for the University records, to enrol for
the particular classes which they wish to attend, and to sign the
following declaration:
'' I hereby accept and submit myself to the statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances of The University of British Columbia, and
of the Faculty or Faculties in which I am registered, and to any
amendments thereto which may be made while I am a student of
the University, and I promise to observe the same."
In the information furnished for the University records, students
are requested to state what church they propose to make their place
of worship. This information is available for any of the city
churches desiring it.
3. A late registration fee of $2.00 will be charged all students
who register after the above dates.
No registration for undergraduate students of the regular Winter
Session will be accepted after Monday, September 25th, without the
special permission of the Faculty concerned, and a candidate so 36 The University of British Columbia
accepted for registration may be required to take fewer courses
than the regular year's work.
4. Students registering for the first time must present the
certificates which constitute their qualification for admission to
the course of study for which they wish to register. The Registrar
is empowered to register all duly qualified students. Doubtful cases
will be dealt with by the Faculty concerned.
5. Students doing work in two academic years will register in
the lower year and fill out their course cards in such a way as to
make clear which courses are required to complete the lower year.
6. Students desiring to make a change in the course for which
they have registered must apply to the Registrar on the proper
form for a "change of course." Except in special circumstances,
no change will be allowed after the second week of the session. If the
application is approved by the Faculty concerned, the Registrar
will give the necessary notifications.
7. Partial students, who are not proceeding to a degree, are not
normally required to pass an examination for admission, but before
registering they must produce a certificate showing that they have
satisfied the Dean and the heads of the departments concerned
that they are qualified to pursue with advantage the course of
study which they propose to undertake.
8. Students are required to attend at least seven-eighths of the
lectures in each course that they take. Admission to a lecture or laboratory and credit for attendance may be refused by the instructor
for lateness, misconduct, inattention, or neglect of duty. Absence
consequent on illness or domestic affliction may be excused only by
the Dean of the Faculty concerned, and medical certificates or other
evidence must be presented. If the absence occurs during the session,
the student must appear in person, with the certificate, at the University Health Service immediately on return to the University,
and before attendance upon class work. The University Health
Service will examine the person concerned and will immediately
forward the certificate, with report thereon, to the Dean of the
Faculty. // the absence occurs during the examinations, the
certificate must be sent to the Dean of the Faculty within two
days after the termination of the examination period. A medical
certificate must show the nature and the period of the disability.
Medical report forms may be obtained from the Dean's office. In
cases of deficient attendance students may (with the sanction of
the Dean and the head of the department concerned) be excluded
from the Christmas or the final examinations in a course; but, in
the case of a final examination, unless the unexcused absences
exceed one-fourth of the total number of lectures in a course, such Registration and Attendance 37
student may be permitted to sit for supplemental examination.
(See regulation in each Faculty in reference to Examinations and
Advancement.)
9. All candidates for a degree must make formal application
for graduation at least one month previous to the Congregation at
which they expect to obtain the degree. Special forms for this
purpose may be obtained from the Registrar's office.
FEES
All cheques must be certified and made payable to "The University of British Columbia.''
The registration fee is not returnable.
If fees are not paid when due an additional fee of $2.00 will be
charged.
Fees are not transferable from one session to another.
A request for a REFUND OF FEES must be made by the
student to the BURSAR within FOUR WEEKS after the student
has discontinued his work; and fees for which a refund has not
been so requested WILL NOT BE RETURNED.
The Sessional Fees are as follows:
For Full and Conditioned Undergraduates
in arts and science :
Registration—Payable before registration $ 5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 2nd:
Sessional Fee $ 75.00
Alma Mater Fee 13.00
Caution Money 5.00
93.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 10th 75.00
$173.00
IN SOCIAL WORK COURSE:
Registration—Payable before registration
For 6 units or less $ 2.00
For over 6 units ... 5.00
Caution Money—Payable Oetober 16th—: 5.00
Alma Mater Fee*—Payable October 16th 13.00
Course Fees (payable at $12.00 per unit for courses taken) 150.00*
Course fees due in any session may be paid in two equal instalments, on October 16th and January 10th.
•Social Work students taking any of Courses 1-13, Nursing 5, Nursing 27,
and these courses only, are relieved from paying the Alma Mater fee. The University of British Columbia
in teacher training course :
Registration—Payable before registration. $ 5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 2nd:
Sessional Fee $ 75.00
Alma Mater Fee 13.00
Caution Money . 5.00
93.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 10th 75.00
$173.00
IN APPLIED SCIENCE : ==^=
Registration—Payable before registration $ 5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 2nd:
Sessional Fee' $100.00
Alma Mater Fee 13.00
Caution Money 5.00
118.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 10th 100.00
All students taking the Spring Surveying School are required
to pay $3.00 Caution Money when paying their Second Term -fcOOQ (\\(\\
Sessional Fee. Sp-s-sd.UU
IN NURSING AND PUBLIC HEALTH* :
Registration—Payable before registration $ 5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 2nd:
Sessional Fee $ 75.00
Alma Mater Fee 13.00
Caution Money 5.00
93.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 10th 75.00
$173.00
IN AGRICULTURE : ==
Registration—Payable before registration $ 5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 2nd:
Sessional Fee $ 75.00
Alma Mater Fee 13.00
Caution Money 5.00
93.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 10th 75.00
$173.00
•For Third, Fourth, and Fifth Year students in Nursing (i.e., students in
the affiliated hospital) the Sessional fee is $1.00, payable with an Alma Mater
fee of $4.00, on or before October 2nd.
Students admitted to a one-year course for graduate nurses and proceeding to the Certificate on a basis of part-time attendance over two or more
years will pay $9.00 per unit. Fees 39
OCCUPATIONAL COURSE :*
Registration—Payable before registration $ 5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 2nd:
Sessional Fee :....$ 30.00
Alma Mater Fee . 13.00
Caution Money 5.00
■ 48.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 10th 30.00
$ 83.00
For Partial Students ===
Fees per "Unit" $12.00
Registration—Payable before registration ,
For 6 units or less 2.00
For over 6 units 5.00
First half payable on or before October 2nd, along
with j
Alma Mater Fee 13.00
Caution Money 5.00
Second Half payable on or before January 10th.
For Students in Extra-sessional Classes and
Directed Reading Courses
Registration—Payable before registration $ 2.00
Fees per 3-Unit Course 36.00
First Half Unit Fees payable on or before October 16th.
Second Half Unit Fees payable on or before January 10th.
FOR GRADUATES
Registration—Payable before registration
For 6 units or less , $ 2.00
For over 6 units 5.00
Caution Money—Payable October 16th 5.00
Course Fees (payable at $12.00 per unit for courses taken) 125.00
Course fees due in any session may be paid in two equal instalments, on October 16th and January 10th.
FOR BACHELOR OF EDUCATION
Registration—Payable before registration
For 6 units or less $ 2.00
For over 6 units 5.00
Caution Money—Payable October 16th 5.00
Course Fees (payable at $12.00 per unit for courses taken) 150.00
Course fees due in any session may be paid in two equal instalments, on October 16th and January 10th.
•NOTE.—Students transferring credit from the Occupational to the Degree Course
in Agriculture must pay the difference in fees. 40 The University of British Columbia
Late Registration
See page 35 $ 2.00
The Alma Mater Fee is a fee exacted from all students for the
support of the Alma Mater Society. It was authorized by the Board
of Governors at the request of the students themselves.
The Caution Money is a deposit from which deductions will be
made to cover breakages, wastage, and use of special materials in
laboratories, Library, etc. If the balance to the credit of a student
falls below $1.50, a further deposit of $5.00 may be required.
Caution Money will be refunded after the 30th day of April.
Immediately after the last day for the payment of fees, students
whose fees have not been paid will have their registrations cancelled,
and will be excluded from classes. Such students will not be permitted to register again during the term until they obtain the
consent of the Dean, pay all fees, and present to the Registrar a
statement from the Bursar certifying that fees have been paid.
Students registering after October 2nd shall pay their fees at
the time of registration, failing which they become subject to the
provisions of the preceding regulation.
Students borrowing books from the University Library for
preparatory reading courses will be required to make the usual
deposit of $2.00 with the Librarian to cover mailing cost.
For Summer Session Students
Fees are payable on registration, otherwise an additional fee of
$2.00 will be exacted.
Registration—Payable before registration $ 2.00
Minimum Class Fee 25.00
Per '' Unit'' 12.00
Summer Session Association ■ 2.00
Special Fees
Regular supplemental examination, per paper $ 5.00
Special examination (Applied Science and Agriculture),
per paper . . 7.50
Re-reading, per paper 2.00
Graduation 15.00
Supplemental examination fees must be paid by August 15th
when application for examination is made. Special examination
fees and fees for re-reading are payable with application.
Graduation fees must be paid two weeks before Congregation.
(See regulation in reference to application for a degree, page 37.) Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 41
MEDALS, SCHOLARSHIPS, PRIZES, BURSARIES,
AND LOANS FOR 1944-45
GENERAL REGULATIONS
1. Scholarships, prizes, and bursaries which are not based solely
on academic standing are indicated by an asterisk. Unless other
instructions are given in the Calendar notice, intending candidates
must make application to the Registrar not later than the last day
of the final examinations on forms provided for the purpose.
2. All awards of medals, scholarships, prizes, and bursaries are
made by Senate, unless otherwise provided for by special resolution
of Senate.
The award of a medal, prize, scholarship, or bursary is final when
announced by the University.
3. Medals, scholarships, prizes, bursaries, and loans are open to
Winter Session students only, unless otherwise stated, and marks
obtained in Summer Session courses are not taken into account in
awarding them.
4. If the award of a medal, scholarship, or prize is based on an
examination, no award will be made to a candidate who obtains
less than 75 per cent, of the possible marks.
5. To be eligible for a General Proficiency Scholarship a student
must take the full year's course, which must include the required
courses for the year in which he is registered, except that in the
Faculty of Arts and Science and in Agriculture other subjects
may be substituted for the required courses if credit for these has
already been obtained.
The standing of students taking more than the required number
of units will be determined on the basis of the required number of
units to be chosen in a manner most advantageous to the students.
6. Unless otherwise specified in the Calendar notice, no. student
may enjoy the proceeds of more than one scholarship in the same
academic year, and the scholarships thus relinquished will be
awarded to the candidates next in order of merit. Winners of more
than one scholarship will be given recognition in the published lists.
7. Winners of scholarships who desire to do so may resign the
monetary value. Nevertheless, their names will appear as winners
in the University lists. Any funds thus made available will be used
for additional scholarships, bursaries, or student loans. 42 The University of British Columbia
8. Scholarships under the jurisdiction of the University are
payable in two instalments—on the last day for the payment of
fees in each term. Undergraduate winners must continue their
courses to the satisfaction of the Faculty concerned during the
session following the award. The payment for the Second Term
may be withheld in the case of an undergraduate scholarship
holder whose work in the First Term has been unsatisfactory. A
Faculty is authorized to permit a scholarship to be reserved for
one year, provided the student shows satisfactory reasons for
postponing attendance. In the case of University Entrance and
Senior Matriculation scholarships, postponement will be granted
on medical grounds only. Application for reservation should be
made to the Registrar.
. 9. In awarding bursaries consideration will be given to the
'financial need of applicants.
10. Endowed scholarships and bursaries will be paid provided
the invested funds produce the necessary revenue.
If the invested funds do not produce the revenue required for the
amount of scholarships and bursaries as named in the Calendar,
these scholarships and bursaries will be correspondingly reduced.
11. The University does not guarantee the payment of any prizes
or scholarships other than those from the funds of the University.
With respect to prizes or scholarships based upon the gifts of individuals or associations other than the University, no award will
be made unless the funds required for the same have been actually
received from the private donor or donors.
12. The Senate of the University of British Columbia reserves
the right so to change the terms under which any exhibition,
scholarship, or prize may be established at the University of British
Columbia that the terms may better meet new conditions as they
arise and may more fully carry out the intentions of the donor and
maintain the usefulness of the benefaction. The right so reserved
shall be exercised by a resolution of the Senate duly confirmed by
the Board of Governors, provided always that a year's notice shall
be given in Senate of any proposed change and that the donor or
his representatives, if living, shall be consulted about the proposed
change.
13. Limited funds are provided from which loans, not to exceed
$100, may be made to undergraduate students who have completed
satisfactorily two years' University work and who can show that they
are in need of pecuniary assistance. Interest at the rate of 5 per
cent, per annum is charged on these loans. They must be secured Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 43
by approved joint promissory note given for a definite term and
signed by the applicant and his parent or guardian. Loans are not
granted to graduate students nor to students in diploma courses.
Applications for loans should be addressed to the Bursar of the
University.
14. The University is in possession of a great deal of information
regarding graduate scholarships, fellowships, and assistantships
which other universities and various research bodies make available.
This information may be obtained from the Registrar.
MEDALS
The Governor-General's Gold Medal
A gold medal, presented by His Excellency the Governor-General
of Canada, will be awarded to the student standing at the head of
the graduating class for the B.A. degree. Honours and General
Course students are eligible for this medal.
The Kiwanis Club Gold Medal
A gold medal, given by the Kiwanis Club of Vancouver, will be
awarded to the student standing at the head of the graduating class
for the B.Com. degree.
The United Empire Loyalists' Association Medal*
The Vancouver Branch of the United Empire Loyalists' Association of Canada is offering a silver medal, and a book prize to
the value of $10, for the best essay received during the session
1944-45 on any topic dealing with the history of the United Empire
Loyalists and their influence on the development of Canada. The
award will be made on the recommendation of the Department
of History. The competition is open to all undergraduates of
the University, but preference is given to students enrolled in a
Canadian History course.
The Lefevre Gold Medal and Scholarship
Out of funds provided by the late Mrs. Lefevre in memory of her
husband, Dr. J. M. Lefevre, a gold medal and scholarship will be
awarded annually to the student standing highest in general proficiency and research ability in one of the following courses: (a)
Honours in Chemistry in the Faculty of Arts and Science; (b)
Chemical Engineering in the Faculty of Applied Science. The
award will be based upon the work of the last two years in these
courses. The value of the scholarship is approximately $150. The
*See paragraph 1, page 41. 44 The University of British Columbia
winning of this scholarship will not preclude the holder from
enjoying the proceeds of a further award.
The Wilfrid Sadler Memorial Gold Medal
A gold medal, given by Sigma Tau Upsilon Honorary Agricultural Fraternity in memory of Professor Wilfrid Sadler,
Professor and Head of the Department of Dairying, 1918-33, will
be awarded to the student standing at the head of the graduating
class for the B.S.A. degree.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR GRADUATES
University Graduate Scholarship*
A scholarship of $200 may be awarded to a student of the
graduating class who shows special aptitude for graduate studies
and who is proceeding in the following year to graduate study in
this or any other approved university.
The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship*
This scholarship of $125, given by the Faculty Women's Club
of the University, is open to a student of the graduating class of
this University who is proceeding in the following year to graduate
study in this or any other approved university.
The Dr. F. J. Nicholson Scholarship*
Out of the proceeds of a fund donated by Dr. Francis John
Nicholson, the following scholarships will be awarded annually
for the purpose of enabling students to do graduate study in the
University of British Columbia or in any other approved uni-'
versify: (1) One scholarship of the value of $500 for graduate
work in Chemistry. Applicants must be Honours graduates in
Chemistry of the Faculty of Arts and Science, with the degree of
B.A. or M.A., or graduates in Chemical Engineering of the Faculty
of Applied Science, with the degree of B.A.Sc. or M.A.Sc. (2)
One scholarship of the value of $500 for graduate work in Geology.
Applicants must be graduates of the Faculty of Applied Science
in Geological or Mining Engineering, with the degree of B.A.Sc.
or M.A.Sc.
Normally the scholarships will be payable in two instalments
of $250 each to provide for two years of graduate work. The
payment of the second instalment will be subject to approval by
the University of British Columbia of the first year's graduate
work. In exceptional circumstances the full sum of $500 may be
made available for work to be completed in a single year.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 45
Recipients must be qualified to undertake graduate and research
work, in respect of scholarship, ability, character, and health. These
scholarships will be granted with due consideration for the financial
status of the candidate. The spirit of the endowment is to aid those
to whom financial help is necessary or of material assistance in
furthering their studies.
Applicants must be graduates of the University of British
Columbia, have British citizenship, and be not more than 30 years
of age on the last day for receiving applications. Preference will be
given in making awards to native-born British Columbians.
The John and Annie Southcott Memorial
Scholarship*
A scholarship of the value of $100, given annually by Mrs.
Thomas H. Kirk, will be awarded to that student who, possessing
exceptional aptitude for research, either intends to pursue, or is
already pursuing some approved investigation in the field of British
Columbia history. The award will be made on the recommendation
of the Head of the Department of History. The scholarship will
normally be awarded to a Fourth Year student or to a graduate
proceeding to a higher degree, but may be awarded to a student of
the Third Year.
The Native Daughters of British Columbia
Scholarship*
A scholarship of $50 is given by the Native Daughters of British
Columbia to a Canadian-born graduate student for research work
in the early history of British Columbia, such work to be carried
on in the Provincial Archives in Victoria, B. C. The award will
be made on the recommendation of the Head of the Department
of History.
The B'nai B'rith District No. 4 Hillel Foundation
Scholarships*
From the sum of $250 made available by District Grand Lodge
No. 4, B'nai B'rith, through Vancouver Lodge, Vancouver, B. C,
two scholarships of the value of $125 each were awarded in the
session 1943-44. The terms of award were as follows: These scholarships will be awarded to outstanding graduate students in any of the
three Faculties — Arts and Science, Agriculture, and Applied
Science. The winners shall indicate satisfactory plans for graduate
study at the University of British Columbia or at any other university approved by the Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries. Only one scholarship shall be available in any
*See paragraph 1, page 41. 46 The University of British Columbia
one Faculty in one year. Applications must be made on forms available at the Registrar's office.
The Standard Oil Co. of British Columbia
Limited Scholarship*
For research in petroleum engineering the Standard Oil Company of British Columbia Limited offers a scholarship of $600
open to Honours graduates in Chemistry in the Faculty of Arts
and Science or graduates in Chemical Engineering in the Faculty
of Applied Science. A portion of the scholarship not to exceed $100
may be used for special equipment for the research problem. The
topic of research shall be chosen after consultation with the Department of Chemistry of the University and the Standard Oil Company.
Recipients must be qualified to undertake graduate and research
work in respect of scholarship, research ability, personality, and
health.
The Britannia Mining and Smelting Company Limited
Scholarship*
For research in mineralography the Britannia Mining and
Smelting Company Limited offers a scholarship of $250, open to
graduates in Geological, Mining, or Metallurgical Engineering in
the Faculty of Applied Science. A portion of the scholarship not
to exceed $50 may be used for special equipment for the research
problem. The topic of research shall be chosen after consultation
with the Geology Department of the University of British Columbia
and the Britannia Mining and Smelting Company. Applications
should be in the hands of the Registrar by December 10th. Recipients must be qualified to undertake the research work not only in
respect of scholarship and research ability but also in personality
and health.
The Cariboo Gold Quartz Mining Company Limited
Scholarship*
A scholarship of $100, given by the Cariboo Gold Quartz Mining
Company Limited, for research in mineralography, was awarded
in the session 1943-44. The terms of award were as follows: This
scholarship will be awarded to a graduate in Geological, Mining,
or Metallurgical Engineering in the Faculty of Applied Science.
A portion of the scholarship not to exceed $20 may be used for
special equipment for the research problem. The topic of research
shall be chosen after consultation with the Geology Department of
the University of British Columbia and the Cariboo Gold Quartz
*See paragraph 1, page 41. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 47
Mining Company Limited. Applications should be in the hands
of the Registrar by December 10th. Recipients must be qualified
to undertake the research work not only in respect of scholarship
and research ability but also in personality and health.
The Powell Biver Company Limited Scholarship*
For research in wood chemistry, the Powell River Company
Limited offers annually a scholarship of $700, open to Honours
graduates in Chemistry in the Faculty of Arts and Science, or
graduates in Chemical Engineering in the Faculty of Applied
Science. A portion of the scholarship, not to exceed $100, may be
used for special equipment for the research problem. The topic
of research shall be chosen after consultation with the Department
of Chemistry of the University and the Powell River Company.
Recipients must be qualified in respect of scholarship, research
ability, personality, and health to undertake graduate and research work.
Furthermore, if special aptitude is shown in carrying out this
work, an equal amount may be offered for further graduate study
and research in wood chemistry, in this or any other approved
university.
The British Columbia Electric Railway Company
Limited Research Scholarship*
The British Columbia Electric Railway Company Limited offers
a scholarship of $500 for research related to electrical and mechanical engineering problems. An additional amount not to exceed
$100 will be available for special equipment, for other expenses, or
for extension of the research beyond the close of the Second Term.
The scholarship is open to graduates in the Electrical and Mechanical Engineering courses in the Faculty of Applied Science. The
topic of research will be chosen after consultation with the Dean of
the Faculty, the Head of the Department, and the donors. The
award will be made by Senate on the recommendation of the Joint
Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries, after
consultation with the Dean of the Faculty.
The Consolidated Mining and Smelting Company of
Canada Limited Fellowship*
The Consolidated Mining and Smelting Company of Canada
Limited offers annually a fellowship of $750 for research related
to non-ferrous metals, fertilizers, and chemicals. An additional
amount not to exceed $450 will be available for special equipment
or for other expenses or for the extension of the research beyond
*See paragraph 1, page 41. 48 The University of British Columbia
the close of the Second Term. The Fellowship is open to graduates
in the Faculty of Arts and Science, Applied Science, or Agriculture,
in this or in any other recognized university, provided that in the
Faculty of Arts and Science their major undergraduate work has
been in the field of the sciences. The topic of research will be
chosen after consultation with the Deans of the Faculties and with
the donors. The award will be made by Senate on the recommendation of the Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and
Bursaries. Applications for the fellowship must be made to the
Registrar not later than April 15th.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR UNDERGRADUATES
1. IN ALL FACULTIES
University Great War Scholarships*
Two scholarships of $175 each may be awarded, on the basis of
the work of the First Year, to returned soldiers, their dependents,
and the children of deceased soldiers, proceeding to a higher year.
2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
University Scholarships in Arts and Science
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $175 each will be
awarded to students proceeding to the Fourth Year, the award
to be based on the work of the Third Year. These scholarships will
be awarded respectively: 1. To the student standing highest with
majors in group (1). (See page 85.) 2. To the student standing
highest with majors in group (2). (See page 85.) Students taking
full Honours in Mathematics will be classified in group (1).
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $175 each will be
awarded on the basis of the work of the Second Year to students
proceeding to a higher year.
The Shaw Memorial Scholarshipf
This scholarship of $125, founded by friends of the late James
Curtis Shaw, Principal of Vancouver College, and afterwards of
McGill University College, Vancouver, will be awarded upon the
results of the examinations of the Second Year in Arts and Science
to the undergraduate student standing highest in any two of three
courses, English 2, Latin 2, Greek (Beginners' Greek, Greek 1, or
Greek 2), and proceeding to a higher year.
tOriginally donated to the Royal Institution (see Historical Sketch), this has been
transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British
Columbia.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 49
The McGill Graduates' Scholarshipf
A scholarship of $125, founded by the McGill Graduates' Society
of British Columbia, will be awarded to the student standing
highest in English and French of the Second Year in Arts and
Science and proceeding to a higher year.
The Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, founded by the members of the Terminal
City Club as a memorial to those members of the Club who lost their
lives in the Great War, will be awarded to the student standing
highest in English 2 and Economics 1 or 2 in the Second Year in
Arts and Science, and proceeding to a higher year.
The Imperial Order Daughters of the Empire Scott
Memorial Scholarship*
This Scholarship of $100, derived from an endowment founded
by the Imperial Order Daughters of the Empire of the City of
Vancouver, in memory of Captain Robert Falcon Scott, R.N., the
Antarctic explorer, who sacrificed his life in the cause of science,
will be awarded to a student who combines high standing in
Biology 2 with promise of service in the Empire. The award will
be made by the Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes and Scholarships
in consultation with the Head of the Department of Biology and
Botany. Applications should be submitted to the Registrar not later
than the last day of the final examinations on forms provided for
the purpose.
Royal Institution Scholarship in Arts and Science
A scholarship of $175f will be awarded to the student taking first
place in the examinations of the First Year in Arts and Science,
and proceeding to a higher year.
University Scholarships in Arts and Science
Two scholarships of $175f each will be awarded to the students
taking second and third places in the examinations of the First
Year in Arts and Science, and proceeding to a higher year.
The Beverley Cayley Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, in memory of Beverley Cayley, Arts '18,
given under the terms of the will of his mother, the late Mrs. Cayley,
*See paragraph 1, page 41.
tStudents winning general proficiency scholarships in the First Year of Arts and
Science and proceeding to the Second Year of Applied Science will be given scholarships of a value of 1225.80. 50 The University of British Columbia
will be awarded to the male student standing highest in English 1
in the First Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
The N. Leo Klein Memorial Scholarship
A scholarship of $50, in memory of N. Leo Klein, given by Mr.
I. J. Klein, Vancouver, B. C, will be awarded to the student
obtaining first place in the examinations of the Third Year of the
course in Commerce.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, the proceeds of a fund created by the
Vancouver Women's Canadian Club, will be awarded to the undergraduate obtaining first place in Canadian History (History 2,
or 3, or 20).
The John and Annie Southcott Memorial
Scholarship*
As on page 45.
The Summer Session Students' Association
Scholarship*
A scholarship of $30, given by the Summer Session Students'
Association, will be awarded at the close of the Summer Session to
the Summer Session student who in that session completes the
Second Year with the highest standing. To be eligible a student must
have taken his entire Second Year in the University of British
Columbia Summer Session, extra-sessional classes, or reading
courses and must be proceeding to a higher year in the University
of British Columbia.
The British Columbia Teachers' Federation
Scholarship*
A scholarship of $50 given by the British Columbia Teachers'
Federation will be awarded at the close of the Summer Session to
the Summer Session student who, having been an active member
of the British Columbia Teachers' Federation for the three years
previous to the granting of the scholarship, completes, in that
session, the Third Year of his University work with the highest
standing in that year. To be eligible a student must have taken his
entire Third Year in the University of British Columbia Summer
Session, extra-sessional classes, or reading courses, and must continue in his Fourth Year at the University of British Columbia.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 51
3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE
University Scholarship in Nursing and Health*
A scholarship of $175 will be awarded for general proficiency
in previous work of university grade (which must include a
minimum of two years' work in the Province of British Columbia),
to a student proceeding to the Third Year (or in the Double Course,
proceeding to the Fourth Year) of the Course in Nursing and
Health and having successfully completed the hospital probationary
period. Applications shall be made to the Registrar not later than
December 1st.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, given by the Vancouver Women's Canadian Club, will be awarded to the student who attains the highest
standing in the first four years' training, academic and practical
(or in the first five years' training, academic and practical, in the
double course) of the Nursing and Health course.
The Dunsmuir Scholarshipf
A scholarship of $150, founded by the Hon. James Dunsmuir,
will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in
the Mining Engineering Course of the Fourth Year in Applied
Science, and proceeding to the Fifth Year.
University Scholarship in Applied Science
A scholarship of $225 will be awarded to the student who obtains
the highest marks in the Third Year in Applied Science and who
is proceeding to the Fourth Year in that Faculty.
Royal Institution Scholarship in Applied Science
A scholarship of $225 will be awarded for general proficiency in
the work of the Second Year in Applied Science to a student who
is proceeding to the Third Year in that Faculty.
The G. M. Dawson Scholarship
A scholarship of $50 will be awarded to the undergraduate
student standing highest in the Geological Engineering course, in
Geological subjects, in the Fourth Year of the Faculty of Applied
Science, and proceeding to the Fifth Year.
*See paragraph 1, page 41.
tOriginally donated to the Royal Institution (see Historical Sketch), this has been
transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British
Columbia. 52 The University of British Columbia
The B'nai B'rith Auxiliary No. 77 Scholarship
A scholarship of $50, given by the Women's Auxiliary No. 77 of
the B'nai B'rith, will be awarded to the student in Fourth Year
Applied Science standing highest in the class of Chemical Engineering or Chemistry and proceeding to the Fifth Year.
The R. Randolph Bruce Scholarship
Out of the proceeds of a fund bequeathed to the University of
British Columbia by the late Honourable R. Randolph Bruce in
memory of his term as Official Visitor, a scholarship of $200 will
be offered annually to the undergraduate student standing highest
in the Metallurgical Engineering course of the Fourth Year in
Applied Science and proceeding to the Fifth Year.
The British Columbia Electric Railway Company
Limited Scholarships
Two scholarships given by the British Columbia Electric Railway
Company Limited will be available as follows:
(1) the sum of $200 will be awarded to the undergraduate
student standing highest in the Electrical Engineering
course of the Fourth Year in Applied Science, and proceeding to the Fifth Year;
(2) the sum of $200 will be awarded to the undergraduate
student standing highest in the Mechanical Engineering
course of the Fourth Year in Applied Science, and proceeding to the Fifth Year.
4. IN AGRICULTURE
University Scholarship in Agriculture
A scholarship in Agriculture of $175 will be awarded to a student
proceeding to a higher year, the award to be based on the work of
the First Year.
The David Thom Scholarship
A scholarship in Agriculture of $100 will be awarded to a
student proceeding to a higher year in that Faculty, the award to
be based on the work of the Second Year. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 58
The British Columbia Fruit Growers'
Association Golden Jubilee Scholarship*
This scholarship, of the annual value of $100, donated by the
British Columbia Fruit Growers' Association, will be awarded to
a student taking the horticultural options of the Third Year. To
qualify for this scholarship candidates must obtain scholarship
standing, not only in horticultural subjects, but also in the work
of the year, and must be proceeding to the Horticultural Course
of the Fourth Year—the year in which the scholarship shall be
enjoyed.
UNIVERSITY ENTRANCE AND SENIOR
MATRICULATION SCHOLARSHIPS
University and Royal Institution Scholarships for
University Entrance
Fifteen general proficiency scholarships will be awarded on the
result of the University Entrance examinations: (a) $175 to the
candidate of highest standing in the Province, and (b) $175 each
to the two candidates of next highest standing in each of the
following districts: (1) Victoria District, (2) Vancouver Island
(exclusive of Victoria District), and Northern Mainland (exclusive
of North Vancouver and West Vancouver), (3) Vancouver Central
District (comprising the former limits of the City of Vancouver),
together with West Vancouver and North Vancouver, (4) the part
of the Lower Mainland in the Fraser Harbour area, (5) the Fraser
Valley, (6) Yale, (7) the Kootenays.
University and Royal Institution Scholarships for
Senior Matriculation
Six general proficiency scholarships will be awarded on the
result of the Senior Matriculation examinations: (a) $175 to the
candidate of highest standing in the Province, (b) $175 to the
candidate of next highest standing in the Province, (c) $175 to
the candidate of next highest standing in all school districts of
the Province other than- the City of Vancouver, the City of North
Vancouver, the District Municipalities of North Vancouver, West
Vancouver, and Burnaby, and the City of New Westminster, and
(d) $175 each to the three candidates of next highest standing in
Districts (2) Vancouver Island (exclusive of Victoria District),
and Northern Mainland (exclusive of North Vancouver and West
Vancouver), (5) the Fraser Valley, (6) Yale, and (7) the
Kootenays.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. 54 The University of British Columbia
These scholarships will be paid only to students in attendance
at the University of British Columbia, with the exception that the
Victoria District University Entrance Scholarships will be paid to
any winners of those scholarships in attendance at Victoria College.
Winners of all University Entrance and Senior Matriculation
scholarships must notify the Registrar before September 1st of
their intention of attending the University (or Victoria College
in the case of the Victoria District University Entrance Scholarships) during the following session; failing such notification, the.
winner's rights will lapse.
Postponement of University Entrance and Senior Matriculation
scholarships will be granted only on medical grounds.
PRIZES g
1. IN ALL FACULTIES
The University Essay Prize*
A book prize of the value of -$25 will be awarded to a Fourth
Year student for the best essay presented in any of the courses
regularly given by the Department of English. The award will
be made on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of
English.
The Dorothy and William Dorbils Prize in
Canadian Literature
A cash prize of $50 offered by Dorothy and William Dorbils will
be awarded annually to the registered undergraduate or graduate
student who writes the best essay on a subject in Canadian
Literature. The subject will be set or approved by the Head of the
Department of English, and the prize will be awarded on his recommendation. The essay must be 3000 words or more in length and
must be typed; a copy of the winning essay must be forwarded to
the donors of the prize.
If in any year no essay of sufficient merit is presented, the sum
of $50.00 will be used, or funded for use, in purchasing for the
University an item or items of Canadiana, the selection to be made
by the Head of the Department of English and the University
Librarian.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 55
2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
Frances Willard Prize*
A prize of $50, given by the Woman's Christian Temperance
Union of British Columbia, will be awarded to Third or Fourth
Year undergraduates or to graduate students for an essay in the
field of Economics, History, Psychology, or Sociology, on a subject
to be approved by the department concerned in consultation with
a committee of the Woman's Christian Temperance Union.
The award will be made for the session 1944-45 on recommendation of the Head of the Department of Philosophy and Psychology,
essays to be submitted by April 10th, 1945.
If in any year no student reaches the required standard the
award will be withheld.
The David Bolocan Memorial Prize
A prize of $25 given by Mr. and Mrs. J. L. Bolocan will be
awarded to the student in the Fourth Year of the Faculty of Arts
and Science who is regarded by the Department of Philosophy
and Psychology as the outstanding student in that subject in the
graduating year. The award will be made on 'the recommendation
of the Head of the Department of Philosophy and Psychology.
The Ahepa Prize
A prize of $75, given by the Gladstone Chapter No. 6, C.J.,
Order of Ahepa, will be awarded on the recommendation of the
Head of the Department of Classics to the student of the Fourth
Year who has shown the greatest promise in Greek studies. If
possible,_the award will be made to an Honours student, but if
there is no outstanding Honours student the scholarship may be
given to a Pass student.
The Dorothy and William Dorbils Prize in
Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine
A cash prize of $50 offered by Dorothy and William Dorbils will
be awarded to the student in the graduating year of the Faculty of
Arts and Science whose work as an Honours student in Bacteriology
and Preventive Medicine is regarded as outstanding. The award
will be made on the recommendation of the Head of the Department
of Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine. If no Honours student
presents work of sufficient calibre, the prize may be awarded at the
discretion of the Department to the best student majoring in
Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine who has a First Class average
in the advanced courses offered by the Department.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. 56 The University of British Columbia
The Dorothy and William Dorbils Prize in Zoology
A cash prize of $50 offered by Dorothy and William Dorbils will
be awarded to the student in the graduating year of the Faculty of
Arts and Science whose academic work and promise of research
ability in the Honours course in Zoology have been outstanding.
The award will be made on the recommendation of the Head of the
Department of Zoology.
If no Honours student presents work sufficiently outstanding, the
sum of $50 will be used to purchase for the Library special research
literature in zoology, the selection to be made by the Head of the
Department of Zoology.
3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE
The Convocation Prize
A prize of $50, given by Convocation of the University of British
Columbia, will be awarded to the student in the Fifth Year of
Applied Science whose record, in the opinion of the Faculty, is the
most outstanding.
Engineering Institute of Canada (Vancouver Branch)
Walter Moberly Memorial Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, given by the Vancouver Branch
of the Engineering Institute of Canada, will be awarded for the
best engineering thesis submitted by any Fifth Year student in the
Faculty of Applied Science. This prize is given in memory of the
late Walter Moberly, pioneer engineer and explorer, discoverer of
the Yellowhead Pass through the Rocky Mountains, whose work in
railway location has influenced so greatly the development of the
Province of British Columbia.
The Association of Professional Engineers' Prizes
Five book prizes, each of the value of $25, are offered by the
Association of Professional Engineers of the Province for competition by those students in the Fourth Year of the Faculty of
Applied Science who are enrolled as engineering pupils in the
Association. These prizes are awarded for the best summer essay
in each of any five branches of engineering to be selected by the
Faculty. The successful essays may be made available by the
Faculty to the Council and members of the Association. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 57
The Provincial Board of Health Prizes
The Provincial Board of Health of the Province of British
Columbia offers the sum of $100 to be given as prizes in the Public
Health Nursing Course.
The Engineering Institute of Canada Prize
The Engineering Institute of Canada offers an annual prize of
$25 to each of eleven Canadian universities of which the University
of British Columbia is one. The prize will be awarded to a student
of the Fourth Year in Applied Science on the basis of the marks
made in his academic work in that year. His activities in the
students' engineering organization or in the local branch of a recognized engineering society will also be considered.
The British Columbia Lumber and Shingle Manufacturers' Association Prizes*
Prizes of the value of $100, $50, and $25, given by the British
Columbia Lumber and Shingle Manufacturers' Association, will be
awarded to the students enrolled in the course Structural Design 1
(C.E. 9) who submit the designs judged to be the best, of a wooden
roof truss. The awards will be made upon the recommendation of
the Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science in collaboration with
the instructor in charge of the course and with the donor. Applications should be forwarded to the Registrar not later than January
15th.
The William N. Kelly Prize
A prize of $15 offered by Mr. William N. Kelly, M.E.I.C, Consulting Engineer and Marine Surveyor, Vancouver, will be awarded
to the student entering the Fourth Year of the Faculty of Applied
Science who obtains the highest standing in Mechanical Engineering 30, Machine Shop Practice. Skill in the use of hand tools will
receive special consideration. The award will be made on the
recommendation of the Head of the Department of Mechanical
and Electrical Engineering.
• The Timber Preservers Limited Prizes*
Prizes of the value of $60, $25, and $15, given by the Timber
Preservers Limited, will be awarded to the students registered in
the Fifth Year of the Civil Engineering course in the Faculty of
Applied Science who submit plans and specifications judged to be
*See paragraph 1, page 41. 58 The University of British Columbia
the best of a structure of treated timber. The awards will be made
upon the recommendation of the Dean of the Faculty of Applied
Science in collaboration with the instructor in charge of the course
and with the donors.
BURSARIES
The Captain LeRoy Memorial Bursary*
This bursary of the annual value of $150 was given by the
Universities Service Club in memory of their comrades who fell
in the Great War. It is named after Captain 0. E. LeRoy, who
commanded the overseas contingent from this University and who
was killed at Passchendaele in 1917.
It will be awarded to a student, or students, requiring financial
assistance to enable him, or them, to attend the University. For
this purpose it may be awarded to a matriculant, to a student of
any year, or to a graduate student of the University proceeding to
graduate work in this or any approved university. In making the
award preference will be given first to returned soldiers, then to the
dependents of soldiers, and finally to suitable candidates from the
student body at large.
Application must contain a statement of the academic record
and special circumstances of the applicant, with two supporting
references, and, in the case of the preferred categories, of the war
record of the soldier.
The award will be made by the Senate upon the recommendation
of the Faculties.
The Khaki University and Young Men's Christian
Association Memorial Fund Bursaries*
A sum of money given to the University by the administrators
of the Khaki University of Canada provides a fund from which are
awarded annually ten bursaries of the value of $100 each, known
as the Khaki University and Young Men's Christian Association
Memorial Bursaries.
Under conditions specified by the donors these bursaries may be
used for undergraduate purposes only, and in making the awards a
preference is given to the sons and daughters of soldiers of the
Great War. The financial necessities of candidates are also taken
into account.
To be eligible for an award a soldier's dependent must obtain
at least Second Class standing, i.e., 65 per cent.; for all others 75
per cent, is required.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 59
Dependents of soldiers and others who have expectations of
attaining standing as stated above and who are in need of financial
assistance should apply to the Registrar not later than the last day
of the final examinations.
These bursaries are open to students from Victoria College proceeding to a course of study in the University.
Application forms may be obtained in the Registrar's office.
The American Woman's Club Bursary*
A bursary of $100, given by the American Woman's Club of
Vancouver, will be available for the session 1944-45 to assist a
woman undergraduate who has completed at least one year in Arts
and Science with satisfactory standing, and who could not otherwise
continue her course. Application must be made to the Registrar not
later than September 1st.
The University Women's Club Bursary*
A bursary of $100 given by the University Women's Club of
Vancouver will be available for a woman student of high scholastic
standing in the Third Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science who
is proceeding to the Fourth Year. .
The Inter-Sorority Alumnae Club Bursary*
A bursary of $200, given by the Inter-Sorority Alumnae Club
of Vancouver, will be awarded to a woman student of satisfactory
academic standing, proceeding to her Third Year or any higher
year or to the Education Class, or, if a graduate, to the course leading to the Diploma in Social Work. The award will be made on the
recommendation of the Dean of Women, to whom applications should
be sent not later than September 1st on forms available in the
Registrar's office.
The Mildred Brock Memorial Bursary*
A bursary of $75, given by the Delta Gamma Fraternity, in
memory of Mrs. Mildred Brock, wife of the late R. W. Brock, Dean
of the Faculty of Applied Science, whose personal charm and high
ideals were an inspiration to the students who greatly benefited by
her sympathetic understanding and generosity, will be available
for a woman student »f high scholastic standing proceeding to the
Third or Fourth Year of her undergraduate studies; or, if a
graduate, to the Teacher Training Course, or to the course leading
to the Diploma in Social Work. Application must be made to the
Registrar not later than September 1st.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. 60 The University of British Columbia
. , jt
The Frances Milburn Bursary (Vancouver P.E.O.
Sisterhood) *
A bursary of $150, given by the Vancouver Chapters of the
P. E. 0. Sisterhood in memory of the late Frances Milburn, will
be available for the session 1944-45 to assisjt a woman undergraduate
who has completed at least one year in Arts and Science with high
standing in English, and who could not otherwise continue her
course. The award will be made on the recommendation of the
Dean of Women, to whom applications should be sent not later than
September 1st on forms available in the Registrar's office.
The Lady Laurier Club Bursary*
A bursary of the value of $75, given by the Lady Laurier Club
of Vancouver, will be awarded to a woman student in the Teacher
Training Course, or to a woman student in Third or Fourth Year
Arts and Science in the event of there not being an applicant in
the Teacher Training Course who can qualify; such student should
have real need of financial assistance. Applications must be made
to the Registrar not later than September 15th, and must be on
forms available at the Registrar's office.
The Alliance Francaise Bursary*
A bursary of not less than $25 will be awarded on a basis of merit
and need to a student specializing in French at the University. The
bursary will normally be awarded to a student who has completed
his Second Year and is proceeding to his Third Year. The award
will be made on the recommendation of the Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries. Applications, on
forms available in the Registrar's office, must be received by the
Registrar not later than September 15th.
The Faculty Women's Club Bursary*
A bursary of the value of $75, given by the Faculty Women's
Club of Vancouver, will be awarded to a Third Year woman student,
such student to have scholastic ability and real need of financial
assistance. The award will be made on the recommendation of the
Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries.
Applications, on forms available in the Registrar's office, must be
received by the Registrar not later than September 15th.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 61
The Alumni Association Bursary*
A bursary of the value of $50, given by the Alumni Association
of the University of British Columbia, will be awarded to a First
Year student on the basis of scholarship and need. The award
will be made on the recommendation of the Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries. Applications, on
forms available in the Registrar's office, must be received by the
Registrar not later than September 15th.
The William MacKenzie Swan Memorial Bursary*
A bursary of the annual value of $250, given by Colonel and Mrs.
W. G. Swan in memory of their son, William MacKenzie Swan, an
outstanding all-round undergraduate student and popular athlete
who died July 28th, 1937, as a result of injuries received in a fall
from the Pattullo Bridge at New Westminster on which he was
engaged as Assistant Engineer, will be awarded to a student or
students registered in the Third, Fourth, or Fifth Year of the
Faculty of Applied Science, requiring financial assistance to enable
him or them to continue studies at the University. In making the
award, consideration will be given to the academic record of the
applicant and to his participation in undergraduate affairs. Applications on forms available in the Registrar's office must be filed
with the Registrar not later than September 15th. The award will
be made by the Senate upon the recommendation of the Faculty of
Applied Science.
The Phil Wilson Bursary in Forestry*
A bursary of $225, given by the British Columbia Loggers'
Association, will be awarded to a student registered in Fifth Year
Forestry. To be eligible for the award a student must have been
a resident in British Columbia for the previous two years, must
have a scholastic average of at least 65 per cent, in the work of the
Third and Fourth Years at the University of British Columbia,
and must give evidence of leadership, sterling character, and
physical vigour. Applications, on forms available in the Registrar's
office, must be received by the Registrar not later than October 5th.
The David Thom Bursaries
From the funds of the David Thom Estate a sum of $235 is
available annually for the following bursaries:
1. A sum of $87.50 to be awarded to the student who has passed
University Entrance or Senior Matriculation with the highest
*See paragraph 1, page 41. 62 The University of British Columbia
standing and who is registering for the first time in the Faculty
of Agriculture. In the awarding of this bursary regulation 9
under General Regulations for Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes
does not apply.
*2. A sum of $50.00 to be awarded to a student who has satisfactorily completed the work of the First Year in Agriculture and
is proceeding to a higher year in that Faculty. Application must
be made to the Registrar not later than September 15th.
*3. A sum of $60.00 to be awarded to a student who has satisfactorily completed the work of the Third Year in Agriculture and
is proceeding to the Fourth Year in that Faculty. Application
must be made to the Registrar not later than September 15th.
Delta Gamma Bursary for the Blind*
A bursary of $100.00 will be awarded to a blind student requiring
financial assistance to enable him or her to enter the University or
to proceed to further studies. The award will be made by the
Senate upon recommendation of the Joint Faculty Committee on
Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries acting in consultation with the
Principal of the B. C. School for the Deaf and Blind, the Superintendent of the Canadian National Institute for the Blind of Vancouver, and an accredited representative of Delta Gamma fraternity.
Applications should be in the hands of the Registrar by September 15th.
The Geldart Riadore Bursary*
A sum of $175 will be awarded to a student who has completed
at least one year of work in the Faculty of Agriculture, who is
proceeding to a higher year in the Faculty, and who has given
evidence of possessing those qualities necessary for community
leadership. The award is to be made on the recommendation of the
Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries in
consultation with the Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture.
The Flying Officer Reverend George Robert Pringle
Memorial Bursary*
A bursary of the annual value of $200, endowed by friends and
associates, in memory of the late Flying Officer Reverend George
Robert Pringle, a much beloved graduate of outstanding Christian
character and athletic ability who was killed on January 24th,
1943, while on Active Service overseas, will be awarded to a student
who has completed his Third Year in any Faculty and is proceeding to his Fourth Year. To be eligible for this award the student
*See paragraph 1, page 41. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 63
must show evidence of academic ability, sterling unselfish character,
and active participation and leadership in University sport. The
award will be made on the recommendation of the Joint Faculty
Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries. Applications,
on forms available in the Registrar's office, must be received by
the Registrar not later than September 15th.
The Alberta Meat Company Bursary*
A bursary of $50, given by the Alberta Meat Company of Vancouver,, will be awarded annually on the basis of merit and need to
an Animal Husbandry student conducting livestock feeding trials
at the University Farm. The award will be made by the Joint
Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries, on the
recommendation of the Head of the Department of Animal Husbandry. Applications should be in the hands of the Registrar by
September 15th.
The J. M. Taylor Bursary in Metallurgy*
A bursary of $150, given by Mr. J. M. Taylor, Vancouver, for
research work on cobalt ore, open to a student or students registered in the Fifth Year of the Department of Metallurgy in the
Faculty of Applied Science, was awarded in the Session 1943-44.
The topic of research was chosen after consultation with the donor
and the Department of Metallurgy of the University. The award
was made by the Senate on the recommendation of the Head of the
Department of Mining and Metallurgy.
The Mary C. Lipsett Bursary*
A bursary of $200, offered annually by Mrs. Mary C. Lipsett,
will be awarded to a student who has completed at least the Second
Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science, and who proposes to take
his major work in Sociology or Psychology. In making the award,
consideration will be given to the applicant's interest in problems
of social anthropology and his ability to pursue work in that field.
The award will be made by Senate upon the recommendation of the
Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries,
acting in consultation with the departments concerned.
The Rotary Memorial Bursaries*
To commemorate the sacrifice and services of Rotarians and their
families in the Second World War, the Rotary Club of Vancouver
offers annually to students at the University five bursaries of the
value of $200 each. These bursaries are open to students in any
*See paragraph l, page 41. 64 The University of British Columbia
year and in any Faculty. Wherever practicable, however, the five
awards will be made to students in different years. Preference will
be given to those who. during the Second World War were in the
Services or the Merchant Navy, or to their dependents. To be
eligible for the awards, applicants are required to be of good moral
character and to have a reasonable interest in extra-curricular
activities and a good record of scholastic attainment. Awards will
be made only to those who have limited financial ability to enter
the University or proceed to a higher year. The awards will be
made on the recommendation of the Joint Faculty Committee on
Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries. Applications, on forms available at the Registrar's office, must be received by the Registrar not
later than September 15th.
Special Bursaries Fund*
For the Session 1944-45 a Special Bursaries Fund has been made
available by the Board of Governors to enable students to attend
the University who would not otherwise be able to do so. To be
eligible for an award from this fund a student must have attained
at least Second Class standing in the examinations last written, and
must give evidence of need.
Applications for these bursaries must be in the hands of, the
Registrar not later than September 15th. Application forms may
be obtained in the Registrar's office.
LOANS
General Loan Fund
The General Loan Fund is maintained by annual grants made
by the Board of Governors. Its operation is described in paragraph
13 under General Regulations for Medals, Scholarships, Prizes, etc.
The Wheatley Memorial Loan Fund
The Association of Professional Engineers of the Province of
British Columbia has established a loan fund in memory of Edward
Augustus Wheatley, who, as Registrar of the Association during
the years 1921 to 1938, exerted a vital influence on the engineering
profession, not only in this Province but throughout Canada.
The fund is available to engineering pupils of the Association
in attendance at the University, and all applicants for loans must
be recommended by the Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science.
The fund is distributed on the recommendation of the Joint Faculty
Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries.
•See paragraph l, page 41. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 65
The Roy Graham Memorial Loan Fund
In memory of Roy Graham, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Chicago), a loan fund has been established to assist students in the
Faculty of Applied Science. Preference will be given to students
in the Second and Third Years of that Faculty. All applicants for
loans must be recommended by the Dean of the Faculty of Applied
Science. This fund is distributed on the recommendation of the
Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries.
The Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy,
B. C. Division, Fund
This is a fund of $100, given by the Canadian Institute of Mining
and Metallurgy to the University as a trust to be used for loans to
students taking the mining course. Applicants for loans must be
recommended by the Departments of Geology and of Mining and
Metallurgy.
The David Thom Fund
From the David Thom Estate funds a sum of $1500 has been
set aside for loans to students in Agriculture who have been unable
to borrow from the General Loan Fund or who have obtained loans
from that fund insufficient for their needs; of this amount, $300 is
available for students in the Occupational Course and the balance
for Third and Fourth Year students.
The Alma Mater Loan Fund
This fund was established by the graduating classes of 1937 as a
trust to be used for loans to undergraduates who have completed at
least one year at the University and who have attained satisfactory
academic standing. The fund is administered by the University and
distributed by the Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships,
and Bursaries. Applications for assistance under this fund must
be made to the Bursar.
The University Chapter I.O.D.E. Loan Fund
This fund was established by the University Chapter of the
I.O.D.E., to assist women students of the Second, Third, and Fourth
Years. Loans are to be made on the basis of scholarship and
financial need, and are to be distributed by the Joint Faculty
Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries, in consultation
with the Dean of Women. Applications for assistance under this
fund should be made to the Bursar. 66 The University of British Columbia
The T. Sato Loan Fund
This fund has been established by Mr. Tsutae Sato for students
of Second Class standing, or better, in the Third or Fourth Years
in the Faculties of Arts and Science and Agriculture, or in the
F»urth and Fifth Years of the Faculty of Applied Science, or for
students in the Fifth Year of a Double Course. For such loans the
regulations in paragraph 13 of the General Regulations for Medals,
Scholarships, Prizes, Bursaries, and Loans are applicable. The fund
is distributed on the recommendation of the Joint Faculty Committee on Prizes, Scholarships, and Bursaries.
SCHOLARSHIPS ANNOUNCED BY
THE UNIVERSITY BUT AWARDED BY
OTHER INSTITUTIONS
The Rhodes Scholarship*
A Rhodes Scholarship is tenable at the University of Oxford
and may be held for three years. Since, however, the majority
of Rhodes Scholars obtain standing which enables them to take a
degree in two years, appointments are made for two years in the
first instance, and a Rhodes Scholar who may wish to remain for
a third year will be expected to present a definite plan of study for
that period satisfactory to his college and to the Rhodes Trustees.
Rhodes Scholars may be allowed, if the conditions are approved
by their own college and by the Oxford Secretary to the Rhodes
Trustees, either to postpone their third year, returning to Oxford
for it after a period of work in their own countries, or to spend
their third year in graduate work at any university of Great Britain,
and in special eases at any university on the continent of Europe,
in the overseas Dominions, or in the United States, but not in the
country of their origin.
The stipend of a Rhodes Scholarship is fixed at £400 per year.
At most colleges, and for most men, this sum is sufficient to meet a
Rhodes Scholar's necessary expenses for term-time and vacations,
but Scholars who can afford to supplement it by, say, £50 per year
from their own resources will find it advantageous to do so.
A candidate to be eligible must:
1. Be a British subject, with at least five years' domicile in
Canada, and unmarried. He must have passed his nineteenth,
but not have passed his twenty-fifth birthday on October 1st
of the year for which he is elected.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 67
2. Have reached such a stage in his course at one of the universities of Canada that he will have completed at least two
years at the university in question by October 1st of the year
for which he is elected.
Candidates may apply either for the Province in which they
have their ordinary private domicile, home, or residence, or for
any Province in which they have received at least two years of their
college education before applying.
In that section of the will in which he defined the general type
of scholar he desired, Mr. Rhodes wrote as follows:
"My desire being that the students who shall be elected to the
Scholarships shall not be merely bookworms, I direct that in the
election of a student to a Scholarship regard shall be had to:
1. His literary and scholastic attainments.
2. His fondness for and success in manly outdoor sports sueh as
cricket, football, and the like.
3. His qualities of manhood, truth, courage, devotion to duty,
sympathy for and protection of the weak, kindliness, unselfishness, and fellowship, and I
4. His exhibition during school days of moral force of character
and of instincts to lead and to take an interest in his schoolmates, for those latter attributes will be likely in after life
to guide him to esteem the performance of public duties as
his highest aim."
Except in special cases, all Scholarships (to which elections
are made in war-time) will, until further notice, be suspended until
after the war. Should any Scholar-elect wish to make a special
application to be allowed to come to Oxford during the war, he
should apply to the Rhodes Trustees, through the General Secretary
of the Rhodes Scholarships in the country in which he is elected.
Each application will be considered on its merits, and the Rhodes
Trustees reserve complete discretion in deciding each case, but, as
general indications of the policy which the Trustees are likely to
adopt, the following points may be noted:
1. In the absence of exceptional considerations, such as those
mentioned under (5), permission will not be given to come to
Oxford in order to take Final Honours Schools or Special
(War) Courses in non-scientific subjects, such as Literae
Humaniores, Law, Modern Greats, or History, or to undertake
research in these subjects.
2. The same applies to Final Honours Schools, or Special (War)
Courses, in the ordinary scientific or mathematical subjects, 68 The University of British Columbia
but application to engage in special and' approved scientific
research will be more favourably considered.
3. Medical students and researchers will normally be given permission to take up their Scholarships, subject, however, to
the advice of the authorities of Oxford Medical School upon
the advisability of Overseas students entering upon medical
courses in England, and subject, further, in the case of
researchers, to the facilities which may exist at Oxford for
research in the particular investigation proposed by the applicant.
4. Permission will in no case be granted if the policy of the
government of the Scholar's country of origin opposes his
leaving his country. If, for example, conscription or compulsory military training has been introduced in that country,
permission will be granted only as explained under (5).
5. The Trustees will be prepared to take into consideration
special personal circumstances, e.g., disqualification for military or other war service, disablement through war service,
or the urgency or importance of the work which the Scholar
proposes to take up at Oxford.
The Trustees hope when peace is restored to revive all suspended
Scholarships, but cannot definitely bind themselves to do so until
the time has arrived and the practical possibilities are known. The
Trustees reserve the right to cancel any suspended Scholarship if
circumstances shall have supervened which, in their opinion, make
it undesirable that the Scholar should hold his Scholarship.
Should a Scholar-elect, whose Scholarship has been suspended,
marry before he applies to take up his Scholarship, although the
Trustees will not consider the Scholarship as automatically forfeited, they will not be prepared to confirm it except in special
circumstances.
Suspended Scholarships, if revived, will be tenable for the
normal period. Applications will be entertained from Scholars
who wish to spend a shorter time at Oxford, although no tenure
of less than one year will be permitted, save in exceptional circumstances.
The selection for any year is normally made in the previous
December, and each candidate is required to make application to
the Secretary of the Committee of Selection of the Province in
which he wishes to compete not later than October 31st. Application forms may be obtained from the Registrar's office, from the
Secretary of the Committee of Selection, or from the General Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 69
Secretary for Canada, D. R. Michener, Esq., 372 Bay Street,
Toronto, Ontario.
For the duration of the war no award is being made and therefore no applications are being accepted until further notice.
The Exhibition of 1851 Scholarship*
Under the revised conditions for the award of the Exhibition
of 1851 Scholarship in Science, the University of British Columbia
is included in the list of universities from which nominations for
scholarships allotted to Canada may be made. These scholarships
of £275 per annum are tenable, ordinarily, for two years. Scholarship winners with special needs may receive additional money
grants during the year of their tenure. They are granted only to
British subjects of not more than 26 years of age who have already
completed a full university course and given evidence of capacity
for scientific investigation. The scholarships are open to graduates
of any university who have spent not less than three years in the
study of science. It is not the intention of the Commissioners to
invite recommendations for their Overseas Research Awards during
the continuance of hostilities.
Imperial Order Daughters of the Empire War
Memorial Scholarship (Overseas)*
This fund was established by the I.O.D.E. in order to perpetuate
the memory of the men and women who gave their lives in the
defence of the Empire in the Great War. Nine graduate scholarships to the value of $1400 each are offered annually, one in each
province of the Dominion. The conditions under which they are
awarded may be obtained from the Registrar. Applications must
be submitted by October 15th of each year. Not available in 1944-45.
Canadian Federation of University Women
Scholarships*
The Travelling Scholarship of the Canadian Federation of
University Women, of the value of $1,250, available for study or
research work, is open to any woman holding a degree from a
Canadian university, who is not more than 35 years of age at the
time of award. In general, preference will be given to those candidates who have completed one or more years of graduate study
and have a definite course of study or research in view. The award
is based on evidence of character, intellectual achievement, and
promise of success in the subject to which the candidate is devoting herself.
*See paragraph 1, page 41. 70 The University of British Columbia
The Junior Scholarship of the Canadian Federation of University
Women, of the value of $850, is open to any woman holding a degree
from a Canadian university, who is not more than 25 years of age
at the time of award. Preference will be given to students who have
studied in only one university and who desire to continue their
studies in another.
The proposed place and plan of study or research must be approved by the Scholarship Committee.
Application blanks and further information may be obtained
from the Convener of the Scholarship Committee, Dr. Cecilia
Krieger, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ont. Applications and
recommendations must be received not later than February 1st. THE
FACULTY
OF
ARTS AND SCIENCE
THIRTIETH SESSION
1944-1945 TIME TABLE
FACULTY OF ARTS
KEY TO BUILDINGS: A. Arts; Ag, Agr
Mornings
8.30
9.30
Monday
Biology 2 a & b
Biology 3
Botany 6 e
Economics 6
Education 9
English 1, Sec. 1
English 13 _.
French 2, Sec. l_
Geology 4
Geology 11
Geology 23 _
Latin 1, Sec. 1
Latin 7
Mathematics 10
Physics l, Sec. 1
Psychology A
Spanish, Beg., Sec. 1....
Bacteriology 5 Lab
Biology 1, Sec. A 1
Biology 2 a&b 1
Botany 5 a & c
Chemistry 3
Economics 1, Sec. 1
E conomics 12
Education 12
English 9
French 3 b
French 4 b
Geography 3
Geology 1 a & c
History 17
Home Economics 5 & 6
Mathematics 1, Sec. 1
Mathematics 13
Mathematics 16
Philosophy 9
Physics 1, Sec. 2
Social Work 4
Sociology 7
Spanish, Beg., Sec. 3....
Room
Ap 233
Ap 237
Ap 101
Ag 100
A 101,
106, 203,
206, 208
A 100
A104.108
Ap 102
Ap 120
Apl06
A 102
A 207
A 204
S 200
Ap 100
A 105
Ap 202
Ap 233
Ap 111
S 300
S 400
Ap 204
A 206
A 100
A 104
A 10S
Ap 102
Ap 100
A 203
A 201
A 106,
204
Ag 100
A 102
A 101
A 103
S200
A 208
A 207
A 108
Tuesday
Botany 4
Botany 7 a
Chemistry 2 Lab
Chemistry 18
Commerce 9(Econ.7).
English 1, Sec. 3
French 2, Sec. 2
German 1(a), Sec. 1
German 3 c
Home Economies A&B
Home Economics3 & 4
Latin 2, Sec. 1
Latin 5
Physics A, Sec. 1
Physics 4
Social Work 2
Zoology 2
Zoology 3
Bacteriology 1
Bacteriology 5
Botany 3 a
iBotany 6 c
Chemistry 2 Lab
Chemistry 9
Economics 4
English 10
French 4 a..
Geology 2 a & b
German 1 (a), Sec. 2
German 1(b)
Government 1
History 2
History 25
Latin 2, Sec. 2
Mathematics 1,
Sec. 2
Mathematics 12
Mathematics 14
Philosophy 4
Physics A, Sec. 2
Sociology 1
Room
Ap 235
A 204
A 100,
103, 106,
206
A 101,
104, 105
A 203
A 201
A 108
A 207
A 102
S 200
S 210
Ap 237
AplOl
Ap 101
S400
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 413
Ap 204
A 207
A 104
Ap 102
A 203
A 208
A 103
A 105
A 102
A 100,
108, 206
A 101
A 201
A 108
S200
A 204
Wednesday
Biology 2 a
Biology 2 b, Lab
Biology 3
Economies 6
Education 9
English 1, Sec. 1
English 13
French 2, Sec. 1
Geology 4
Geology ll
Latin l, Sec, 1
Latin 7
Mathematics 10
Physics 1, Sec. 1
Psychology A
Social Work 7& 11...
Spanish, Beg., Sec. 1
Biology 1, Sec. A
Biology 2 a & b
Botany 5 a
Chemistry 3
Economics 1, Sec. 1...
Economics 13
Education 12
English 9
French 3 b
French 4 b
Geography 3
Geology 1 a & c
Geology 6
History 17
Home Economics 5 &
Mathematics I,
Sec. 1
Mathematics 13
Mathematics 16
Philosophy 9
Physics 1, Sec. 2
Social Work 4
Sociology 7
Spanish, Beg., Sec. 3
Room
Ap 101
Ap 237
AglOO
A 101,
106, 203,
206, 208
A 100
A104,108
Ap 102
Ap 120
A 102
A 207
A 204
S200
Ap 100
A 201
A 105
Ap 202
Ap 233
Ap 111
S 300
S400
Ap 204
A 206
A 100
A 104
A 105
Ap 102
Ap 100
Ap 120
A 203
A 201
A 106,
204
AglOO
A 102
A 101
A 103
S200
A 208
A 207
A 108
CONSULT DEPARTMENT HEADS FOR ... 1944 -1945
AND SCIENCE
iculture; Ap, Applied Science; S, Science.
Mornings
Thursday
Botany 7 a
Chemistry 2 Lab....
Chemistry 18
Commerce 9 (Econ. 7)
English 1, See. 3
French 2, Sec. 2...
German 1 (a), Sec. 1
German 3 c
Home Economics A&B
Home Economics 3 & 4.
Latin 2, Sec. 1
Latin 5
Physics A, Sec. 1...
Physics 4
Social Work 2
Zoology 2
Zoology 3
Bacteriology 1, Lab.
Seel
Bacteriology 5
Botany 3 a
Botany 6 c _ _
Chemistry 2 Lab
Chemistry 9
Economics 4
English 10
French 4 a
Geology 2 a& b
Geology 6
German 1(a), Sec. 2..
German 1 b
Government 1
History 2
History 25
Latin 2, Sec. 2
Mathematics 1,
Sec. 2
Mathematics 12
Mathematics 14
Philosophy 4
Physics A, Sec. 2...
Sociology 1
Room
Ap 235
A 204
A 100,
103, 106,
206
A 101,
104, 105
A 203
A 201
A 108
A 207
A 102
S200
S210
Ap 237
Ap 101
Ap 101
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 413
Ap 204
A 207
A 104
Ap 102
Ap 120
A 203
A 208
A 103
A 105
A 102
A 100,
106, 206
A 101
A 201
A 108
S 200
A 204
Friday
Bacteriology 9 Lab
Biology 2 a & b, Lab..
Botany 6 d Lab
Chemistry 5 Lab.
Economics 6
Education 9
English 1, Sec. 1
English 13
French 2, Sec. 1
Geology 4
Latin 1, Sec. 1
Latin 7
Mathematics 10
Physics 1, Sec. 1
Psychology A
Social Work 7 & 11
Spanish, Beg., Sec. 1...
Zoology 11
Bacteriology 2
Bacteriology 9 Lab.....
Biology 2 a & b, Lab..
Botany 5 b
Botany 6 c Lab.
Chemistry 2, Sec. 1
Chemistry 5 Lab
Economics 1, Sec. 1
Economics 13
Education 12
English ,9
French 3 b
French 4 b
Geography 3
Geology 7
History 17
Home Economics 5
Mathematics 1,
Sec. 1
Mathematics 13
Mathematics 16
Philosophy 9
Physics 1, Sec. 2
Social Work 7
Sociology 7
Spanish, Beg., Sec. 2...
Room
Ap 233
Ap 233
Ag 100
A 101,
106, 203,
206, 208
A 100
A 104, 108
Ap 102
A 102
A 2071
A 204
S200
Ap 100
A 201
A 105"
Ap 101
S413
Ap 233
Ap283
S300
S400
A 204
A 206
A 100
A 104
A 105
Ap 102
Ap 106
A 203
A 201
A 106,
204
AglOO
A 102
A 101
A 103
S 200
A 208
A 207
A 108
Saturday
Commerce 9 (Econ. 7)
Education 14
English 1, Sec. 3
French 2, Sec. 2
German 1(a), Sec. 1
German 3 c
Latin 2, Sec. 1
Latin 5
Physics A, Sec. 1
Physics 4
Economics 4
Ap 204
Ag 100
A 207
English 10
French 4 a
German 1(a), Sec. 2
A 104
A 203
History 25
Latin 2, Sec. 2
Mathematics 1,
Sec. 2
A 105
A 102
Mathematics 12
106, 206
A 101
Sociology 1
A 204
Room
A 204
AglOO
A 100,
103, 106,
206
A 101,
104, 105
A 208
A 201
A 207..
A 102
S 200
S 210
8.30
9.30
SUBJECTS NOT IN THIS TIME TABLE Mornings
TIME TABLE
10.30
11.30
Monday
Agricultural
Economics 1
Bacteriology 5 Lab-
Biology l. Sec, B
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1...
Chemistry 7
Economics 1, Sec. 2
Economics 3
Economics 11
English 18
French 1, Sec. 1
French 3 c
Geology 8
German, Beg.,
Sees. 1 & 2
History 4
History 11 a
History 18
Home Economics 8-
Mathematics 2 a,
Sec.l
Physics 1, Sec. 8...
Physics 5
Psychology 4
Social Work 13 _
Zoology 1
Zoology 4
Zoology 7
Agricultural .
Economics 2.
Biology 4 J
Biology 5
Botany 6 d
[Chemistry D
Economics 5
Room
English 1, Sec. 2
English 16
German, Beg., Sec 3.
German 2, Sec. 1
German 3 a
Greek 14
History 10
Mathematics 3
Nursing 27
Philosophy 6
Physics 1, Sec. 4
Physics 2
Psychology 1
Psychology 5
Sociology 6
AglOO
Ap 100
SSOO
S413
S 400
A 208
A 203
A 106
A104.105,
108
A 102
Apl02
A103,207|
A 201
A 101
A 204
S200
S210
A 206
A 100
AglOO
Ap 101
Ap233
A 106
A 206
A 203
A 103
A 105
A 201
A 102
A 208
A 204
A 101
A 108
S200
S 210
A 100
A 207
A 104
Tuesday
Bacteriology 1 Lab.,
Sec. 1
Botany 1 a
Chemistry 1, Sec. 8...
Chemistry 2 Lab
Chemistry 4
Commerce 11
Economics 10
(Com. 5)
English 19
French 1, Sec. 2
French 3 a
Government 2
History is
History 15
Home Economics 1 & 2
Latin 1, Sec. 2
Mathematics 2 a,
Sec. 2
Philosophy 8
Sociology 8
Spanish, Beg., Sec. 2
Bacteriology 1,
' Lab. Sec. 1
Botany 1 b .
Botany 3 b and 3 c.
Commerce 6
Economics 2
Economics 8
Eng. 1, Sec. 4
English 17
Geography 4
Geology 5
German, Beg.,
Sees. 1. 3. 6
Latin, Beg
Mathematics 1,
Sec. 3
Mathematics 19
Philosophy 20
Spanish 1
Room
AplOl
S300
S 400
AglOO
A 100
A 206
A 108
A 104
A 203
A 207
A 106
A 102
A 204
A 201
A 101
A 105
Ap 101
Agl02
A 106
A 100
A 201
A 108
A 101
Ap 102
A 206
A 103,
A 203
A 102
A 204
A 208
A 104
Agricultural
Economics 1
Bacteriology 9....:
Biology 1, Sec. B
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1..
Chemistry 7
Economics 1, Sec. 2.
Economics 3
Economics 11
English 18
French 1, Sec. 1
Wednesday
Geology 8
German, Beg.,
Sees. 1 & 2
History 4
History 11 a
History 19
Home Economics 7 & 8
Mathematics 2 a.
Sec. 1
Physics 1, Sec. «...
Physics 5
Psychology 4
Social Work 13
Zoology 1
Zoology 4
Zoology 7
Agricultural
Economics 2
Bacteriology 10
I Biology 4
'Biology 5
Botany 6 b
|Chemistry D
Economics 5
English 1, Sec. 2...
English 16
German, Beg., Sec. 3..
German 2, Sec. 1
German 3 a
Greek 14
History 10
Mathematics 3
|Nursing27
Philosophy 6
Physics l.Sec. 4
Physics 2
Psychology 1
Psychology 5
(Sociology 6
AglOO
Ap 100
SSOO
S413
S400
A 208
A 203
A 106
A 104,
105, 108
Ap 102
A103, 207
A 201
Room
A 101
A 204
S200
S210
A 206
A 100
AglOO
S413
Ap 101
Ap285
A 106
A 206
A 208
A 103
A 105
A 201
A 102
A 208
A 204
A 101
A 108
S200
S210
A 100
A20T
AIM
CONSULT DEPARTMENT HEADS FOR -Continued
Mornings
Thursday
Bacteriology 1,
Lab. Sec. 1
Bacteriology 9
Botany 1 a
Botany 6 b Lab
Chemistry 1, Sec. 8
Chemistry 2 Lab
Chemistry 4
Commerce 11
Economics 10
(Com. 5)
English 19
French 1, Sec. 2
French 8 a
Government 2
History 18
Home Economics 1 & 2
History 15
Latin l, Sec. 2
Mathematics 2 a,
Sec. a
Philosophy 8
Sociology 8
Spanish, Beg., Sec.2
Botany 1 b
Botany 3 b and 8 e _.
Botany 6 b Lab
Commerce 6
Economics 2
Economics 8
English 1, Sec. 4
English 17
Geography 4
German, Beg.,
Sees. 2, 4, »
Latin, Beg
Mathematics 1,
Sec. 3
Mathematics 19
Spanish 1
Room
AplOl
Ap233
SSOO
S400
AglOO
A 100
A 206
A103.104
A 203
A 207
A 106
A 108
A 102
A 204
A 201
A 101
A 105
Ap 101
Agl02
Ap233
A 106
A 100
A 201
A 108
A 101
Ap 102
A 206
A 108
A 102
A 204
A 208
A 104
Friday
Agricultural
Economics 1
Botany 6 d Lab.
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1...
Chemistry 5 Lab
Economics 1, Sec. 2..
Economics 3
Economics 11
English 18...
French 1, Sec. 1...
Geology 8
German, Beg.,
Sees. 1 & 2
History 4
History 11 a.
History 19
Home Economics 7&8
Mathematics 2 b,
Sec. 1
Physics 1, Sec. 3
Physics 5 J...„
Psychology 4
Zoology 5
Zoology 6
Agricultural
Economics 2
Botany 6 d Lab.
Botany 6 f
Economics 5
English 1. Sec. 2
English 16
German, Beg., Sec. 3
German 2, Sec. 1
German 8 a
Greekl4
History 10
Mathematics 3
Philosophy 6
Physics 1, Sec. 4
Physics 2
Psychology 1
Psychology 5
Sociology 6
Room
AglOO
Ap 233
S 300
S 400
A 208
A 208
A 106
A 104,
105, 108
Ap 102
A103, 207
A 201
A 101
A 204
S200
S210
A 206
Ap 101
AplOl
AglOO
Ap 283
A 106
A 206
A 203
A 108
A 105
A 201
A 102
A 208
A 204
A 108
S 200
S210
A 100
A 207
A 104
Botany 5 b Lab
Chemistry 1, Sec. 8...
Commerce 2
Commerce 11
Economics 10
(Com. 5)
English 19
French 1, Sec. 2
French 3 a
Government 2
History 13
History 15
Latin 1, Sec. 2
Mathematics 2 b.
Sec. 2
Philosophy 8
Sociology 8...
Spanish, Beg., Sec. 2
Saturday
Botany 5 b Lab
Commerce 6
Economics 2.:.
Economics 8
English 1, Sec. *....
English 17
Latin, Beg
Mathematics 1,
Sec.8
Spanish 1
Room
S 800
Ap 102
AglOO
A 100
A 206
A108.104,
A 208
A 207
A 108
A 102
A 204
A 201
A 101
A 105
A 106
A 100
A 201
A 108
A 101
A 102
A 204
A 104
10.30
11.30
SUBJECTS NOT IN THIS TIME TABLE Afternoons
TIME TABLE
1.30
2.30
Monday
Botany 3 a Lab.
Botany 4 Lab.
Botany 5 a & c Lab.
Botany 6 c Lab
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2
Chemistry D Lab.
Chemistry 5
Chemistry 7 Lab
Economics 12 Lab.,
Sec.A
English 2
French 1, Sec. 3
Geology 11
German, Beg.,
Sees. 4 & 6
Latin 3
Mathematics 11
Philosophy 2
Physics 5 Lab
Social Work 2
Zoology 5
Zoology 6
Bacteriology 3 1
Botany 3 a Lab
Botany 4 Lab.
Botany 5 a & c Lab.
Botany 6 c Lab
Chemistry 1, Sec. 4
Chemistry D Lab
Chemistry 7 Lab.
Commerce 2
Economics 12 Lab.,
Sec. A
Education 10
French 2, Sec. 3
Geography 1
German, Beg., Sec. 5 ..
German 2, Sec. 2
History 1
History 14
Philosophy 1
Physics 5 Lab
Zoology 1 Lab., Sec. 8
Zoology 5 Lab.
Zoology 6 Lab
Room
Ap 233
S300
A 100,
Ap 100
A 104,
105, 206
Ap 102
A 103
A 203
A 207
A 101
A 201
A 102
Ap 233
S300
Ap 120
A 204
A 104
A 105
Ap 102
A 103
A 203
A 100
A 101
AglOO
Tuesday
Bacteriology 1 Lab.,
Sec. 2
Biology 1 Lab., Sec. 1
Botany 6 e Lab
Chemistry 4 a Lab.,
Sec. a
Chemistry 5 Lab.
Chemistry 9 Lab
Commerce 1
Economics 13 Lab.
English 20
French 3 c
Geology 1 b & d Lab.,
Sec. 1
Geology 7 Lab
German, Beg., Sec. 5...
Latin 8, Sec. b
Mathematics 1,
Sec. l
Physics 4 Lab., See. 1
Psychology 2
Spanish, Beg.
Zoology 2 Lab
Zoology 3 Lab.
Zoology 4 Lab
Zoology 7 Lab
Bacteriology 1 Lab.,
i Sec. 2
Biology 1 Lab., Sec. 1.
Botany 6 e Lab
Chemistry 2 Lab
Chemistry 4 a Lab.,
Sec. a
Chemistry 5 Lab.,
Sec. a
Chemistry 9 Lab
Economics 13 Lab
Education 10
English 1, Sec. 3 & 4
English 1, Sec. «...
English 20
Geology 1 b & d Lab.,
Sec.l
Geology 7 Lab
Physics 4 Lab., Sec. 1.
Psychology 2 Lab
Zoology 2 Lab
Zoology 3 Lab.
Zoology 4 Lab
Zoology 7 Lab
Room
Ap 233
A 100
A 207
A 105
Ap 120
Ap 106
A 108
A 201
A106.204
AglOO
A 104
A 203
Ap 233
A 204
'A 100,
108, 106,
108, 206
A 208
Ap 120
Ap 106
Latin 3
Mathematics 1, Sec. 3.
Mathematics 5
Philosophy 2
Social Work 2
Spanish, Beg
Zoology 5 Lab.
Zoology 6 Lab
Wednesday
Botany 3 a Lab
Botany 4 Lab
Botany 5 c Lab
Botany 6 c Lab
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2...
Economics 12 Lab.,
Sec.B
English 2
French 1, Sec. 3...
Geology 7 Lab.
German, Beg.,
.. Sees. 4 & 6
Bacteriology 10 Lab-
Botany 3 a Lab.
Botany 4 Lab.
Botany 5 c Lab
Botany 6 c Lab
Chemistry 1, Sec. 4
Commerce 1, Lab
Economics 12 Lab.,
See. B
English 1, Sec. 5
French 2, Sec. 3
Geology 7 Lab
Geography 1
German, Beg., Sec. 5
German 2, Sec. 2
History 1
History 14
Philosophy 1
Social Work 3
Zoology 5 Lab
Zoology 6 Lab
Room
Ap233
S300
A 100,
Ap 100
A 104,
105, 206
Ap 106
A 103
A 208
A 207
A 204
A 101
A 201
A 102
A 106
Ap 233
S 300
Ap 208
A 208
A104.105,
Ap 106
Ap 102
A 103
A 203
A 100
A 101
AglOO
A 102
CONSULT DEPARTMENT HEADS FOR —Continued
Afternoons
Thursday
Bacteriology 1 Lab.,
Sec. 2
Biology 1 Lab.,
Sec 3
Botany 8 b & 8 c Lab,
Chemistry 3 Lab.,
Sec. b..
Commerce 1
Economics 13 Lab
English 20
French 3 c
Geology 1 b & d Lab.,
Sec. 2
Geology 9
Latin 8, Sec. a
Mathematics 1,
Sec. 2
Physics 4 Lab.,
Sec. 2
Psychology 2
Spanish, Beg.,.
Zoology 1 Lab.,
Seel
Zoology 2 Lab-
Bacteriology 1 Lab.,
Sec. 2
Biology 1 Lab.,
Sec. 3
Botany 3 b & 3 c Lab-
Chemistry 2 Lab
Chemistry 3 Lab.,
Sec.b
Economics 13 Lab.
English 1, Sees. 1 & 2..
English 1, Sec. 5
English 20
Geology 1 b & d Lab.,
Sec. 2
Geology 9
Physics 4 Lab., Sec. 2.
Philosophy 20
Zoology 1 Lab., Sec. 1
Zoology 2 Lab
Room
Agl04
AglOO
A 207
Apl20
Ap 112
A 201
A 100,105,
106, 206
A 104
A 203
Agl04
A100, 105.
106, 203,
206
A 208
Ap 120
Ap 112
A 207
Friday
Biology 1, Lab., Sec. 5
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2...
Chemistry 3 Lab.,
Sec. a
Chemistry 4a Lab.,
Sec.b
Economics 12 Lab.,
Sec.C
English 2
French 1, Sec. 3..
Geology 2 Lab-
German, Beg.,
Sees. 4 & 6
Latin 3
Mathematics 11...
Philosophy 2
Social Work 2
Zoology 11 Lab...
Bacteriology 3 Lab
Biology 1 Lab., Sec. 5
Biology 3 Lab
Chemistry 1, Sec. 4
Chemistry 3 Lab.,
Sec. a
Chemistry 4 a Lab.,
Sec.b
Economics 12 Lab.,
Sec.C
Education 10
English 1, Sec. 5
French 2, Sec. 8
Geology 2 Lab
Geology 8
German, Beg., Sec. 5.
German 2, Sec. 2
History 14
Philosophy 1
Social Work 3
Zoology 11 Lab
Room
S300
A 100,
Ap 100
A 104,
105, 206
A 108
A 203
A 207
A 101
A 201
A 102
S300
A 204
A 208
A 104
A 105
Ap 120
A 103
A 203
A 101
A 100
A 102
1.30
2.30
SUBJECTS NOT IN THIS TIME TABLE TIME TABLE
Afternoons
3.30
4.30
5.30
Monday
Bacteriology 3 Lab-
Biology 5 Lab
Botany 1 a Lab.
Botany 4 Lab
Botany 7 a Lab.
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec. a
Chemistry D Lab
Chemistry 7 Lab
Commerce 2
Nursing 5
Physics 5 Lab.
Psychology 10
Zoology 1 Lab.,
Sec. 8
Zoology 5 Lab-
Zoology 6 Lab-
Bacteriology 3 Lab-
Biology 5 Lab .J
Betany 1 a Lab
Botany 7 a Lab
Chemistry l Lab.,
Sec. a
Chemistry 7 Lab-
Zoology 5 Lab
Zoology 6 Lab.
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec. a
Room
Ap288
Apl20
S400
A 104
Ap233
Tuesday
Bacteriology 2 Lab
Biology 1 Lab., Sec. 2.
Botany 6 e Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec.b
Chemistry 2 Lab
Chemistry 4 a Lab.,
Sec. a
Chemistry 5 Lab.,
Sec. a
Chemistry 9 Lab
Geology 7
Physics 4 Lab., Sec. 1.
Psychology 2 Lab
Zoology 2 Lab
Zoology 3 Lab.
Zoology 4 Lab.
Zoology 7 Lab.
Bacteriology 2 Lab.
Biology 1 Lab., Sec. 2.
Botany 6 e Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec. b...
Chemistry 2 Lab
Chemistry 4 a Lab.,
Sec. a...
Chemistry 9 Lab-
Zoology 2 Lab
Zoology.8 Lab
Zoology 4 Lab
Zoology 7 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec.b
Chemistry 9 Lab-
Room
Ap233
Apl06
Ap233
Wednesday
Bacteriology 10 Lab-
Botany 4 Lab.
Commerce 1 Lab.
Psychology 10
Bacteriology 10 Lab-
Room
Ap208
A 104
CONSULT DEPARTMENT HEADS FOR —Continued
Afternoons
Thursday
Bacteriology 2 Lab,
Biology 1, Lab., Sec. 4
Biology 4 Lab.
Botany 1 b Lab
Botany 3 b & 3 c Lab-
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec.c „
Chemistry 2 Lab.
Chemistry 8 Lab.,
Sec.b.
English 21
Geology 6 Lab ....
Physics 4 Lab., Sec. 2
Philosophy 20
Zoology 1 Lab., Sec. 2
Bacteriology 2, Lab-
Biology 1 Lab., Sec. 4.
Biology 4 Lab.
Botany 1 b Lab-
Botany 3 b & 3 c Lab-
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec. c
Chemistry 2 Lab
Chemistry 3 Lab.,
Secb. _
English 21
Geology 6 Lab
Zoology 1 Lab., Sec. 2
Room
Agl04
A 201
Ap 120
A 207
Ag 104]
A 201
Ap 120
Bacteriology 3 Lab
Biology 1 Lab., Sec. 6
Biology S Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec.d...
| Chemistry 4a Lab.,
Secb.
English 24 b
Geography 1 Lab-
Psychology ■ 10
[Social Work 3
Zoology 11 Lab.
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sec.c
Chemistry 3 Lab.,
Sec.b
Friday
Chemistry 2, Sec. 2...
Chemistry 3 Lab.,
Sec. a
Biology 1 Lab., Sec. 6
Biology 3 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Seed
Chemistry 3 Lab.,
Sec. a
Chemistry 4a Lab.,
Sec.b
English 24 b
Geography 1 Lab-
Zoology 11 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Seed
Chemistry 3 Lab.,
Sec. a
Room
S 300
A 108
Ap 120
A 104
A 102
3.30
A 103
Ap 120
4.30
5.30
SUBJECTS NOT IN THIS TIME TABLE FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE
The degrees offered in this Faculty are Bachelor of Arts (B.A.),
Bachelor of Commerce (B.Com.), Bachelor of Education (B.Ed.),
Bachelor of Home Economics (B.H.E.), and Master of Arts (M.A.).
Courses which do not lead to degrees are offered in Teacher
Training and Social Work.
In the Session of 1944-45 the first three years of the course leading
to the degree of Bachelor of Home Economics will be given.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.
The degree of B.A. is granted with Honours or as a General
Course degree. A General Course degree will be granted on completion of courses amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity
with Calendar regulations. No distinction is made between General
Course and Honours students in the First and Second Years,
except as regards prerequisites for later work, but in the Third and
Fourth Years there are special requirements for Honours students.
Students holding the degree of B.Com. from this University may
proceed to the degree of B.A. in one year by completing 15
additional units of work open to students in their Third and
Fourth Years, provided that their additional units are chosen so
as to complete the requirements for the B.A. degree.
It is possible to obtain the B.A. and B.Com. degrees concurrently
in five years on completion of 75 units chosen so as to cover the
requirements for both degrees.
Double courses are offered in Arts and Science and Applied
Science leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc, B.A. and
B.A.Sc. (in Nursing), B.A. and B.S.F., and B.Com. and B.S.F.,
and in Arts and Science and Agriculture leading to the degrees of
B.A. and B.S.A., and B.Com. and B.S.A. For the regulations
governing these, see the section Double Courses at the end of the
Calendar.
Credits obtained at the Summer Session (see University Summer Session) may be combined with Winter Session credits to
complete the 60 units required for the degree of B.A. The degree
of B.A. will not be granted within three years from Senior
Matriculation nor within four years from University Entrance.
The maximum credit for Summer Session work in any one
calendar year is 6 units; and the maximum credit for work other
than that of the regular Summer and Winter Sessions is 3 units
in each academic year, and 15 units in all subsequent to Senior
Matriculation or First Year Arts. 82 Faculty of Arts and Science
No credit will be granted for work done at other universities in
the same academic year in which work has been attempted at this
University, whether in the Summer Session or in the Winter Session
or otherwise. Extra-mural work done at other universities prior
to registration at this University may be accepted, if approved by
the Faculty, but may not exceed 3 units in respect of any one
academic year or 15 units in all subsequent to Senior Matriculation.
If a student is granted credit for extra-mural work taken elsewhere,
the number of units which he may take at this University without
attendance at a Winter or Summer Session will be correspondingly
reduced.
Pending the establishment of a department of Music in the
University of British Columbia, six units of undergraduate credit
towards a B.A. degree may be granted for music to a student who
holds at the time of graduation any one of the following diplomas:
Associate of the Toronto Conservatory of Music (A.T.C.M.), Licentiate of McGill Conservatorium (L.Mus.), Licentiate of the Royal
Schools of Music, London (L.R.S.M.), Licentiate of Trinity College
of Music, London (L.T.C.L.), or an equivalent diploma or certificate from other schools of Music which may be accepted by the
University of British Columbia. If the student's work in music is
done concurrently with the usual University work of the Third and
Fourth Years, the credit will be assigned in the Fourth Year; if a
student enters Third Year University having already acquired the
diploma, the credits will normally be assigned evenly between the
Third and Fourth Years. No credits for music will be granted in
the First and Second Years and no student may get credit for music
until the other requirements for the B.A. degree have been satisfied.
Candidates for the degree of B.A. are advised to attend at least
one Winter Session, preferably that of the Fourth Year.
Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally consists
of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory period of not less
than two or more than three hours) each week throughout the
session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent laboratory periods)
throughout a single term.
Note 1. Students in any of the affiliated Theological Colleges
who file with the Registrar a written statement expressing their
intention of graduating in Theology will be allowed to offer in each
year of their Arts course, in place of optional subjects set down in
the Calendar for the year and the course in which they are registered, Religious Knowledge options, to the extent of three units
taken from the following list: Hebrew, Biblical Literature, New
Testament Greek, Church History, Christian Ethics, and Apologetics. Courses Leading to the Degree op B.A. 83
Note 2. Students intending to enter Normal School are advised
to consult Regulations for Admission to Normal Schools, issued by
the Department of Education, Victoria.
First and Second Years
1. The requirements of the first two years consist of 30 units,
15 of which must be taken in each year. Courses must be chosen in
conformity with the requirements that follow. Details of courses
are given under the various departments.
*Each student must take: Units
(a) English 1 in the First Year and English 2'in the
Second Year 6
f (b) The first two courses in a language offered for University Entrance, one course in each year 6
(c) Mathematics 1, in the First Year 3
(d) Economics 1 or 2, or History 1, 2, 3, or 4, or
Psychology A or 1, or Philosophy 1, or Sociology 1 3
(e) Biology 1, or Botany 1 (b), or Chemistry 1, or
Geography 1, or Geology 1, or Physics A, or Physics 1 3
(f) Three courses—not already chosen—selected from the
following:
Bacteriology 1, Biology 1, Botany 1 (a), Botany
1 (b), Chemistry 1, Chemistry 2, Chemistry 4,
Economics 1, Economics 2, Commerce 5 (Economics
10), French 1, French 2, Geography 1, Geology 1,
Geology 2, JBeginners' German, German 1,German
2, {Beginners' Greek, Greek 1, Greek 2, Greek A
(see Calendar, 1935-1936)**, Greek 2 (see Calendar, 1936-1937)**, History 1, History 2, History 3,
History 4, JBeginners' Latin, Latin 1, Latin 2,
Mathematics 2, Mathematics 3, Mathematics 4,
Philosophy 1, Physics A, Physics 1, Physics 2,
Physics 4, Psychology A, Psychology 1, Sociology
1, Beginners' Spanish, Spanish 1, Zoology 1 9
Notes
Bacteriology 1, Botany 1 (a), Zoology 1, Geology 1 and 2,
Economics 1, Commerce 5, History 4, Philosophy 1, Psychology 1,
and Sociology 1 are not open to First Year students.
*For credit that can be given for Senior Matriculation standing, complete or
partial, see page 83.
tSee regulations 2, 7, and 8.
tSee regulations 4, 5, 7, and 8.
**These courses are offered only by Victoria College. 84 Faculty of Arts and Science
History 2 is open to First Year students only if they are preparing for entrance to the Normal School. Geology 1, and Philosophy 1
are normally Third Year subjects, but may be taken by Second Year
students (full undergraduate and conditioned).
Chemistry 4 is open to Second Year students providing that the
prerequisites have been taken.
Geology 1 must be taken in the Second Year by students intending to take the Honours course in Geology.
Botany 1 (b) and Civil Engineering 2 are required of students
intending to take the double degree B.A., B.S.F., except students
taking major or Honours in Biology (Forestry option), for whom
Botany 1 (a) and Civil Engineering 2 are required.
2. Students who have not presented German or Greek or Latin
for University Entrance may fulfil the language requirements for
the degree by taking Beginners' German or Beginners' Greek or
Beginners' Latin or Beginners' Spanish, to be followed respectively
by German 1 and German 2 or Greek 1 and Greek 2 or Latin 1 and
Latin 2 or Spanish 1 and Spanish 2 (when offered) to complete 63
units. The extra three units may be taken in any year.
Students who have completed German III of the high school
course of study, or its equivalent, may fulfil the language requirements by taking German 2 for the First Year and German 3 (a)
for the Second Year.
3. Students who offer either French IV, German IV, or Latin IV
of Senior Matriculation under Group 1 of the Optional Courses of
University Entrance may fulfil the language requirements for the
First and Second Years by taking French 2, German 2, or Latin 2
respectively in either the First or the Second Year. If the Second
Year language is taken in the First Year, a Third Year course in
this language may be taken in the Second Year.
4. No student in his First Year may elect more than one beginners'
course in a language, and, except as provided in Sections 7 and 8,
no beginners' course in a language will count towards a degree
unless followed by a second year's work in that language.
5. Except in the case of beginners' courses, no course in a
language may be taken by a student who has not offered that
language for entrance to the University. A beginners' course in
a language may not be taken for credit by a student who has
obtained credit for that language at entrance.
6. A student taking three languages in the first two years (18
units) may defer the course selected under section 1 (e) to the
Third or Fourth Year, and a student taking four science courses First and Second Years 85
(12 units) may defer the course selected under section 1 (d) to
the Third or Fourth Year.
7. Students offering four science courses (12 units) in the First
and Second Years may fulfil the language requirement indicated
above in section 1 (b) by taking any two of the following:
French 1, French 2; Beginners' Latin, Latin 1, Latin 2;
Beginners' German, German 1, German 2; Beginners' Greek,
Greek 1, Greek 2, Greek A (see Calendar, 1935-36)*, Greek 2
(see Calendar, 1936-37)*, Beginners' Spanish, Spanish 1.
Only one beginners' course may be selected.
8. Students offering six science courses (18 units) in the First
and Second Years may postpone the second course in a language
under section 7 until the Third or Fourth Year.
The science courses in sections 7 and 8 may be selected from the
following :
Bacteriology, Biology, Botany, Chemistry, Geography,
Geology, Physics, Zoology.
Note. Students thinking of entering Applied Science are referred to the list
of subjects required to be taken by them in First Year Arts and to the regulations in reference to these, given under Admission and General Outline of
Courses in Faculty of Applied Science. They are advised to attend the noon
hour talks on the choice of a profession and on the life and work in vocations
likely to appeal to Applied Science graduates.
Third and Fourth Years
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years consist of 30
units, of which students must take in their Third Year not less
than 15 units. The graduation standing is determined by the results
of the Third and Fourth Years combined.
A. General Course Curriculum
1. For the General Course a student must select two major
subjects according to either of the following schemes :f
a. A minimum of 9 units in one subject and a minimum of 6
units in another subject, both subjects to be chosen from
one of the following groups:
(1) Bacteriology, Biology and Botany, Chemistry, Geology
and Geography, Mathematics, Physics, Psychology,
Zoology.
(2) Economics, Education (not more than six units and only
for those who have completed their Normal Training),
'These courses are offered only by Victoria College.
tThose who intend to enter the Teacher Training Course should consult section 3,
page 111. 86 Faculty of Arts and Science
English, French, Geography, German, Government,
Greek, History, Latin, Mathematics, Philosophy, Psychology, Sociology, Music (6 units).
Or
b. A minimum of 9 units in each of two subjects to be chosen
from the following:
Biology and Botany, Chemistry, English, French, Geography,
German, Greek, History, Latin, Mathematics, Physics,
Zoology.
Work in the First or Second Year is required in each of the
major subjects, except in Education, Government, and Music.
In certain cases, however, this requirement may be fulfilled by
taking a First or Second Year course in the Third Year (see
section 3), but a course thus taken may not count towards the
required units for a major.
In addition to the major subjects a minimum of 6 units must
be chosen from some other subject or subjects.
2. Details of courses available in the Third and Fourth Years
are given under the various departments.
3. Only two subjects (6 units) of the First or Second Year
courses may be taken in the combined Third and Fourth Years.
In a number of these courses extra reading will be required of
Third and Fourth Year students.
When two First or Second Year subjects, other than a Beginners'
Language or Language 1, are taken in the Third and Fourth Years,
not more than one of these subjects may be outside the departments
in which the student is doing his major work.
For the purpose of this regulation the following subjects are
considered Third and Fourth Year subjects: Botany 1 (a) or
Zoology 1 (if both are taken), Chemistry 4*, Geology 1, Geology 2,
German 2 if preceded by Beginners' German and German 1, Greek
2 if preceded by Beginners' Greek and Greek 1, History 4, Latin 2
if preceded by Beginners' Latin and Latin 1, Mathematics 4, and
Philosophy 1; also the subjects under 1 (d) or 1 (e) postponed to
the Third or Fourth Year, as provided for under paragraph 6,
page 84.
4. No credit.will be given for a language course normally taken
in the First Year unless it is taken in the Third Year and continued
in the Fourth Year.
*See prerequisite for Chemistry 4. Third and Fourth Years 87
5. Students in the Third and Fourth Years, with the consent
of the departments concerned, may take one or two courses of
private reading (each to count not more than 3 units), provided
that:
a/ (1) The candidate for a reading course shall have completed
his First and Second Years and shall have taken at least
6 units either of Second or Third Year work or of Second
and Third Year work in the subject in which the reading
course is taken; and
(2) Shall have made an average of at least Second Class in
the 6 units in question.
b. Both reading courses shall not be chosen in the same subject.
c. A reading course shall not be taken concurrently with Extra-
Sessional or with Summer Session courses except by a student
in the Fourth Year.
Credit for a course of private reading is part of the maximum
of 15 units which may be taken in addition to the regular work of
Winter and Summer Sessions; and no other additional work may
be taken in the same academic year.
B. Honours Curriculum
1. Students whose proposed scheme of work involves Honours
courses must obtain the consent of the departments concerned and
of the Dean before entering on these courses; and this consent will
normally be granted only to those students who have a clear
academic record at the end of their Second Year with at least
Second Class standing in the subject or subjects of specialization.
(Cards of application for admission to Honours courses may be
obtained at the Registrar's office.)
2. Certain departments offer Honours courses either alone or
in combination with other departments. For Honours in a single
department, at least 18 of the requisite 30 units must be taken in
the department concerned, and at least 6 outside it. For Honours
in combined courses, at least 12 units are required in each of two
subjects. Particulars of these courses are given below.
3. Candidates for Honours, with the consent of the department
concerned, may offer a special reading course (to count not more
than 3 units) in addition to the reading courses offered above under
General Course Curriculum, section 5.
4. All candidates for Honours, at the option of the department
or departments concerned, may be required to present a graduating 88 Faculty of Arts and Science
essay embodying the results of some investigation that they have
made independently. Credit for the graduating essay will be not
less than 3 or more than 6 units. The latest date for receiving
graduating essays in the Second Term shall be the last day of
lectures; and the corresponding date for the Autumn Congregation
shall be October 1.
5. Candidates for Honours are required to take at the end of
their Fourth Year a general examination, oral or written, or both,
as the department or departments concerned shall decide. This
examination is designed to test the student's knowledge of his
chosen subject or subjects as a whole, and is in addition to the
ordinary class examinations of the Third and Fourth Years.
6. Honours are of two grades, First Class and Second Class.
Students who, in the opinion of the department concerned, have
not attained a sufficiently high ranking, may be awarded a General
Course degree. If a combined Honours course is taken, First Class
Honours will be given only if both the departments concerned
agree; and an Honours degree will be withheld if either department
refuses a sufficiently high grade.
7. It is hoped to offer the following Honours courses during the
session 1944-45. But if it is found impossible to do so, the University reserves the right to refuse new registrations in any of them.
SINGLE HONOURS COURSES
Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1, Biology 1.
Required Courses: Bacteriology 2. Candidates must select the
remaining 15 units required in consultation with the Head of the
Department.
Biology and Botany
Prerequisites: Biology 1, Chemistry 1, Botany 1 (a).
Chemistry 3, Physics 1*, and Zoology 1 are required before
completion of the course and should be taken as early as possible.
Required Courses: Botany 3 (a), 4, 5 (a), and 6 (c) or 6 (e).
Optional Courses: Biology 2 and 3; courses in Botany not specifically required; and courses in Zoology. Optional courses should
be selected in consultation with the Department.
*Or, with the consent of the Department of Biology and Botany, Physics A. Honours Courses 89
Biology and Botany (Forestry Option)
Prerequisites: First Year, Biology 1; Second Year, Botany 1 (a),
Civil Engineering 2; Zoology 1, Physics 1*, and Chemistry 1
and 3 (to be taken as early as possible).
Required Courses: Botany 3 (a), Botany 4, Botany 5 (a), 5 (b),
Botany 6 (c) or 6 (e), Botany 7, Zoology 4, a thesis; and the
following courses which are common to all Third and Fourth Year
options leading to a degree in Forestry: Botany 1 (c) and Civil
Engineering 5, in the Third Year; Forestry 2 (b, c), in the Fourth
Year. Botany 5 (b) should be taken in the Third Year.
Other courses to complete the requirements to be arranged in
consultation with the heads of the two departments. Agronomy 15
and Botany 6 (b) are recommended.
Students completing this course for the B.A. degree may qualify
for the degree of B.S.F. by taking the Fifth Year in Forestry (see
Faculty of Applied Science).
Biology and Botany (Genetics Option)
Prerequisites: Biology 1; Chemistry 1, 3; one of Botany 1 (a),
Zoology 1, Biology 4. (Where possible both Botany 1 and Zoology 1
should be taken.)
Course: Biology 2 (a), 2 (b), 2 (c), 2 (d). Six units of more
advanced courses in Biology, Botany, Zoology. Three to six units
from Agronomy 6, 21, 50; Genetics 2; Animal Husbandry 23;
Poultry Husbandry 14. Thesis (three units).
Biology and Botany (Physiology Option)
Prerequisites: Biology 1; Botany 1(a) or Zoology 1 (both should
be taken where possible); Chemistry 3..
Required Courses: Biology 3; Botany 3(a), 3(b) (Horticulture
41) ; problem; thesis.
Optional Courses: At least 9 units from the following: Botany 4;
Zoology 2, 5; Chemistry 9(a), 19; Bacteriology 9; Agronomy 15;
Animal Husbandry 21, 22; Dairying 1(b); Poultry Husbandry
19(a).
Biology and Botany (Plant Pathology Option)
Prerequisites: Biology 1; Botany 1(a); Zoology 1; Chemistry
1,3.
Required Courses: Botany 3(a), 4, 6(c), 6(e), 6(d); Zoology 4,
7; thesis.
*0r, with the consent of the department concerned, Physics A. 90 Faculty of Arts and Science
Optional Courses: In consultation with the Department, students
in Arts and Science will select at least 8 units from the following:
Agronomy 2,11; Horticulture 13, 17, 41, 42; Agricultural Economics 1; Botany 5(a), 6(f). Students in agriculture are required to
select 12 units, from three departments in the Faculty of Agriculture (see p. 295).
Chemistry
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and 2, Physics 1, Mathematics 2.
Course: Candidates are required to complete the following
courses: Chemistry 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 25.
Classics
Prerequisites: Greek 2, Latin 2.
Course: Greek 8 and Latin 8 (in both years) ; any three of Greek
3, 5, 6, 7; any three of Latin 3, 4, 5, 6; and either Greek 9 or
Latin 7.
As proof of ability to write Greek and Latin prose, candidates
must attain not less than Second Class standing in Greek 8 and
Latin 8. During the candidate's Fourth Year, papers will be set
in sight translation, and the candidate is advised to pursue a course
of private reading under the supervision of the Department.
There will also be a general paper on antiquities, literature, and
history.
Economics
Prerequisites: A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course: Economics 2, if not already taken, any 15 further units
in the Department, to include Economics 4, 8 or 9, and 12, and two
from the following group:
Economics 3, 5, 6, 7, 11, 13, Government 1, Sociology 1.
Also a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination, and, if required, address
a general audience on a designated subject.
Attendance at the seminar in Economics is required in the Third
and Fourth Years.
For the regulations governing the double course leading to the
degrees of B.A. (Economics) and B.S.F., see the section Double
Courses at the end of the Calendar. Honours Courses 91
English Language and Literature
Students who intend to take Honours must have the permission
of the Department before beginning the course.
Prerequisites: (1) A First Class or high Second Class in English
2. Ordinarily, special work is required of students who intend to
take Honours. Such work, if required, is announced at the beginning
of the session. (2) A reading knowledge of French or German. The
Department may require candidates to write a paper in translation
at the end of the Fourth Year.
Course: English 25 (involving an examination on the life, times,
and complete works of some major English author), 20, 21 (a) (in
the Third Year), 22 (in the Fourth Year), 24 (a) and (b) (the
seminars, of which 24 (b) must be attended in both years), and
a graduating essay which will count 3 units.
Candidates will be required to take the following final Honours
examinations on the history of English literature:
1. From the beginning to 1500.
2. From 1500 to 1660.
3. From 1660 to 1780.
4. From 1780 to 1890.
One of these examinations will be oral.
In the award of Honours special importance will be attached to
the graduating essay and to the final Honours examinations.
If the candidate's work outside the Department does not include
a course in English history, he must take an examination in that
subject.
French
Prerequisites: French 2.
Course: French 3 (a), 3 (b), 3 (c) in the Third Year.
French 4 (a), 4 (b), 4 (c) in the Fourth Year.
A graduating essay (in French) which will count 3 units.
Geology
Prerequisites: Geology 1. If possible, Geology 2 and Geography
4, also, should be taken in the Second Year. Chemistry 1 and if
possible Physics 1 should be taken in the First Year, as these are
required for Geology 2 and 7 and are of great value in Geology 1.
Biology 1 is recommended in the Second Year, as it is prerequisite
to Zoology 1, which should be taken in the Third Year as a valuable
preparation for Geology 6. 92 Faculty of Arts and Science
Course: Eighteen units to be chosen from Geology 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
10, and 23a. If Geology 2 has not been taken in the Second Year
it must be taken in the Third Year, as it is prerequisite to Geology
7 and 8.
History
Prerequisite: (1) A First Class or high Second Class average
in the History course or courses taken in the First and Second Years.
(2) A reading knowledge of French or German.
Students whose standing in Honours History during the Third
Year is inadequate may, at the discretion of the Department, be
required to discontinue the Honours course.
Course: History 10 and twelve other units which normally must
be chosen from courses offered in the Third and Fourth Years plus
a graduating essay which will count three units. The seminar
(which carries no credit) must be attended in the Third and
Fourth Years.
An Honours paper will be set at the end of the Fourth Year on
the work of the seminar and of the courses studied in the Third and
Fourth Years. There will be an oral examination on the field
covered in the graduating essay.
Latin
Prerequisite: Latin 2.
Course: Latin 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and Greek 9. The candidate must
also take Latin 8 in both years, obtaining at least Second Class
standing. His general knowledge will be tested by papers on antiquities, literature, and history at the end of the Fourth Year.
Mathematics
Prerequisites: Mathematics 2, Physics 1.
Course: Any 18 units of Mathematics 10,11,12, 13,14, 15, 16, 17,
18, and 19, and Physics 4 and 5. A final Honours examination,
written or oral, is required.
Philosophy
Prerequisites: Philosophy 1, Psychology 1.
Course: Psychology 2 or 20, and 15 units chosen from Philosophy
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 20. Honours Courses 93
Physics
Prerequisites: Mathematics 2, Physics 1, Chemistry 1.
Course: Mathematics 10, 12, 16; Physics 4 and 5, and 15 additional units. Students are advised to take Chemistry 4 and 7, if
possible.
Political Science
Prerequisite: A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course: Economics 2, if not already taken, any 15 further units
in the Department, to include Government 1, Economics 12, and
three from the following group :
Sociology 1 and 2, Government 2, 3, 4, Economics 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 9, 13.
Also a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial
instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination and, if required, address
a general audience on a designated subject.
Attendance at the seminar in Economics is required in the Third
and Fourth Years.
For the regulations governing the double course leading to the
degrees of B.A. (Political Science) and B.S.F., see the section
Double Courses at the end of the Calendar.
Psychology
Prerequisites: Psychology 1, Philosophy 1, Biology 1, Mathematics 2 (b), Physics A or 1.
Course: Philosophy 8, and 15 units chosen from Psychology 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 20.
Sociology
Prerequisite: A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course: A minimum of nine and a maximum of twelve units
selected from Sociology 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and a minimum of six and
maximum of nine additional units selected from Economics 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 9, 12, 13, to a total of not more than eighteen units.
Students must pass an oral examination and, if required, address
a general audience on a designated subject.
Attendance at the seminar in Economics is required in the Third
and Fourth Years. 94 Faculty of Arts and Science
Zoology
Prerequisites: Biology 1, Chemistry 1, Zoology 1.
Physics 1*, Botany 1 (a), and Chemistry 2 and 3 are required
before completion of the course and should be taken as early as
possible.
Required Courses: Zoology 2, 3, 5, 6.
Optional Courses: Zoology 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12; courses in
Botany; Biology 2 and 3; Geology 6. These optional courses should
be selected in consultation with the Head of the Department
of Zoology.
COMBINED HONOURS COURSES
(a) Any two of:
Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine, Biology and Botany,
Chemistry, Geology, Mathematics, Physics, Zoology.
(b) Any two of:
Economics, English, French, German, History, Latin or Classics,
Philosophy, Political Science, Psychology, Sociology.
(c) Other combinations not listed above may be taken with the
consent of Faculty.
The requirements in each of these subjects in such combinations
are as follows:
Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1, Biology 1, Chemistry 1.
Course: Bacteriology 2, 5, 9, and 10, and a thesis.
Biology and Botany
Prerequisites: Biology 1, Chemistry 1, Botany 1 (a).
Course: Twelve units to be selected in consultation with the
Head of the Department.
Chemistry
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and 2, Physics 1, Mathematics 2.
Course: To be arranged in consultation with the Head of the
Department.
*Or, with the consent of the departments concerned. Physics A. Honours Courses 95
Classics
Prerequisites: Greek 2, Latin 2.
Course: Latin 8 (in both years); any two of Greek 3, 5, 6, 7; any
two of Latin 3, 4, 5, 6.
Economics
Prerequisite: A reading knowledge of French or German.
Economics 2 is not available as an option in Economics to students taking combined Honours courses including either History 16
or History 17.
Course: Twelve units, including Economics 4, 8 or 9, 12, and
Economics 2, if not already taken.
English
Students who intend to take Honours must have the permission
of the Department before beginning the course.
Prerequisites: (1) A First Class or high Second Class in English
2. Ordinarily, special work is required of students who intend to
take Honours. Such work, if required, is announced at the beginning of the session. (2) A reading knowledge of French or German.
The Department may require candidates to write a paper in translation at the end of the Fourth Year.
Course: English 20 and 24, and any three of the English courses
specified for the Third and Fourth Years. The seminar must be
attended during both the final years, but credits which count for
the B.A. degree will be given only for the work of the Fourth Year.
Candidates will be required to take the following final Honours
examinations on the history of English literature:
1. From 1500 to 1660.
2. From 1660 to 1780.
3. From 1780 to 1890.
In the award of Honours special importance will be attached to
these examinations. One of them may be oral.
French
Prerequisite: French 2.
Course: If the graduating essay is written on a French subject
3 (a) and 3 (c), 4 (a) and 4 (c); otherwise either these courses or
3 (a) and 3 (b), 4 (a) and 4 (b).
Courses 3 (b) and 4 (b) are intended primarily for Honours
students and should be taken whenever possible, even if they are
not required to make up the minimum number of units. 96 Faculty of Arts and Science
Geology
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Course: Twelve units to be selected in consultation with the Head
of the Department. Geography 4 may be taken as a course in
Geology.
German
Prerequisite: A First Class or high Second Class in German 2.
Course: German 3 (a), 3 (c), and any two of 3 (b), 4 (a),
4 (b), 5 (a).
In addition, a comprehensive examination in the history of
German literature.
History
Prerequisites: (1) First Class or high Second Class average in
the History course or courses taken in the First and Second Years.
(2) A reading knowledge of French or German.
Students whose standing in Honours History during the Third
Year is inadequate may, at the discretion of the Department, be
required to discontinue the Honours course.
Course: History 10 and any nine additional units, of which the
graduating essay, if written in History, will count three units. The
seminar (which carries no credit) must be attended in the Third
and Fourth Years.
An Honours paper will be set at the end of the Fourth Year on
the work of the seminar and of the courses studied in the Third
and Fourth Years. There will be an oral examination on the field
covered by the graduating essay.
Latin
Prerequisite: Latin 2.
Course: Latin 8 (in both years) and any four of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. In
the final year candidates must pass an examination (a) in sight
translation, and (b) in Latin literature, history, and antiquities.
Private reading under the direction of the Department is recommended.
Mathematics
Prerequisite: Mathematics 2.
Course: Any twelve units of Mathematics 10,11,12,13,14,15,16,
17, 18, 19. Honours Courses 97
Philosophy
Prerequisites: Philosophy 1, Psychology 1.
Course: Twelve units chosen from Philosophy 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9,20.
Physics
Prerequisites: Mathematics 2, Physics 1.
Course: Physics 4, 5, and 8 and four units from the following.:
Physics 6, 7, 11, 12, and 13.
Political Science
Prerequisite: A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course: Twelve units, including at least six in Government.
Psychology
Prerequisite: Psychology 1, Philosophy 1.
Course: Twelve units chosen from Psychology 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 20.
Sociology
Prerequisite: A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course: Twelve units selected from Sociology 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
Zoology
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and 2, Biology 1, Zoology 1.
Course: Zoology 2, 3, 5, and 6.
COURSE LEADING TO THE DEGREE of B.Com.
The degree of B.Com. will be granted on completion of courses
amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with Calendar regulations.
Honours standing will be accorded those students who obtain an
average standing of 80 per cent, in the Fourth Year and 75 per
cent, in the Third Year, and who do not fail in any subject taken
in the Third and Fourth Years.
It is also possible to obtain the B.A. and B.Com. degrees concurrently in five years on completion of 75 units chosen so as to
cover the requirements of both degrees. While the B.A. degree may
be completed in one year by students holding the B.Com. degree,
the converse may not be true, because prerequisites in some of the
Commerce courses involve two years of consecutive work. 98 Faculty of Arts and Science
For the regulations governing the double courses leading to the
degrees of B.Com. and B.S.F., and B.Com. and B.S.A., see the
section Double Courses at the end of the Calendar.
The regulations as to Summer Session credits, number of units
to be taken in any academic year, etc., apply to courses leading to
the degree of B.Com. in the same way as to courses leading to the
degree of B.A.
As the student progresses in his course he will be expected to
do an increasing amount of field work in the business community
available to him. In this way he will learn to work on his own
initiative and will acquire a first hand knowledge of business
practice.
Periodic written reports are an important part of the different
courses, and students are warned that demands upon their time
will be sustained throughout the course.
Students proceeding to the degree of B.Com. are required so
to arrange their courses that they will be registered in Commerce
subjects over a period of at least two years. Any departure from
this regulation must have the approval of the Head of the Department of Commerce and the Dean.
First Year
A course in First Year Arts and Science or the equivalent.
Second Year
The following courses comprising 15 units:
English 2 or English 3 and 4.
Mathematics 2 or 3, or an additional course in the language
taken in the First Year. Students who contemplate taking advanced work in Statistics (Economics 13) should take Mathematics 2.
Economics 1.
Commerce 5.
Elective, 3 units, preferably Commerce 1.
Students will not be permitted to register for the Third Year in
Commerce unless they have secured a standing of 60 per cent
in Economics 1.
In view of the importance which rightly attaches to the capacity
for adequate and clear expression in writing, Regulation 12, on
page 252 of the Calendar, will be rigidly enforced at the end of
the Second Year, and reasonable legibility in handwriting will be
insisted upon. Course Leading to the Degree op B.Com. 99
Third Year
The following courses comprising 15 units:
Economics 4.
Economics 12, or a third course in the language elected in the
Second Year.
Commerce 6. k
Commerce 1, if not already taken.
Electives, three or six units to be chosen from the elective list
in consultation with the Head of the Department and the Dean.
Fourth Year
The following courses comprising 15 units:
Economics 6, if not already taken.
Commerce 4.
Commerce 9.
Two courses, not already chosen, to be selected from the elective
list in consultation with the Department. Students who select the
language option will be required to take in the Fourth Year an
additional course in the language selected.
Students in the Fourth Year should not under any circumstances plan to carry more than the prescribed fifteen units of
work. If for any reason they do not enter the Fourth Year with
a complete Third Year they must expect to attend an extra year
in order to satisfy the requirements of graduation.
Electives for Third and Fourth Years:
Commerce 2.
Commerce 3.
Commerce 11.
Commerce 13.
Economics 3.
Economics 5.
Economics 11.
Economics 13.
Agricultural Economics 1.
English (3 units).
Government 1.
Government 4.
Government 5.
Language (3 units).
Mathematics 2, 3.
Mining (3 units).
Psychology 1, 3, 7, or 9. 100 Faculty of Arts and Science
COURSE LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.H.E.
FIRST AND SECOND YEARS
Courses must be chosen in conformity with the following requirements. Units
(1) Required course 24
(a) English 1 in the First Year 3
(b) Chemistry 1 in the First Year 3
(c) Chemistry C (prerequisite: Chemistry 1) 3
(d) Biology 1 3
(e) Physics A or Physics C or Physics 1 3
(f) Home Economics A (First Term) iy2
Required only if the student does not have credit
in Home Economics (A) III or Home Economics
(CC) III or equivalent.
(g) Home Economics B (Second Term) iy2
Required only if the student does not have credit
in Home Economics (B) III or Home Economics
(CC) III or equivalent.
(h) Home Economics 1 (First Term) iy2
Prerequisite: Home Economics A or equivalent.
(i) Home Economics 2 (Second Term) 1%
(j) Home Economics 3 (First Term) iy2
Prerequisite: Home Economics B or equivalent.
(k) Home Economics 4 (Second Term) IV2
Prerequisite: Home Economics 1.
(2) Three courses from the following:
Agriculture 1, Bacteriology 1, Botany lfa,), Commerce
5, Economics 1 or Economics 2, English 2 or English 3
and 4, Geography 1, History 1 or History 2 or History
3, Language: Beginners', 1, 2 (maximum 6 units),
Mathematics 1, Mathematics 2 or Mathematics 3, Philosophy 1, Psychology 1, Sociology 1, Zoology 1 9
Notes
1. Bacteriology 1, Botany 1 (a), Commerce 5, Economics 1,
Philosophy 1, Psychology 1, Sociology 1, and Zoology 1 are not open
to First Year students.
2. Bacteriology 1, Economics 1, and Psychology 1 are required
courses for the degree in Home Economics and are to be taken Course Leading to the Degree of B.H.E. 101
in the Second or Third Year. Students should elect Economics 1
and Psychology 1 in the Second Year where possible.
3. If the student has presented Home Economics (CC) III for
University Entrance, Home Economics 1 and 2 are to be taken
in the First Year and Home Economics 3 and 4 in the Second Year.
If the student has presented Home Economics (A) III for
University Entrance, Home Economics 1, 2, and B are to be taken
in the First Year and Home Economics 3 and 4 in the Second Year.
If the student has presented Home Economics (B) III for
University Entrance, Home Economics A and 2 are to be taken in
the First Year and Home Economics 1, 3, and 4 in the Second Year.
If the student has not the required Home Economics standing
from the high schools, Home Economics A, B, and 2 are to be
taken in the First Year and Home Economics 1, 3, and 4 in the
Second Year.
If the student enters with Home Economics (CC) IV taken as
a Senior Matriculation subject, 3 units will be credited toward
the First Year in Home Economics.
4. Students wishing to carry on advanced work in nutrition or
textiles should substitute certain other Chemistry courses for
Chemistry C, such substitutions to be arranged after consultation
with the Acting Head of the Department of Home Economics.
Third and Fourth Years
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years consist of 30
units, of which students must take in their Third Year not less
than 15 units.
In the Third Year the following courses are required: Bacteriology 1, Biology 5, Chemistry D, Home Economics 5, 6, 7, and 8.
In the Fourth Year, the course is provisionally as follows. Home
Economics 17, 18, and 19 are required of all Home Economics
students. In addition, those wishing to train as dietitians must
take Home Economics 13, 14, 15, and 16, and those planning to
enter the teaching profession must take Home Economics 9, 10,
and 12.
COURSE LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.Ed.
1. Prerequisites:
(a) A bachelor's degree in Arts, Agriculture, or Applied
Science, or an equivalent, from a recognized university.
(b) At least one year's teaching experience before beginning
the courses listed under 2 (b) below. 102 Faculty of Arts and Science
(c) A permanent teaching certificate, which must be obtained
before the degree is conferred.
2. Course: The B.Ed, degree represents fifteen units as follows:
(a) Six units for the completion of the Teacher Training
Course or its equivalent.
(b) Nine units—not already chosen—from Education 20 to
39 inclusive.
3. With the approval of the Dean and the Head of the Department, three units in a subject other than Education may be included
in the fifteen units required.
4. Candidates must have their courses approved by the Head of
the Department and by the Dean.
5. Standings will be First Class, Second Class, and Pass. The
B.Ed, with First or Second Class standing will be awarded to
candidates who (a) have obtained First or Second Class standing
respectively in the Teacher Training Course or its equivalent, and
(b) have obtained an average First or Second Class standing
respectively in the nine units required under 2 (b) above, with
First or Second Class standing in at least six of these units. Other
successful candidates will be awarded the B.Ed, with Pass standing.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.
1. Candidates for the M.A. degree must hold the B.A. degree
from this University, or its equivalent. Students, however, who
have not more than six units of the undergraduate course to complete will be allowed to take courses counting towards a graduate
degree; but these courses will not be counted as graduate credits
until the students have registered as graduate students.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission
to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his application, on or before September 1, an official statement of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in the several
subjects of his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of
such a student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. This fee must accompany the application.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who
proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
(a) to spend one year in resident graduate study; or
(b) to do two or more years of private work under the supervision of the University, such work to be equivalent to
one year of graduate study; or Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. lQ'-i
(c) to do one year of private work under University supervision and one term of resident graduate study, the total
of such work to be equivalent to one year of resident
graduate study.
4. A major, including a thesis, and a minor will be required. In
general the minor shall be taken outside the department in which
the student is taking his major, but special permission may be given
to take both major and minor in the same department, provided the
subjects are different and are under different professors. The major
or the minor, with the consent of the department or the departments
concerned, may be extended to include work in an allied subject.
Both major and minor must be taken in the Faculty of Arts
and Science.
Candidates must have their courses approved by the heads of
the departments concerned*, by the Committee on Graduate
Studies, and by the Dean. Special forms entitled Application for
a Course Leading to the Master's Degree may be obtained from
the Registrar's Office.
5. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standardized thesis
paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular entitled Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.) The latest date for
receiving Masters' theses in the Second Term will be the last day
of lectures; and the corresponding date for the Autumn Congregation will be October 1.
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be made
to the Registrar on or before October 1.
7. The following minimum requirements apply to all departments. For the details of the special requirements of the various
departments see pages 103-110.
Prerequisites:
For a minor at least six units and for a major at least eight units
of courses regularly offered in the Third and Fourth Years.
A standing of at least Second Class must have been obtained in
each course. ' ■
Students who have not fulfilled the requirements outlined above
during their undergraduate course may fulfil them by devoting
more than one academic year's study to the M.A. work.
M.A. Courses:
For a minor five or six units and for a major nine or ten units
(totalling at least fifteen units) chosen from courses regularly
*It should be noted that not all the courses designated as offered primarily for
graduate students, are certain to be given. 104 Faculty of Arts and Science
offered in the Third and Fourth Years, or from graduate or reading
courses.
At least Second Class standing is required in the work of the
major and in the work of the minor.
The thesis shall count from three to six units.
There will be a general examination on the major field.
Examinations may be written or oral or both.
Languages: No candidate shall receive the degree of M.A. who
has not satisfied the head of the department in which he is majoring of his ability to read technical articles either in French or in
German, except a candidate majoring in certain subjects, where a
knowledge of Latin may be accepted in lieu of French or German.
To fulfil the language requirement for the M.A. degree, a candidate who elects a language not taken in his undergraduate work to
conform with Calendar regulations, will be required to have, as a
basis, French 1 or Beginners' German, as the case may be, or the
equivalent of this.
In any case, during the period in which he is preparing for the
degree, he will be required to read articles in the accepted language
so as to make use of them, either in his course work, or in the preparation of his thesis.
No formal examination will be required at the end of the preparatory period.
8. Graduate students who are assistants, giving not more than
four hours a week of tutorial instruction, are permitted to qualify
for the M.A. degree after one regular Winter Session of University
attendance, provided they have done, in the summer vacation,
research work of a nature and extent satisfactory to the head of
the department concerned. Such students must be registered as
graduate students and must have secured the approval of the head
of the department concerned and of the Faculty before entering
upon the research in question. Other graduate students doing
tutorial work will not be allowed to come up for final examination
in less than two academic years after registration as M.A. students.
The following special requirements are prescribed by different
departments.
Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine
Prerequisites:
Minor: A minimum of six units in the Department, among which
Bacteriology, 2 must be included.
Major: Bacteriology 5, and six additional units in the Department. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 105
M.A. Course:
Minor: A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with the
Department.
Major: Thesis, three to six units, and other courses to complete
the required units.
Biology and Botany
Prerequisites:
Minor: Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and
Zoology.
Major: Biology 1, Botany 1 (a), and eight additional units,
including Zoology 1.
M.A. Course:
Minor: A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with the
Department.
Major: Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete
the required units.
Chemistry
Prerequisites:
Minor: Six units of work regularly offered in the Third and
Fourth Years
Major: Honours standing in Chemistry.
M.A. Course:
Minor: At least six units of work regularly offered in the Third
and Fourth Years.
Major: Nine or ten units in advanced courses in Chemistry,
including a thesis.
Economics
Prerequisites :
Minor: A minimum of fifteen units of work in subjects in the
Department, or an equivalent. The fifteen units must
include Economics 4, 8 or 9, and 12.
Major-. Honours in Economics; or in Economics in combination
with some other subject; or an equivalent.
M.A. Course:
Minor: A minimum of six units of work regularly offered in the
Third and Fourth Years.
Major: Nine units of work regularly offered in the Third and
Fourth Years, including a thesis, which will ordinarily
count for three units.
All candidates for the Master's degree in this department must
attend the Honours seminar. 106 Faculty of Arts and Science
Education
Prerequisites:
Minor: Six units (of which at least three must be in Education)
chosen from the following: Education 9, 10, 12, 16, 20 to
39 inclusive; Psychology 4, 9. The Academic Certificate
will be regarded as satisfying these prerequisites.
Major: The Teacher Training Course or its equivalent. The
Academic Certificate will be considered the equivalent
of the Teacher Training Course.
M.A. Course:
Minor: (a) With the consent of the head of the department in
which the candidate is taking his major, the Teacher
Training Course with at least Second Class standing
in Education 9, 10, and 12 will be accepted for
both the prerequisites and the course; or
(b) Six units chosen from Education 9, 10, 12, 16, 20 to
39 inclusive.
Major: Nine units chosen from Education 20 to 39 inclusive
and a thesis (3 units).
Notes. 1. The Teacher Training Course may not be counted as a
minor if Education is taken as the major.
2. With the consent of the Head of the Department graduate
students may substitute Psychology 6, 9, or 20 for one of the
Education courses named above.
English
Prerequisites:
Minor: At least nine units of credit for English courses elective
in the Third and Fourth Years of the undergraduate
curriculum.
Major: At least fifteen units of credit for courses elective in the
Third and Fourth Years.
M.A. Course:
Minor: Six units of credit in advanced courses in English not
already taken.
Major: (a) Twelve units of credit in advanced courses not
already taken, one of which courses must be English
21 (a), or its equivalent, if this has not been previously offered for credit.
(b) A graduating essay which will count as an advanced
course involving three units of credit. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 107
(c) Oral examinations on the history of English literature.
(d) A reading knowledge of either French or German.
A student who effers both languages will be allowed
three units of credit towards the M.A. degree.
French
Prerequisites:
Minor: Six units of work in Third and Fourth Year French.
Major: Twelve units of work in Third and Fourth Year French.
M.A. Course:
Minor: Six units of credit in advanced courses in French not
already chosen for undergraduate credit.
Major: At least nine units of credit for advanced courses, which
must include:
(a) A thesis in French on a subject approved by the
HeM of the Department (3 units) ;
(b) A detailed study of the Mediaeval and Renaissance
authors listed under French 5 (b);
(c) The study of some special subject not related to the
subject matter of the candidate's thesis. For this
purpose candidates are advised to select French 5
(c), History of French Literary Criticism (3 units).
Note. A sound general knowledge of French literary history is
an essential part of a candidate's qualifications for the M.A. degree
in French, and none will be recommended for that degree who has
not satisfied the Department that he possesses it.
It is further desirable that candidates for this degree acquire a
reading knowledge of another foreign language, preferably German.
Geology
Prerequisites:
Minor: Geology 1 and 2, and three or four units from the following: Geology 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, and 11, and Geography 4.
Major: Geology 1, 2, 4, 7, 8, 9, and 10, and one of Geology 6 and
11, Geography 4, and Economics 10.
M.A. Course:
Minor: Six or more units from the following, not already taken
as prerequisites: Geology 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 20, 21,
23, 24, 25, and 26, Geography 4, and Agronomy 15. 108 Faculty of Arts and Science
Major: Three units from Geology 20, 21, 23, 24, 25, and 26, and
three units from courses not already taken; a thesis of at
least three units value, which must be related to the
specialization represented by the graduate course selected.
History
Prerequisites.
Minor: Three courses (nine units) to be chosen from History 10
to 25 inclusive.
Major: Four courses (twelve units) to be chosen from History
10 to 25 inclusive.
M.A. Course:
Minor: Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History 10 to
25 inclusive, or the equivalent in reading courses.
Major: Two related courses (six units) to be chosen from History
10 to 25 inclusive, or the equivalent in reading courses,
and a thesis embodying original work «to which 3 units
of credit are given. All candidates for a major in History who have not already done so must attend the
Honours seminar in historical method, and the M.A.
seminar, History 23, or submit to an examination on a
parallel reading course approved by the Department.
Mathematics
Prerequisites:
Minor: Mathematics 10 and at least two other Honours courses.
Major: Candidates must have completed the Honours course in
Mathematics, or its equivalent.
In advanced work a reading knowledge of French and German
is desirable.
M.A. Course-
Minor -. Six units chosen from the Honours courses and including
Mathematics 16.
Major: Any four of the graduate courses and a thesis.
Philosophy
Prerequisites:
Minor: Six units chosen from Philosophy 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 20.
Major: Psychology 1 or its equivalent, and nine units chosen
from Philosophy 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 20. Students are
i recommended to take, in addition. Psychology 2. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 109
M.A. Course:
Minor: Six units of Philosophy not already taken.
Major: At least six units of Philosophy not already taken, and
a thesis.
Physics
Prerequisites:
Minor: Physics 4 and 5 and at least two more units of work
regularly offered in the Third or Fourth Year.
Major: At least eight units of work regularly offered in the Third
and Fourth Years.
M.A. Course:
Minor: Six units of work in advanced courses in Physics not
already taken.
Major: (a) At least six units of work in the graduate courses.
(b) A thesis.
Political Science
Prerequisites:
Minor: A minimum of fifteen units in the Department (or an
equivalent), including Government 1; or Honours in
Political Science in combination with some other subject.
Major: Honours in Political Science; or in Economics; or in
Economics in combination with some other subject; or
an equivalent.
M.A. Course-
Minor: A minimum of six units of work regularly offered in the
Third and Fourth Years.
Major: Nine units of work regularly offered in the Third and
Fourth Years, including a thesis, which will ordinarily
count for three units.
All candidates for the Master's degree in this department must
attend the Honours seminar.
Psychology
Prerequisites:
Minor: Six units chosen from Psychology 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 20.
Major: Philosophy 1 and 8, and nine units chosen from Psychology 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 20. Students are recommended
to take as additional preparation Biology 1, Mathematics
2, and Physics A or 1. 110 Faculty of Arts and Science
M.A. Course:
Minor: Six units of Psychology not already taken.
Major: At least six units of Psychology not already taken, and
a thesis.
With the consent of the Head of the Department, graduate
students may substitute three units chosen from Education 21, 28,
30, 31, 33 for three units of Psychology.
Sociology
(Minor only)
Prerequisites:
Minor: A minimum of fifteen units of work regularly offered in
the Department of Economics, Political Science, and
Sociology.
Major: Honours in Sociology, or in Sociology in combination
with some other subject; or an equivalent.
M. A. Course:
Minor: A minimum of six units of work regularly offered in
Sociology. S^
Major: Nine units of work regularly offered in Sociology in the
Third and Fourth Years, including a thesis, which will
ordinarily count for three units.
All candidates for the Master's degree in this department must
attend the Honours seminar.
Zoology
Prerequisites:
Minor: Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and
Zoology.
Major: Biology 1, Zoology 1, and eight additional units, including Botany 1 (a).
M.A. Course:
Minor: A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with the
Department.
Major: Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete
the required number of units. Teacher Training Course 111
TEACHER TRAINING COURSE
Candidates qualifying for the Academic A Certificate (given
by the Provincial Department of Education, Victoria, on the completion of the Teacher Training Course) take the courses prescribed
in section 4 of page 154.
Applications for admission, on forms to be obtained from the
Registrar's office, should be made to the Registrar on or before
August 15th.
1. Registration.
Documentary evidence of graduation in Arts and Science, Home
Economics, Applied Science, or Agriculture from a recognized
university must be submitted to the Registrar by all candidates
other than graduates of the University of British Columbia. All
correspondence in connection with the Teacher Training Course
should be addressed to the Registrar.
2. Certificates and Standing.
At the close of the University session successful candidates in the
Teacher training Course will be recommended to the Faculty of
Arts and Science for the University Diploma in Education and to
the Provincial Department of Education for the Academic A
Certificate. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First
Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80
per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
All students registered in the Teacher Training Course at the
University are entitled to the privileges accorded to students in the
various faculties, and are also subject to the regulations of the
University regarding discipline and attendance at lectures.
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher Training
Course, First or Second Class standing in each of Education 9, 10,
and 12 is accepted as equivalent to a minor for an M.A. degree,
subject in each case to the consent of the head of the department in
which the student wishes to take his major.
3. Preparatory Courses.
Students who intend to proceed to the Teacher Training Course
are required to take Psychology 1 as prerequisite to Educational
Psychology, and must have fulfilled one of the following:
(a) They must have obtained at least nine units of credit in
the academic courses normally offered in the Third and
Fourth Years in each of at least two of the following subjects: Biology (including Botany and Zoology), Chemistry, 112 Faculty of Arts and Science
English, French, Geography, German, History, Latin (including Greek), Mathematics, Physics. Equivalent courses
in the Faculty of Applied Science may be offered. Candidates offering History may substitute six units of Economics
for three units of History, subject to the approval of their
courses by the heads of the departments of History and
Economics.
(b) They must have completed an Honours course in any one
or two of the subjects listed above;
(c) They must have completed the Course for High School
Teachers of Science;
(d) They must have obtained at least twelve units of credit in
Agriculture in addition to Agriculture 1, and at least nine
units of credit in any one of the following subjects: Chemistry, Physics, or Biology (including Botany and Zoology),
in addition to Chemistry 1, Physics 1, and Biology 1.
Furthermore, students planning to enter the Teacher Training Course through Agriculture are required to select
undergraduate courses in such a way that, in addition to
English 1 and either 2, or 3 and 4, they will have obtained
either six units of credit in one, or three units of credit in
each of two, of the following: English, Mathematics, the
language offered for University Entrance, Social Sciences
(History, Economics, Political Science, and Sociology) ;
(e) They must have obtained a degree in Home Economics from
a recognized university.
A description of the courses offered is given under the Department of Education.
Course for High School Teachers of Science
The following course has been designed especially for high
school teachers of science:
First and Second Years: Units
1. English 1 and 2. 6
2. Language 1 and 2. 6
3. Mathematics 1 and 2. 6
4. Biology 1, Chemistry 1, and Physics 1. 9
5. A second course in one of the sciences named in 4. 3
30 Teacher Training Course 113
Third and Fourth Years:
6. Three courses in the science taken under 5. 9
7. One course in each of the sciences named in 4 and not
taken under 5 and 6, to be followed by a general course
in each of these two sciences, namely, two of Biology 4,
Chemistry 3 or 4, and Physics 3. 12
8. Psychology A or 1. 3
9. Two electives from Third and Fourth Year subjects. 6
30
Total 60
Thus candidates will be admitted to the Teacher Training Course
who have (a) completed the course for high school teachers of
science, or (b) obtained Honours in Biology, Chemistry, or Physics,
or (c) obtained credit in nine units of Third and Fourth Year
courses in any two of these sciences. But candidates who choose
one of the last two alternatives are advised to take at least one
course in each of the three sciences mentioned.
Course for High School Teachers of Health
Students who are preparing to teach Health are recommended
to take the Course for High School Teachers of Science and to select
as the options under 9, Bacteriology 1 and 2. (Regulation 3,
page 86, will be waived for this purpose.) They should also take
Nursing 16 in their Teacher Training Course.
Course for High School Teachers of
Physical Education
Students who wish to prepare for teaching Physical Education
should take in their undergraduate years a minimum programme
of five courses in Physical Education, three of which should be
selected as follows:
Men: (a) Tumbling and Apparatus;
(b) Physical Education Activities (Boxing, Wrestling,
etc.) ;
(c) Games.
Women: (a) Gymnastics and Tumbling;
(b) Rhythmics and Dancing;
(c) Games.
The remaining two courses should consist of an advanced course
in each of two of the above fields. 114 Faculty of Arts and Science
Each course is organized on the basis of two hours a week per
term. No academic credit towards a degree is assigned to these
courses, and they must be taken in addition to the regular work of
the year.
PROFESSIONAL COURSE IN SOCIAL WORK
Requirements for Entrance
The courses in Social Work are professional and technical in
nature and are designed for those students who have a bachelor's
degree or the equivalent. In addition, on the basis of recommendations and a personal interview, the admissions committee must be
satisfied that the applicant is personally suited to the field of
social work. The Diploma in Social Work will be granted upon the
completion of fifteen units of class work and a minimum of six
hundred hours of supervised field work. Each student must submit
also an acceptable original study done in conjunction with courses
in social research and field work.
Special Course
Because the present need of social agencies for personnel is so
great, certain mature persons who lack the necessary academic
entrance requirements but who have shown an aptitude for social
work and who have completed at least University Entrance will be
admitted to a special eight months' course. This course will be
flexible in requirements, but a definite plan will be outlined over
the year to meet the needs of the individual student. Those who
finish this shorter course and who subsequently complete the work
for the Bachelor's degree will be given credit toward the Diploma.
The special course will not be continued after the present emergency
has passed but may be set up later for returned service men and
women.
Length of Courses
The normal time for the completion of requirements for the
Diploma is twelve months. A few part-time students will be
admitted to either the Diploma or the Special Course who will plan
to meet requirements over a longer period of time.
Pre-Professional Curriculum
Undergraduate students who look forward to entering the Professional Course in Social Work are strongly advised to come
prepared with an adequate background in the social sciences. Courses in Social Work 115
Courses in Biology and Psychology, in addition to Economics, Government, Sociology, and History, are to be emphasized, and special
attention is called to Economics 3, Labour Problems; Economics 5,
Government Finance; Economics 12, Statistics; Sociology 4, Social
Problems and Social Policy; Sociology 6, Introduction to Social
Work; History 17, World Economic History.
Fees
The total fee for the Social Work course is $150. This full fee
for the Winter Session will cover the work of Diploma students in
the Summer Session as well.
Date of Application
Applications for admission to the Professional Course in Social
Work should be in the hands of the Director not later than July 1
for the following year.
Field Work Training
Actual practical work under supervision is made possible for the
students through the following agencies in Vancouver and Victoria:
Children's Aid Society of Vancouver; Catholic Children's Aid
Society; Child Welfare Branch, Department of the Provincial
Secretary; Provincial Psychiatric Services; Division of T.B. Control ; Family Welfare Bureau; Social Service Department, City of
Vancouver; Young Women's Christian Association; Victoria Children 's Aid Society; Victoria Family Welfare Association; Canadian
Institute for the Blind.
Ordinarily a student will spend fifteen hours a week during the
regular session in one social agency and thirty hours a week for
ten or twelve weeks during the intersession and summer in a second
agency. In some instances a student may do all of his practice
work in one agency.
PRE-MEDICAL COURSES
Candidates who plan to enter Medicine at other universities can,
in certain eases, be exempted from one year of their course in
Medicine by spending two years at the University of British
Columbia and selecting their courses properly. The following outline for the First and Second Years will fulfil the minimum requirements for admission to most of the Canadian medical schools.
First Year:
English 1, Modern Language 1, Mathematics 1, Physics 1, Chemistry 1, Zoology 1. 18 units. 116 Faculty of Arts and Science
Second Year:
English 2, Physics 2, Chemistry 2, Zoology 2; and an elective,
preferably Chemistry 3. 15 units.
As most of the Canadian medical schools are overcrowded and
as each school gives preference to applicants from the province in
which the school is situated, applicants from British Columbia have
no assurance that they will be accepted for medical courses even
when they have fulfilled the minimum requirements for admission.
They are therefore strongly advised to complete the work for their
B.A. degree before seeking admission to a medical school. Some
medical schools wish the course for the B.A. degree to be as broad
as possible so as to include several courses in the humanities, while
others prefer Honours courses in the sciences.
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students, are
held in April. Examinations in December are obligatory in all First
and Second Year courses, and in all Third and Fourth Year courses
except where exemption has been granted by Faculty. Applications
for special consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction
must be submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the
close of the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea
for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented on the appropriate form which may be obtained from the
Dean's office.
2. The passing mark is 50 per cent, in each subject. In any
course which involves both laboratory work and written examinations, students may be debarred from examinations if they fail to
present satisfactory results in laboratory work, and they will be
required to pass in both parts of the course.
3. Successful candidates taking at least fifteen units of work will
be graded as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or
over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
4. A supplemental will be granted in a subject which a candidate
has taken during the year, provided he has written the final examination and has obtained a mark of not less than 30 per cent. A
candidate, however, will not be granted in any one year supplementals in more than six units.
5. A request for the re-reading of an answer paper must be
forwarded to the Registrar WITHIN FOUR WEEKS after the
results of the examinations are announced. Each applicant must
state clearly his reasons for making such a request in view of the Examinations and Advancement 117
fact that the paper of a candidate who makes less than a passing
mark in a subject is read at least a second time before results are
tabulated and announced. A re-reading of an examination paper
will be granted only with the consent of the head of the department
concerned. The fee for re-reading a paper is $2.00.
6. Supplemental examinations will be held in September in
respect of Winter Session examinations, and in June or July in
respect of Summer Session examinations. In the Teacher Training
Course, supplemental examinations will be held not earlier than
the third week in June.
In the first three years a candidate who has been granted a supplemental may try the supplemental only once. If he fails in the
supplemental, he must either repeat his attendance in the course or
substitute an alternative chosen in accordance with Calendar regulations. In the case of Fourth Year students two supplemental
examinations in respect of the same course will be allowed.
A candidate with a failure or a supplemental examination outstanding in any subject which is on the Summer Session curriculum
may clear his record by attending the Summer Session course in
the subject and passing the required examinations.
7. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by
the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees), must be in the hands of
the Registrar by August 15th.
8. No student may enter a higher year with standing defective
in respect of more than 3 units. (See regulations in regard to
advancement to Third Year Commerce, page 98, and in reference
to admission to Second Year Applied Science, page 85, note under
section 8.)
No student who has failures or supplementals outstanding in
more than 3 units, or who has any failure or supplemental outstanding for more than a year of registered attendance, will be allowed
to register for more than 15 units of work, these units to include
either the subject (or subjects) in which he is conditioned or permissible substitutes. But a student in the Fourth Year will be
permitted to register for 15 units of work in the Fourth Year, even
though he may have failures or supplementals outstanding against
him, providing that these failures or supplementals do not carry
more than three units of credit and that they do not involve the
repetition of a course. Such a student will not be permitted to
complete his examinations until September.
9. A student may not continue in a later year any subject in
which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from an 118 Faculty of Arts and Science
earlier year, except in the case of compulsory subjects in the
Second Year.
10. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year may,
upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate
to withdraw from the University.
11. Any student whose academic record, as determined by the
tests and examinations of the first term of the First or Second Year,
is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the recommendation of the
Faculty, be required by the Senate to discontinue attendance at the
University for the remainder of the session. Such a student will not
be readmitted to the University as long as any supplemental
examinations are outstanding.
12. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a passing
mark if they are deficient in English; and, in this event, students
will be required to pass a special examination in English to be set
by the Department of English.
DEPARTMENTS IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
Department of Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine
Professor and Head of the Department: C E. Dolman.
Associate Professor: D. C. B. Duff.
Assistant Professor: Lawrence E. Ranta.
Instructor:
1. Introductory Bacteriology.—A course consisting of lectures,
demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The history of bacteriology, the place of bacteria in nature, the
classification of bacterial forms, methods of culture and isolation,
the relation of bacteria to agriculture, to industrial processes, to
household and veterinary science, and to public health and
sanitation.
References: Henrici, Biology of Bacteria, latest edition, Heath;
Salle, Fundamental Principles of Bacteriology, latest edition,
McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and Biology 1, the latter of which
may be taken concurrently.
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday.
Laboratory: Section 1,10.30-12.30 Tuesday, 9.30-11.30 Thursday;
Section 2, 1.30-3.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
2. Immunology.—A course consisting of lectures, demonstrations,
and laboratory work. Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine 119
The protective reactions of the animal body against pathogenic
micro-organisms; cellular and humoral immunity. The course will
include demonstrations of immunity, and of various diagnostic
methods used in public health laboratories.
Reference: Topley & Wilson, Principles of Bacteriology and
Immunity, latest edition, Wood.
Prerequisite: Bacteriology 1.
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
. Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Friday.
Laboratory: 3.30-5.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
3. Bacteriology in Relation to Health and Disease.—A special
course for Combined Course Nursing students only, consisting of
lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work.
Methods of isolation, culture, and identification of pathogenic
micro-organisms; aseptic technique; disinfection and antisepsis;
infection and resistance; active immunization procedures; bacteriology in relation to public health.
References: Henrici, Biology of Bacteria, latest edition, Heath;
Bigger, Handbook of Bacteriology, latest edition, Williams and
Wilkins.
Prerequisites: As for Bacteriology 1.
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 2.30-3.30, Monday.
Laboratory: 3.30-5.30, Monday and 2.30-4.30, Friday.
4. (a) Dairy Bacteriology.— (This course is the same as Dairying
4 (a), and is given by the Department of Dairying.)
Prerequisite: Bacteriology 1.
Four hours a week. First Term. iy2 units.
4. (b) Dairy Bacteriology.— (This course is the same as Dairying
4 (b), and is given by the Department of Dairying.)
Prerequisite: Bacteriology 1.
Four hours a week. Second Term. IV2 units.
5. Advanced Bacteriology and Immunology.—A course of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work on the antigenic structure of bacteria; serological reactions; theories of susceptibility and
immunity; sensitization; preparation and assay of bacterial toxins,
toxoids, and antitoxins.
References: Zinnser, Enders, and Fothergill, Immunity, 1940,
Macmillan; Marrack, Medical Research Council Special Report
No. 230, latest edition, H. M. Stationery Office. 120 Faculty of Arts and Science
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1 and 2, with at least Second Class
standing in both courses.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 9.30-11.30, Monday.
This course must be taken by all students working for nine or
more units credit in the Department.
6. Soil Bacteriology.—(This course is the same as Agronomy 12,
and is given by the Department of Agronomy.)
Prerequisite: Bacteriology 1.
Five hours a week. 3 units.
7. Advanced Dairy Bacteriology.—(This course is the same as
Dairying 7, and is given by the Department of Dairying.)
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1 and 4 (a).
One lecture and two laboratories per week. 3 units.
8. Reading Course in Bacteriology.—A directed reading course
in some advanced problem within the scope of bacteriology and
preventive medicine. No class instruction will be given, but regular
meetings will be held for critical discussion, and there will be an
examination, either written or oral. 3 units.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1 and 2; also one of Bacteriology
5, 9, or 10, with which this course may run concurrently.
9. Microbiological Physiology.—Lectures and laboratory work on
the physiology of bacteria, yeasts, and moulds, and their application to medical, sanitation, and industrial problems; study of
growth phases, growth rates, and rates of metabolic activity under
defined conditions; use of mathematical methods in planning investigations, and in expressing and evaluating results.
Reference: Stephenson, Bacterial Metabolism, latest edition,
Longmans.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1 and 2 with at least Second Class
standing in both courses; also Bacteriology 5, which may be taken
concurrently.
Four hours a week. First Term. 1% units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Wednesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 8.30-10.30, Friday.
10: Pathology of Infection.—A course of lectures, laboratory
work, and demonstrations. Stages in the development of infections
in the animal body, illustrated by post-mortem specimens, and by Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine 121
microscopic sections; modes of conveyance of communicable infections, considered in relation to the prevention of disease; the
history, techniques, and objectives of preventive medicine.
References: MacCallum, A Text-book of Pathology, 1936, Saunders; Gay, Agents of Disease and Host Resistance, 1935, Thomas;
Rosenau, Preventive Medicine and Hygiene, latest edition, Appleton-
Century.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1 and 2 with at least Second Class
standing in both courses; also Bacteriology 5, which may be taken
concurrently.
Four hours a week. Second Term. 1-Vfc units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Wednesday.
Laboratory: 2.30-5.30, Wednesday.
11. Methodology of Bacteriological Research.—A course of lectures, seminars, and discussion periods designed to equip the
student preparing for Honours in the Department with a critical
appreciation of historic reports and current literature in the field
of bacteriology and preventive medicine; the technique of planning
experiments for a given research problem; the design of protocols,
and the general presentation of results.
This course may be taken in their Third Year by prospective
Honours course students after consultation with the Head of the
Department.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1 with at least Second Class standing, and Bacteriology 2, with which this course may be taken
concurrently. 3 units.
Department of Biology and Botany
Professor and Head of the Department: A. H. Hutchinson.
Professor: Frank Dickson.
Associate Professor: John Davidson.
Associate Professor: John Allardyce.
Instructor: Miss Ruth E. Fields.
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to more
advanced work in General Biology, Botany, or Zoology; also to
courses closely related to biological science, such as Agriculture,
Forestry, Medicine.
The fundamental principles of biology; the interrelations of
plants and of animals; life processes; the cell and division of
labour; life-histories; relation to environment; dynamic biology. 122 Faculty of Arts and Science
The course is prerequisite to all courses in General Biology,
Botany, and Zoology.
A list of reference books is supplied.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: Section A, 9.30-10.30, Monday and Wednesday;
Section B, 10.30-11.30, Monday and Wednesday;
Laboratory: Section 1, 1.30-3.30, Tuesday;
Section 2, 3.30-5.30, Tuesday;
Section 3, 1.30-3.30, Thursday;
Section 4, 3.30-5.30, Thursday;
Section 5, 1.30-3.30, Friday;
Section 6, 3.30-5.30, Friday.
2. (a) Principles of Genetics.—The fundamentals of genetics;
Mendel's Law, applications and modifications; the physical basis
of heredity: variations; mutations, natural and induced; the
nature of the gene.
Text-book: Sinnott and Dunn, Principles of Genetics, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 8.30-10.30, Friday, and one hour to be arranged.
2. (b) Principles of Genetics.—A continuation of the studies of
genetic principles with suggested applications. A lecture and laboratory course. The laboratory work will consist of problems,
examination of illustrative material, and experiments with
Drosophila.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 (a).
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Friday.
Laboratory: 8.30-10.30, Monday and Wednesday.
2. (c) Problems in Genetics. — An introduction to genetical
methods and investigations. Students interested in plant breeding
may elect Agronomy 50 (b) as an equivalent of this course.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 (a) and 2 (b).
Three hours a week. 3 units. Biology and Botany , 123
2. (d) Seminar in Genetics.—A review of advanced phases and
the more recent developments in genetics.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 (a) and 2 (b).
Three hours a week. 3 units.
3. General Physiology.—A study of animal and plant life processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth Years having prerequisite Biology, Chemistry, and Physics; the Department should
be consulted.
Text-book: Mitchell, General Physiology, McGraw-Hill; or Bay-
liss, Principles of General Physiology, Longmans.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Reference reading. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 2.30-5.30, Friday.
4. General Biology.—A course primarily for students who intend
to teach science in the high schools. (See Teacher Training Course.)
A review of the modern approaches to the morphology, histology,
physiology, and ecology of animals and plants, with applications
to man.
A list of reference books is supplied.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 3.30-5.30, Thursday.
5. Basic Physiology.—This course is designed primarily for
students in Home Economics and in the Teacher's Science option.
It may be elected also by students taking a major in biological
subjects, and not proceeding to Honours in this field.
This course deals with the physiology of digestion and absorption
of foods; the liberation and utilization of energy; and the control of
the equilibria of life processes.
Prerequisites: Biology 1, Chemistry 1. The Department should
be consulted further.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 3.30-5.30, Monday. 124 Faculty of Arts and Science
Botany
1. (a) General Botany.—A course including a general survey of
the several fields of botany and introductory to more specialized
courses in botany.
This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany, except
the Evening Course and Botany 1 (b). Partial credit (2 units)
toward Botany 1 (a) may be obtained through the Evening Course.
Text-book: Hill, Overholtz, Popp, Botany, McGraw-Hill; or
Holman and Robbins, General Botany, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 3.30-5.30, Monday.
1. (b) General Forest Botany (General Dendrology).—An introductory course open only to Forestry students, and including
the study of tree characteristics, identification, structure, nutrition,
and ecology.
This course is the first of a series of courses, optional for students
in Economics, Commerce, and Engineering, proceeding to a
Forestry degree; these courses are prerequisite to the Fifth Year
in Forestry.
Reference readings are assigned.
Biology 1 is recommended as a preceding course.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory. 3.30-5.30, Thursday.
1. (c) General Forestry.—As in Applied Science.
2. (a) Morphology.—A comparative study of plant structures;
the relation of plant groups; comparative life histories. Emphasis
is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant structures, from
the lower to the higher forms, involving a progressive differentiation accompanied by an interdependence of parts.
Prerequisite: Botany 1 (a).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First Term.
2 units.
2. (b) The Algae.—A course dealing with the morphology, taxonomy, and specific physiology of the Algae, with a discussion of
evolution within the group; practical acquaintance with the fresh
water and marine forms, their identification and habitats; collection and preservation of specimens. Biology and Botany 125
References: Smith, Freshwater Algae of the United States, McGraw-Hill ; Fritsch, The Structure and Reproduction of the Algae,
Vol. I, Macmillan; Tilden, The Algae and Their Life Relations,
University of Minnesota.
Prerequisite: Botany 1 (a).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
2 units.
3. Plant Physiology.
(a) A course dealing with the fundamental life processes in
plants, such as nutrition, photosynthesis, absorption, respiration,
transpiration, and growth. This course is prerequisite for Botany
3 (b) and 3 (c).
Text-book: Raber, Principles of Plant Physiology, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Botany 1 (a).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First Term.
2 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 1.30-3.30, Monday and Wednesday.
(b) This course comprises a more advanced study of the organic
constituents of plants and the physiological changes occurring
during plant growth. (This course is identical with Horticulture
41.)
Prerequisite: Botany 3 (a).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First Term.
2 units.
(c) An advanced course to supplement 3 (a) and designed to
train students of the plant sciences in an understanding of the
interrelation of plants and soils. (This course is identical with
Horticulture 42.)
Prerequisite: Botany 3 (a).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
2 units.
4. Histology.—A study of the structure and development of
plants and of methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning,
staining, and mounting; drawing, reconstruction; use of microscope,
camera lucida, and photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-books: Eames and McDaniels, Introduction to Plant Anatomy, McGraw-Hill; Chamberlain, Methods in Plant Histology,
University of Chicago.
Prerequisite: Botany 1 (a).
Seven hours a week. Second Term. 2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday.
Laboratory: 1.30-4.30, Monday and Wednesday. 126 Faculty of Arts and Science
5. Systematic Botany.
(a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of
plants through a study of selected families of economic plants of
British Columbia; plants useful for food, fodder, medicine, and
industrial arts; plants harmful to crops and stock; weeds and
poisonous plants; methods of control.
Text-books: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, University
of California; Thompson & Sifton, Poisonous Plants and Weed
Seeds, University of Toronto; Hill, Economic Botany, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite: Botany 1 (a).
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 1.30-3.30, Monday.
(b) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of Canada, the
common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of the
United States which are not native to Canada; emphasis on the
species of economic importance; identification, distribution, relative
importance, construction of keys.
Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada, Dominion
Forestry Branch, Ottawa; Sudworth, Forest Trees of the Pacific
Slope, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C.; Davidson
and Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew, Allen and Unwin;
Trelease, The Woody Plants, Urbana.
Prerequisite: Botany 1 (a).
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory or
field work a week. 2 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Friday.
Laboratory: 9.30-12.30, Saturday.
(c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—An advanced course dealing with
the collection, preparation, and classification of "flowering plants";
methods of field, herbarium, and laboratory work; plant description,
the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species;
systems of classification; nomenclature.
Text-books: Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany, Wiley;
Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage.
Prerequisite: Botany 5 (a).
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday.
Laboratory: 1.30-3.30, Monday and Wednesday. Biology and Botany 127
6. (b) Forest Pathology.—Nature, identification, and control of
the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant parasites
of the forest.
Text-book: Hubert, An Outline of Forest Pathology, Wiley.
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
1 unit.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Wednesday.
Laboratory: 10.30-12.30, Thursday.
6. (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary).—A course dealing with
basic concepts of plant disease and plant disease control. A number
of economically important plant diseases are studied in detail.
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Botany 1 (a).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
2 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 1.30-3.30, Monday and Wednesday.
6. (d) Plant Pathology (Advanced). — A course designed for
Honours or graduate students. Technique, isolation, and culture
work; inoculations; details concerning the various stages in the
progress of plant diseases; a detailed study of control measures.
Prerequisite: Botany 6 (c).
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday.
Laboratory: 8.30-12.30, Friday.
6. (e) Mycology.—A course designed to_ give the student a general knowledge of the fungi from a taxonomic point of view.
Text-book: Stevens, Plant Disease Fungi, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Botany 1 (a).
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. Credit will be
given for a collection of fungi made during the summer preceding
the course. 3 units.
Lectures': 8.30-9.30, Monday.
Laboratory: 1.30-5.30, Tuesday.
6. (f) History of Plant Pathology.—A lecture course dealing
with the history of the science of plant pathology from ancient
times to the present.
Text-book: Whetzel, An Outline of the History of Phytopathology, Saunders.
Prerequisite: Botany 6 (c).
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Friday. 1 unit. 128 Faculty of Arts and Science
7. Plant Ecology.
(a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The interrelations of forest
trees and their environment; the ecological characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions; physiography.
References: Tourney and Korstian, Foundations of Silviculture
upon an Ecological Basis, 2nd edition, Wiley; Weaver and Clements,
Plant Ecology, McGraw-Hill; Whitford and Craig, Forests of
British Columbia, Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forests of the
World, McGraw-Hill; Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford.
Prerequisite: Botany 1 (a).
Two lectures and one period of field and practical work a week.
Field trips. First Term. 2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 3.30-5.30, Monday.
(b) A seminar and problem course in more advanced forest
ecology.
Prerequisite: Botany 7 (a).
Five hours a week. First Term. 2 units.
Evening and Short Courses in Botany
A course in general botany, comprising approximately fifty
lectures, is open to all interested in the study of plant life of the
Province. No entrance examination and no previous knowledge of
the subject is required.
The course is designed to assist teachers, gardeners, foresters,
and other lovers of outdoor life in the Province. As far as possible,
illustrative material will be selected from the flora of British
Columbia.
The classes meet every Tuesday evening during the University
session (September-May) from 7.30 to 9.30 p.m. Field or laboratory work, under direction, is regarded as a regular part of the
course.
No examination is required except in the case of University
students desiring credit for this course. Biology 1 is a prerequisite
for such students. This course may be substituted for the lecture
part of Botany 1 (a); but credit is not given until the laboratory
work is complete.
Students who do not desire credit but wish to ascertain their
standing in the class may apply for a written test.
A detailed statement of requirements and of work covered in this
course is issued as a separate circular. Copies may be obtained
on request. Chemistry 129
Department of Chemistry
Professor and Head of the Department: R. H. Clark,
Professor: W. F. Seyer.
Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Associate Professor: William Ure.
Associate Professor: J. Allen Harris.
Assistant Professor: J. Gilbert Hooley.
Lecturer: Lionel A. Cox.
A. General Survey of Chemistry.—This course will give a general
survey of the field of chemistry for students not intending to specialize in any of the sciences. Laboratory experiments designed to
give an insight into scientific methods will be performed.
This course will not be accepted as fulfilling the prerequisite for
Chemistry 2, or any subsequent Chemistry course.
Reference: Deming, Fundamental Chemistry, Wiley.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
1. General Chemistry.—The course comprises a general survey
of the whole field of chemistry and is designed on the one hand to
provide a thorough groundwork for further study in the sciences
and on the other to give an insight into the methods of chemical
investigation, the fundamental theories, and some important applications such as are suitable to the needs of a cultural education.
Students must reach the required standard in both lecture and
laboratory work.
Text-books: Richardson and Scarlett, General College Chemistry,
Holt. For the laboratory: Harris and Ure, Experimental Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-Hill.
Three lectures and two and one-half hours laboratory a week.
3 units.
Lectures: Section 1, 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday
Section 2, 1.30- 2.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday
Section 3, 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday
Section 4, 2.30- 3.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday.
Laboratory: 3.30-6, Monday, Tuesday, Thursday, or Friday.
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—A study of the chemical reactions
of the common metallic and acid radicals, together with the theoretical considerations involved in these reactions.
Text-book: Noyes and Swift, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
References: Hammett, Solutions of Electrolytes, McGraw-Hill;
Engelder, Calculations of Qualitative Analysis, Wiley. ISO Faculty of Arts and Science
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. First Term.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more important methods of volumetric and gravimetric analysis.
Text-book: Willard and Furman, Quantitative Analysis, Van
Nostrand, or Pierce and Haenisch, Quantitative Analysis, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
3 units.
Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a).
Lectures: Section 1: 9.30-10.30, Friday; Section 2: 3.30-4.30,
Friday.
Laboratory: 8.30-11.30, Tuesday and Thursday; 2.30-5.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
B. General Chemistry for Teachers.—This course is intended
only for those students who plan to teach science in high school.
The course will consist of a more advanced study of general chemistry than Chemistry 1, with special emphasis upon topics in the
high school curriculum. The laboratory work will include experiments suitable for high school demonstration purposes.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and 2.
Note. Students may substitute Chemistry 3 and 4 for this course.
Text-book: Partington, Inorganic Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
C. Organic Chemistry.—A study of carbon compounds with
especial emphasis upon the compounds to be dealt with later in
courses on food-stuffs, nutrition, and textile fibres.
Open only to students taking Home Economics.
Text-book: Lowy-Harrow, An Introduction to Organic Chemistry, Wiley.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
D. Biochemistry.—This course will be open to students in Home
Economics only, and will deal with the chemistry of digestion,
absorption, and the fate of foodstuffs in the body.
Prerequisite: Chemistry C.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 1.30-4.30, Monday. Chemistry 131
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of the
compounds of carbon will include the methods of preparation and
a description of the more important groups of compounds in both
the aliphatic and the aromatic series.
Chemistry 3 will be given only to those students taking Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2.
References: Conant, The Chemistry of Organic Compounds,
Macmillan; Desha, Organic Chemistry, McGraw-Hill; Lucas,
Organic Chemistry, American Book Co.; Richter, Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman-Wielands, Laboratory Methods of Organic
Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 1.30-6, Thursday or Friday.
4. (a) Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course in the
development of modern theoretical chemistry, including a study
of gases, liquids, and solids, solutions, ionization and electrical
conductivity, chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions, thermochemistry and thermodynamics, colloids.
Text-book: Gucker and Meldrum, Physical Chemistry, American
Book Company.
References: Millard, Physical Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-
Hill; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles, Macmillan.
Laboratory text-books: Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on
Physico-Chemical Principles, Macmillan; Handbook of Chemistry
and Physics, Chemical Rubber Company, Cleveland.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 (except for students taking Honours
in Physics) and Mathematics 2. Honours students majoring in
Chemistry should take Mathematics 10 concurrently.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 1.30-5, Tuesday or Friday.
4. (b) This course is the same as Chemistry 4 (a) with the
omission of the laboratory, and is open only to students not taking
Honours in Chemistry. 2 units.
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this course will include
the detection and separation of the less common metals, particularly
those that are important industrially. 132 Faculty of Arts and Science
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week.
Reference: Noyes and Bray, Qualitative Analysis of the Rarer
Elements, Macmillan.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks as well
as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles on which
analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute consideration than is possible in the elementary course.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday.
Laboratory: 1.30-4.30, Tuesday; 8.30-11.30, Friday.
6. Introduction to Chemical Engineering. — As in Applied
Science.
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation of Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory of gases, properties of liquids and solids, elementary thermodynamics and thermochemistry, properties of solutions, theoretical electrochemistry,
chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions, radioactivity.
Text-book: Glasstone, A Text-Book of Physical Chemistry, Van
Nostrand. Reference: Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3, and 4; Mathematics 10, which
may be taken concurrently.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 1.30-5, Monday.
8. Electrochemistry.—(a) As in Applied Science.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
(b) As in Applied Science.
9. Advanced Organic Chemistry.—(a) The lectures will deal with
some of the more complex carbon compounds, such as the carbohydrates and their stereochemical configurations, fats, proteins,
purine derivatives, alkaloids, and enzyme action.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
(b) The various types of organic reactions, with certain theoretical conceptions, will be presented. The terpenes, various commercial Chemistry 133
plastics, including the synthetic rubbers, synthetic textile fibres,
and synthetic protective and decorative coatings, will be considered.
Reference: Gilman, Organic Chemistry, Wiley.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 1.30-6, Tuesday.
10. History of Chemistry.—A general survey of the development
of chemical knowledge from the earliest times up to the present
day, with particular emphasis on chemical theory.
References: Moore, History of Chemistry, McGraw-Hill; Campbell-Brown, History of Chemistry, Blakiston; Partington, A Short
History of Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two hours a week. Second Term. 1 unit.
Primarily for Graduate Students
11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—Stereochemical theories will
be discussed in greater detail than in Chemistry 9, and chemical and
physico-chemical methods employed in determining the constitution
of organic compounds will be studied. The electronic conception of
valency as applied to organic compounds will be considered, and an
outline of the work done in electro-organic chemistry will be given.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 7 and 9.
One hour a week. 1 unit.
(May be given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—A consideration of the principles which
underlie the behaviour of disperse systems and reactions at
surfaces, including electro-capillary phenomena, preparation of
colloids, Brownian movement, surface tension, adsorption, emulsions, membrane equilibria, and gels.
References: Thomas, Colloid Chemistry, McGraw-Hill; Sved-
berg, Colloid Chemistry, Chemical Catalog Co.; Weiser, Colloidal
Chemistry, Wiley.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4.
Two hours a week. First Term. 1 unit.
17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—Study of first, second, and third
laws; derivation of fundamental equations and their application
to the gas laws, chemical equilibrium, theory of solutions, electrochemistry, and capillarity. 134 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text-books: Steiner, Introduction to Chemical Thermodynamics,
McGraw-Hill; Lewis & Randall, Principles of Thermodynamics,
McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 7.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—The properties of the
elements are considered in relation to the periodic table and atomic
structure. The course includes a study of the rarer elements.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 4.
Two lectures a week. First Term. 1 unit.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
19. Biochemistry.—This course will deal with such topics as
some special applications of colloid chemistry to biology, the determination of hydrogen-ion concentration, the chemical and physical
processes involved in the digestion, absorption, and assimilation of
foodstuffs in the animal body, the intermediate and ultimate
products of metabolism, and nutrition.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 9 (a). Chemistry 9 (a) and 19
may, on permission, be taken conjointly.
Two lectures a week. Second Term. 1 unit.
One afternoon laboratory may be offered. 1 unit.
20. Methods in Teaching High School Chemistry.—This course
is offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training Course
and does not carry undergraduate credit.
References: Black and Conant, Practical Chemistry, Macmillan;
Smith's College Chemistry, revised by Kendall, 1935, Appleton-
Century.
Two lectures a week. Second Term.
21. Chemical Kinetics.—The fundamentals of statistical mechanics with applications to the theory of interionic attraction,
molecular collisions, specific heat, entropy, and rates of thermal
and photochemical reactions.
Reference: Tolman, Statistical Mechanics with Applications to
Physics and Chemistry, Chemical Catalog Co.
Two lectures a week. Second Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
22. Surface Chemistry.—Thermodynamics of surfaces, adsorption equations, heats of adsorption, theory of combustion, clean-up Chemistry 135
of gases in vacuum tubes, reactions on hot filaments, theory of
contact catalysis, industrial uses of adsorption phenomena. .
Text-book: Gregg, The Adsorption of Gases by Solids, Methuen.
References: McBain, The Sorption of Gases by Solids, Rout-
ledge; Adam, The Physics and Chemistry of Surfaces, Oxford;
Rideal, Surface Cheimistry, Cambridge.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 7.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
25. The Chemistry of Munitions.—This course, which replaces
Chemistry 10 for the duration of the war, is open to any student
who has taken or is taking Chemistry 9.
(May not be given in 1944-45.)
Department of Classics
Professor and Head of the Department: O. J. Todd.
Associate Professor: Louis A. MacKay.
Assistant Pl-ofessor: Geoffrey B. Riddehough.
Instructor: Patrick C. F. Guthrie. (On leave of absence.)
Greek
Greek 1 is open to students who have presented Greek for University Entrance or have taken the beginners' course in the
University; Greek 2 is open to those who have passed in Greek 1
or in Senior Matriculation Greek.
Of the courses numbered 3, 5, 6, and 7 only two are normally
available in any one year.
Beginners' Greek.—The elements of Attic Greek.
Text-book: Chase and Phillips, A New Introduction to Greek,
Edwards.
Four hours a week, to be arranged. 3 units.
1. Introduction to Greek Prose Authors.—After completing the
beginners' book, the course will present the first book of Xenophon's
eye-witness account of the march made by the "Ten Thousand"
Greeks into Asia Minor. There will be practice in composition, and
reading in the history of Greece.
Text-books: White, First Greek Book, chap. XLIX-LXXX, Ginn;
North and Hillard, Greek Prose Composition (one exercise each
from sections 1-16), Rivingtons; Robertson and Robertson, The
Story of Greece and Rome, chap. I-XXXII, Dent. 136 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text:. Xenophon, The First Four Books of Xenophon's Anabasis,
Goodwin and White, Ginn.
Four hours a week, to be arranged. 3 units.
2. Greek Literature of the Classical Period.—Plato's account of
Socrates' defence at his trial will be followed by an introduction
to Greek tragedy in a play of Aeschylus. There will be practice in
composition, and a brief survey of Greek literary history.
Text-books: North and Hillard, Greek Prose Composition (sections 17-44), Rivingtons; Norwood, The Writers of Greece, Oxford.
Texts: Plato, Apology, Adam, Cambridge Elementary Classics;
Aeschylus, Prometheus Vinctus, Sikes and Willson, Macmillan.
Four hours a week, to be arranged. 3 units.
3. Greek Drama.—Lectures on the development of Greek tragedy
and comedy and on scenic antiquities; the reading of representative
plays of Sophocles, Euripides, and Aristophanes, and of Aristotle's
discussion of tragedy in his Ars Poetica.
Texts: Sophocles, Antigone, Jebb and Shuckburgh, Cambridge;
Euripides, Heracles, Byrde, Oxford; Aristophanes, Aves, Hall and
Geldart, Oxford; Aristotle, Ars Poetica, Bywater, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
5. Epic and Lyric Poetry.—Selections from Homer's Iliad and
from the Greek lyric anthology.
Texts: Homer, Iliad, Monro, 2 vols., Oxford; Greek Elegiac,
Iambic, and Lyric Poets, Harvard.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
6. Greek Historians.—Lectures on the rise of Greek historical
writing; the reading of selections from Herodotus and Thucydides.
Texts: Herodoti HistOriae, Hude, Oxford; Thucydides, History,
Book VII, Marchant, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
7. Introduction to Greek Philosophy.—A survey of the beginnings of Greek philosophic inquiry; the reading of selections from
two of the major works of Plato and Aristotle.
Texts: Plato, Respublica, Burnet, Oxford; Aristotle, Ethica Nico-
machea, Bywater, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
8. (a) and (b) Composition.—Obligatory for Honours students;
to be taken in both Third and Fourth Years.
One hour a week. 1 unit. Classics 137
9. Greek History to 14 A.D.—The course will include in the
First Term a study of the background and rise of Greek civilization,
with special attention to the social and political life in the fifth
century city states; in the Second Term, a study of the following
century and a survey of Hellenistic civilization, with special emphasis on the contribution of the Hellenistic Age to Graeco-Roman
culture.
A knowledge of Greek is not prerequisite for this course.
References: Botsford and Robinson, Hellenic History, Macmillan;
Laistner, Greek History, Heath; Cary, A History of the Greek
World from 823 to 146 B.C., Methuen.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
14. Greek Art and Literature.
(a) Greek Art.—A survey of architecture, sculpture, and the
minor arts from the Aegean period to the Hellenistic, with consideration of their aesthetic value and their relation to Hellenic
life and thought.
Lectures illustrated with lantern slides and photographs from the
Carnegie Collection.
One hour a week.
(May not be given in 1944-45.)
(b) Greek Epic and Tragedy.—A study, in translation, of the
Iliad, the Odyssey, and selected plays of Aeschylus, Sophocles, and
Euripides. Collateral reading will be assigned.
Texts: Homer, Iliad, translated by Lang, Leaf, and Myers, Macmillan; Homer, Odyssey, translated by Butcher and Lang, Macmillan ; Aeschylus, The House of Atreus, three plays translated by
Morshead, Macmillan, Golden Treasury Series; Sophocles, Oedipus
the King and one other play, translated by Jebb, Macmillan;
Euripides, Medea and Hippolytus, translated by Murray, Allen
and Unwin.
Two hours a week.
Either part of this course may be taken separately, for a credit
of one or two units respectively. Knowledge of Greek is not essential.
3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
Primarily for Graduate Students
21. Aristotle, Politica, Immisch, Teubner. 138 Faculty of Arts and Science
Latin
Latin 1 is open to students who have presented Latin for University Entrance or have taken the beginners' course in the University; Latin 2 is open to those who have passed in Latin 1 or in
Senior Matriculation Latin.
Beginners' Latin.—This course is intended for students who have
no previous knowledge of Latin. It is open for credit only to
students who have not offered Latin for credit at University
Entrance.
The aims of the course include (1) a mastery of what is fundamental in Latin grammar and. composition and the learning of a
basic Latin vocabulary; and (2) a continuous correlation with
English, in a careful study of the origins and meanings of English
words derived from Latin and of the structure of the English
sentence. During the latter part of the year selections from Latin
poetry will be read.
Text-book: Collar and Daniell, First Year Latin, revised by
Jenkins, Ginn.
Text: To be announced.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
11.30-12.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday, and a fourth
hour to be arranged.
1. Prose and Poetry of the Golden Age.—The course opens with
the historian Livy's account of operations in Eastern Sicily during
the Second Punic War; in the Second Term will be read selections
from some of the representative poets of the late Republic and
the early Empire. There will be practice in composition, and
reading in the history of Rome.
Text-books: Marchant and Watson, Latin Prose Composition,
Bell; Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece and Rome,
chap. XXXIII-LIV, Dent.
Texts: Livy, Book XXV, Monro, Oxford; A Book of Latin
Poetry, Neville, Jolliffe, Dale, and Breslove, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Section 1: 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday;
Section 2: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
2. Prose and Poetry of the Golden Age (Second Course).—Reading in some of the public addresses of Cicero and in the developed
epic as represented by Vergil; brief history of Greece.
Text-book: Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece and
Rome, chap. I-XXXII, Dent. Classics 139
Texts: Cicero, Catilinarian Orations, Upcott, Oxford; Vergil,
Aeneid VI, Page, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Section 1: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday;
Section 2: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
3. Roman Comedy.—A study of typical plays of Plautus and
Terence, illustrative of the Greek influence on the Roman stage;
brief history of Latin literature.
Text-book: Duff, The Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Texts: Plautus, Menaechmi, Knight, Cambridge; Terence, Phor-
mio, Bond and Walpole, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
Note. All students are advised to provide themselves with Allen
and Greenough, New Latin Grammar, Ginn. Honours students
will be expected to take additional reading in the Third and Fourth
Years in connection with at least two of the courses numbered
3, 4, 5, and 6.
4. Prose and Poetry of the Silver Age.—The second great period
of Latin literature will be studied in the works of the historian
Tacitus and the satirist Juvenal. Brief history of Latin literature.
Text-book: Duff, The Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Texts: Tacitus, Selections, Marsh and Leon, Prentice-Hall;
Juvenal, Satires, Duff, Cambridge.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
5. Latin Letter Writing.—A study of three different styles of
letters—personal correspondence, essays in verse, and philosophical
discussions—by three masters in three successive periods.
Texts: Cicero, Selected Letters, Prichard and Bernard, Oxford;
Horace, Epistles, Wilkins, Macmillan; Seneca, Select Letters, Summers, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
8.30-9.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
6. General View of Latin Poetry.—This course offers a survey
of Latin poetry from the earliest native verse, through the period 140 Faculty of Arts and Science
of Greek influence, into the late Imperial and early Christian
literature.
Text: The Oxford Book of Latin Verse, Garrod, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
8.30-9.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
7. Roman History.—A survey of the growth of Rome and the
development of its political institutions. Essays on selected topics
will be assigned.
References: Cary, A History of Rome Down to the Reign of
Constantine, Macmillan; Wells and Barrow, A Short History of
the Roman Empire, Methuen; Parker, A History of the Roman
World from A.D. 138 to 837, Methuen.
A knowledge of Latin is not prerequisite for this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
8. (a) and (b) Composition.—Obligatory for Honours students;
to be taken in both Third, and Fourth Years.
One lecture a week and one hour devoted to sight reading; individual conferences at the pleasure of the instructor. 1 unit.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Tuesday or Thursday.
9. Methods in High School Latin.—This course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training Course, and does not
carry undergraduate credit. Readings to be assigned.
Primarily for Graduate Students
21. Cicero, Select Letters, 2 vols., How, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
22. Caesar, De Bello Gallico, Holmes, Oxford.
Students are referred to the chapters covering the period concerned in the pages of Mommsen, Rice Holmes, or Ferrero, or in
Cambridge Ancient History, Vol. IX, also to Hubert's volumes on
the Celts in Kegan Paul's History of Civilisation series, or to Rice
Holmes' books, Ancient Britain and Caesar's Conquest of Gaul,
Oxford.
Three hours a week. ' 3 units.
23. Roman Comedy. 3 units.
24. Vergil, Aeneid. 3 units. Commerce 141
Department of Commerce
Professor and Head of the Department: Ellis H. Morrow.
Associate Professor: A. W. Currie.
Lecturer in Accountancy: Frederick Field.
Lecturer in Commercial Law:
Lecturer in Commercial Law:
The courses in this department, with the exception of Commerce
5 and 9, are open only to candidates for the degree of B.Com.
Owing to the nature of work involved in subjects of a commercial
character, these courses are not available as reading courses.
1. Fundamentals of Accounting.—A study of the financial
records of business and the modern methods of achieving financial
statements. The course includes practice in bookkeeping, the
development of special journals, the use of work sheets, preparation
of statements, and a consideration of partnership and corporation
accounting.
Written assignments must be prepared for each class period,
and in addition one or two model sets of accounts are handled
during the course of the academic year. Owing to the continuity
of the work in accounting, students who are more than two weeks
late in registering will not be permitted to register in Commerce 1
without the permission of the instructor.
Commerce 1 is a prerequisite to all other courses in Commerce,
but may be taken concurrently with Commerce 6.
Text-book: To be announced.
Four hours a week. Mr. Morrow. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 2.30-4.30, Wednesday.
-2. Advanced Accounting.—This course embraces advanced work
in accounting and the study of the financial problems of corporations, including consolidations, depreciation, and the miscellaneous
details connected with balance sheet valuations in general.
Text-book: Paton, Advanced Accounting, Macmillan.
Assigned readings.
Prerequisite: Commerce 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Field. 3 units.
Lectures: 2.30-4.30, Monday; 10.30-11.30, Saturday.
3. Cost Accounting.—A study of the application of accounting
principles to the internal operations of a business so as to provide
management control of labour, machines, materials, and overhead. 142 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text-book: Lawrence, Cost Accounting, revised edition, Prentice-
Hall.
Prerequisites: Commerce 1, 6, 11.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
4. Commercial Law.—Principles of company law and of the
law of contract, agency, bills and notes, sale of goods, etc. The
primary purpose of this course is to familiarize the student with
the various legal situations that arise in the day to day conduct of
a business and with their implications.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
5. Commercial Geography.—A broad survey of the economic
and geographic factors which lie behind the structure of business,
with particular emphasis upon the North American Continent.
Reports are required of students.
Text-books: Klimm, Starkey and Hall, Introductory Economic
Geography, 2nd edition, Harcourt, Brace.
Three hours a week. Mr. Currie, Mr. Warren. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
6. Marketing.—A consideration of methods and channels used
for the distribution of consumer and industrial goods, and the
merchandising problems of manufacturers and distributors. The
course is handled by a discussion of eases taken from actual business. A series of written reports on assigned cases is required
as part of the course.
Text-book: Learned, Problems in Marketing, McGraw-Hill.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Morrow. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday. *
9. Business Finance.—A study of the problems of financing
business concerns, including such factors as promotion, types of
organization, the provision of long-term and short-term capital,
financial statement analysis, involvements, and the public policy
towards corporations. As far as possible instruction will be by
means of cases taken from actual business.
Text-book: Masson and Stratton, Problems in Corporation Finance, McGraw-Hill.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Currie. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday. Commerce 143
. 11. Industrial Management.—A study of the organization and
management of manufacturing concerns from the standpoint of
control of raw materials, plant and equipment, operations, labour,
etc. Class discussion will be based on cases taken from actual
business. Field work comprising visits to factories and written
reports form a part of this course.
Text-book: Folts, Introduction to Industrial Management, 1940,
McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Lansburgh and Spriegel, Introduction to Industrial
Management, McGraw-Hill.
Three hours a week. Mr. Morrow. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
13. Foreign Trade Problems.—Methods, policies, and routine
practice in the serving of foreign markets, including consideration
of import problems. The course will be conducted by discussion
of actual business cases and will entail field work and written
reports.
Text-book: To be announced.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Morrow. 3 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
Department of Economics, Political Science, and
Sociology
Professor and Head of the Department: H. F. Angus. (On leave of
absence.)
Acting Head of the Department: Daniel Buchanan.
Professor: G. F. Drummond.
Associate Professor: C. W. Topping.
Associate Professor: Joseph A. Crumb.
Associate Professor of Social Work: Miss Marjorie J. Smith.
Assistant Professor of Social Work: Miss Mary C. Gleason.
Part-time Lecturers
Miss Marjorie Bradford, B.Sc. (Alberta).
Miss Isobel Harvey, M.A. (Brit. Col.)
Miss Elizabeth King, M.A. (Acadia).
Gordon Hearn, B.A. (Man.), M.Sc. (George Williams College).
Honorary Lecturers
James H. Creighton, M.A. (Brit. Col.)
Miss Laura Holland, C.B.E., R.N., Cert. School of Social Work (Simmons
College).
Miss Mary McPhedran, Diploma, Social Science Department (Toronto).
Note. Economics 1 is the prerequisite for all other courses in this
department except Economics 2, Economics 10, and Sociology 1, but
may be taken concurrently with Government 1. 144 Faculty of Arts and Science
Agricultural Economics 1, 2, 50, and 51 and Commerce 5 may be
counted as courses in Economics.
Economics
1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of the principles of production, value, distribution, money and banking, international exchange, and government finance, and an analysis of the
problems of labour and social reform.
Text-book: Logan and Inman, A Social Approach to Economics,
1939, University of Toronto.
References: Fairchild, Furniss, and Buck, Outlines of Economics
(2 vols.), 3rd edition, Macmillan; Garver and Hansen, Principles
of Economics, 1937, Ginn; Canada Year Books, Dominion Bureau
of Statistics.
If this course is taken for credit in the Third or the Fourth Year,
additional readings will be assigned.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures:
Section 1, 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday;
Section 2, 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
2. Economic History.—A survey of the factors of social and
economic significance in the development of society from early
times to the present day. Special attention will be given to the
recent economic history of Great Britain and Canada.
Text-book: Heaton, History of Trade and Commerce with Special
Reference to Canada, revised edition, Nelson.
References: Heaton, Economic History of Europe, Harpers;
Knowles, Industrial and Commercial Revolutions, Dutton; Mantoux,
The Industrial Revolution in the Eighteenth Century, Cape; Faulkner, American Economic History, Harpers; Currie, Canadian
Economic Development, Nelson; Innis, Economic History of Canada,
Ryerson; Canada Year Book, Dominion Bureau of Statistics.
Three hours a week. Mr. Currie. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
3. Labour Problems and Social Reform.—A study of the rise
of the factory system and capitalistic production, and of the more
important phases of trade unionism in England, Canada, and the
United States. A critical analysis of various solutions of the labour
problem attempted and proposed: profit-sharing, cooperation, arbitration and conciliation, scientific management, labour legislation,
and socialism. Economics, Political Science, and Sociology 145
Text-books: Watkins and Dodd, Labour Problems, Crowell; Taft,
Economics and Problems of Labor, Stackpole.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
4. Money and Banking.—The origin and development of money,
credit, and banking and the economic functions performed by
commercial, savings, trust, and investment banks; the monetary
and banking systems of England, Canada, and the other British
Dominions, the United States and other important foreign countries; foreign exchange; financial aspects of the trade cycle; the
purchasing power of money; the problems of central banking.
Text-book: James, The Economics of Money, Credit and Banking,
Ronald.
References: Crumb, Lessons in Money and Banking; Willis and
Beckhart, Foreign Banking Systems, Holt; Hayek, Prices and Production, Cape; Haberler, Prosperity and Depression, Columbia;
Keynes, The General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money,
Macmillan; League of Nations Publications, viz., World Economic
Survey, World Production and Prices, Money and Banking (Vols. I
and II), Prosperity and Depression.
Three hours a week. Mr. Crumb. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
5. Government Finance.—The development of the science of
government finance; the growth of the sphere of government and
increase in the tax burden; the Canadian and Empire tax systems;
personal, property, and business taxes; income and inheritance
taxes; financing relief and other public undertakings; public borrowing and deficit financing.
Text-book: Fagan and Macy, Public Finance, Longmans.
Readings: Lutz, Public Finance, Appleton-Century; Seligman,
Studies in Public Finance, 1925, Macmillan: Dalton, Principles of
Public Finance, 1929, Routledge; Comstock, Taxation in the Modern
State, 1931, Longmans; Shirras, Science of Public Finance, 1936,
Macmillan.
Three hours a week. Mr. Crumb. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
6. International Trade.—A survey of the theory of international
trade and the foreign exchanges; the balance of trade, foreign investments, and other fundamental factors; the problem of reparations and of war debts; the protective tariff and commercial 146 Faculty of Arts and Science
imperialism; the commercial policy of the leading countries, with
considerable attention to Canada.
Text-books: Taussig, International Trade, Macmillan; Griffin,
Principles of Foreign Trade, Macmillan; Viner, Studies in the
Theory of International Trade, Allen and Unwin; Haberler, The
Theory of International Trade, Hodge.
References: League of Nations Publications, viz., World Economic Survey, Statistical Year Book of the League of Nations,
Prosperity and Depression; Ohlin, Interregional and International
Trade, Harvard.
Assigned references.
Three hours a week. Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
7. Business Finance.—See Commerce 9.
8. Advanced Economic Theory.—The field of theoretical economics, with emphasis on the basic principles of the science; the
approach and contributions of contemporary authorities, including
Joan Robinson, J. R. Hicks, and J. M. Keynes.
Text-book: Boulding, Economic Analysis, Harpers.
Readings: Keynes, General Theory of Employment, Interest and
Money, 1936, Harcourt, Brace; Chamberlain, The Theory of Monopolistic Competition, 1933, Harvard; Robinson, The Economics of
Imperfect Competition, 1933, Macmillan; Atkins and others,
Economic Behavior, 1939, Houghton Mifflin; Homan, Contemporary
Economic Thought, 1928, Harpers; Hicks, The Theory of Wages,
1935, Macmillan; Kierstead, Essentials of Price Theory, University
of Toronto.
Three hours a week. Mr. Crumb. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
9. History of Economic Thought.—The development of economic
theory, with special reference to the Mercantilists, the Physiocrats,
and Adam Smith; the distinguishing characteristics and the modern
counterparts of the Classical, Historical, Socialist, and Marxian
economic doctrines; the immediate background and present emphases of the science.
Text-books: Roll, A History of Economic Thought, Faber and
Faber; Gray, The Development of Economic Doctrine, Longmans;
Scott, The Development of Economics, Appleton-Century; Gide
and Rist, A History of Economic Doctrine, Harrap; Patterson, Economics, Political Science, and Sociology 147
Readings in the History of Economic Thought, McGraw-Hill; Whit-
taker, A History of Economic Ideas, Longmans.
Three hours a week. Mr. Crumb. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
10. Commercial Geography.—See Commerce 5.
11. Transportation.—A comprehensive study of the fundamentals of transportation by land, sea, and air, with the legal and
economic problems involved; theory and practice of rate-making;
discriminations; factors in public control, etc.
Text-book: Jackman, Economic Principles of Transportation,
University of Toronto.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Currie. *^ 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
12. Statistics 1.—Statistical methods in relation to economic and
social investigations; statistical groups; types of average; statistical
series in time; trend and fluctuation; index numbers; methods of
measuring correlation; elementary probabilities and the normal
curve of error; problem of sampling.
Text-book: Croxton and Cowden, Applied General Statistics,
Prentice-Hall.
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Drummond.
3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday.
Laboratory (Statistics Laboratory, Vocational Guidance Building) :
Section A, 1.30-3.30, Monday;
Section B, 1.30-3.30, Wednesday;
Section C (if required), 1.30-3.30, Friday.
13. Statistics 2.—This course is a continuation of Statistics 1,
and aims at giving an understanding of statistical technique in its
application to problems of business and economic research. It involves a study of more advanced methods of correlation analysis,
cyclical fluctuations, and business forecasting. In addition to covering a wide course of reading, students will be required to construct
tables, diagrams, etc., based on original data (official or private)
of the statistics of trade, production, sales, prices, wages, etc., and
to write reports and precis. 148 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text-books: Croston and Crowden, Applied General Statistics,
Prentice-Hall; Ezekiel, Methods of Correlation Analysis, Wiley.
References: Fisher, Statistical Methods for Research Workers,
Oliver and Boyd; Goulden, Methods of Statistical Analysis, Burgess;
Snedecor, Statistical Methods, Collegiate Press, Ames, Iowa; Snedecor, Calculation and Interpretation of Analysis of Variance and
Covariance, Collegiate Press; Riggleman and Frisbee, Business
Statistics, McGraw-Hill; Snider, Business Statistics, McGraw-Hill;
Haney, Business Forecasting, Ginn.
Assigned references.
Four hours a week. Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Wednesday and Friday.
Laboratory (Statistics Laboratory, Vocational Guidance Building) : 1.30-3.30, Tuesday or Thursday.
14. Honours Seminar.—Third and Fourth Year Honours and
M.A. students in the Department are required to take this course.
Two hours a week, to be arranged.
Agricultural Economics
For courses in Agricultural Economics (1, 2, 50, 51) open to
students in the Faculty of Arts and Science see page 299 under the
Faculty of Agriculture.
Forest Economics
1. Forest Economics.—This course is devoted to the economic
aspects of land use, forestry resources, timber production, and the
forest industries, especially the distribution of lumber and other
products. (This course is identical with Forestry 16.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Government
(The courses in Government may not be given in 1944-45.)
1. Constitutional Government. — This course deals with the
nature, origin, and aims of the State; and with the organization of
government in the British Empire, the United States of America,
and France.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
2. Introduction to the Study of Law.—(i) A rapid survey of
legal history; (ii) outlines of jurisprudence. Economics, Political Science, and Sociology 149
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
3. Imperial Problems.—A course on problems of government
within the British Empire.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
4. Problems of the Pacific.—A course on the problems of the
Pacific Area discussed at the conferences of the Institute of Pacific
Relations. Each problem will be related to its economics and
political background.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. | 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
5. The Relations of the Dominion and Provinces in Canada.—A
general consideration of the relations of the Dominion and the
Provinces, with special attention to finance.
Reference: The Report of the Royal Commission on Dominion
Relations and the relevant appendices, King's Printer, Ottawa.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
6. Public International Law.—The nature, sources, and sanctions
of international law; the notion of nationhood, with particular
reference to the status of the British Dominions; jurisdiction,
nationality, normal relations between states; settlement of international disputes; war: organization of peace after the present
conflict.
Text-books: Hudson, Cases on International Law; Keith, The
Dominions as Sovereign States.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
Sociology
1. Introduction to Sociology.—The approach to the study of
society is by way of the local community and its institutions. An
evaluation of the importance of the geographic, the biological, the
psychological, and the cultural factors in the determination of the
rise, growth, and functioning of groups will be undertaken. There
will be an attempt to discover fundamental principles and to trace 150 Faculty of Arts and Science
these principles in their interrelations. Several of the problems
resulting from group contacts will be studied.
Text-books: Pendell, Society Under Analysis, Cattell; Gillin and
Gillin, An Introduction to Sociology, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
2. Social Anthropology.—The different views relating to the
origin and evolution of human society; the geographic factor and
economic methods in their bearing upon social life; primitive
mental attitudes; the development of ethical etc. ideas among
primitive peoples; primitive institutions, tools, art, and their modern forms; the growth of cardinal social ideas through the ancient
and classical period to the present time.
Text-books: Lowie, Introduction to Cultural Anthropology,
Farrar and Rinehart; Goldenweiser, Anthropology, Crofts.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(May be given in 1944-45.)
3. The Urban Community.—The structural characteristics of the
modern city will be outlined and the sociological significance of the
functions performed by its inhabitants discussed. A factual study
will be made of urban personalities, groups, and cultural patterns.
Methods of urban social control will be investigated and solutions
for urban problems will be evaluated.
Text-books: Queen and Thomas, The City, McGraw-Hill; List
and Halbert, Urban Society, 2nd edition, Crowell.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
4. Social Problems and Social Policy. — A detailed study of
significant modern Canadian social problems, together with a statement and evaluation of the more promising suggested solutions for
these problems.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
5. Social Statistics.—The collection, analysis, and presentation of
data pertaining particularly to the social services; the nature and Economics, Political Science, and Sociology 151
meaning of samples, averages, dispersion, trends; correlation and
cost of living indices; social survey procedures.
Text-book: McCormick, Elementary Social Statistics, 1941, McGraw-Hill.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday.
Laboratory: 3.30-5.30, Friday.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
6. Introduction to Social Work.—A general survey of the field of
professional social work for students preparing to enter the graduate
course in Social Work. The various types of social agencies will be
studied with case illustrations of the work such agencies do and a
general historical background will be reviewed in order to demonstrate how social agencies originated to meet existing needs.
Text-book: Fink, The Field of Social Work, Holt,
Three hours a week. Miss Smith. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
7. The Dynamic Family.—The genetic rise of the family will be
traced and its modern forms described. Various statements on the
functions of the family will be evaluated while the interrelations of
religion, science, education, public opinion, law, and social change
with the dynamic family are being sketched. An analysis of
causation in family break-up will be made and recommendations
for facilitating family life and for rehabilitating the broken family
will be considered.
Text-books: Baber, Marriage and the Family, McGraw-Hill; Fol-
som, The Family and Democratic Society, Wiley.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
8. Criminology.—The theoretic and scientific basis of criminology
will be sketched through a study of opinions, cases, and institutions.
An analysis of contemporary findings concerning causation in
juvenile delinquency and in adult crime will be made. Reformist
programmes will be evaluated and suggestions for a modern scientific system of treatment for Canadian criminals will be invited.
Text-books: Barnes and Teeters, New Horizons in Criminology,
Prentice-Hall; Sutherland, Principles of Criminology, Lippincott;
Topping, Canadian Penal Institutions, revised edition, Ryerson; 152 Faculty of Arts and Science
Report on the Penal System of Canada, 1938, King's Printer,
Ottawa.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
PROFESSIONAL COURSE IN SOCIAL WORK
Courses Open Only to Candidates for the Diploma
1. History of Social Welfare.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
2(a). Social Case Work.—An introductory course describing the
philosophy of social case work, case work methods, and the types of
problems to which case work can make a contribution.
Three hours a week. First Term. lx/2 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
2(b). Social Case Work.—A continuation of 2(a) with elaboration of methods and techniques through the study of case records.
Three hours a week. Second Term. Miss Smith. iy2 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
3. Problems of Child Welfare.—An introductory course in which
methods of caring for dependent, neglected, and delinquent children
are presented and discussed.
Three hours a week. Second Term. Miss Harvey. iy2 units.
Lectures: 2.30-3.30, Wednesday; 2.30-4.30, Friday.
4. Medical Information.—The purpose of the course is to provide
social workers with the information needed to understand and help
most effectively persons suffering from mental and physical handicaps; social implications of illness, the need for an interpretative
diagnosis, and the ethics involved in the relations of doctors, nurses,
social workers, and patients.
Two hours a week. Miss Johnston and special lecturers.
2 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday and Wednesday.
5. Advanced Case Work.—Discussion of case material from specialized fields of practice designed to deepen the students' understanding of people and to increase the students' skills in case work
practice.
Summer Session. V/2 units. Economics, Political Science, and Sociology 153
7. Introduction to Social Group Work.—This course furnishes an
appreciation of the value and function of group work in the general
field of social work. Specific attention is given to the group process;
group work objectives; programme planning; leadership.
Three hours a week. First Term. Mr. Hearn. IV2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Wednesday; 8.30-10.30, Friday.
9. Beginning Field Work.
Fifteen hours a week. 3 units.
Tuesday and Thursday.
10. Advanced Field Work.
Thirty hours a week. 3 units.
May, June, and July.
11. Community Organization.—An examination of the problem
of identifying social needs in the community and of developing
programmes to meet them. An analysis of the functions of the coordinating agencies in the community and of the professional social
worker in the process of social planning.
Two hours a week. Second Term. Miss Bradford. 1 unit.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Wednesday and Friday.
12. Social Work and the Law.—The principles of law with which
the social worker should become familiar; those defects in judicial
administration that especially affect persons with low incomes; the
structure of the court system; legal aid societies and their work.
Summer Session. IV2 units.
13(a). Public Welfare.—A descriptive study of public welfare organization with an emphasis upon Canadian developments of the
past and present and a consideration of future plans.
Two hours a week. First Term. Mr. Creighton. 1 unit.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday and Wednesday.
13(b). Public Welfare.—Problems of administration in the field
of public welfare.
Two hours a week. Second Term. Miss Smith. 1 unit.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday and Wednesday.
20. Seminar in Social Research.—Discussion of and practice in
research methods. Preparation of studies.
Two hours a week.
During Intersession and Summer Session. 154 Faculty of Arts and Science
Nursing 5. Mental Hygiene.—An introduction to the study of
mental illness, with emphasis upon its prevention. Child guidance
clinics and the psychiatric social history.
One hour a week. Mr. Crease and special lecturers. 1 unit.
Lectures: 3.30-4.30, Monday.
Department of Education
Professor and Head of the Department: G. M. Weir (On leave of
absence.)
Professor and Acting Head of the Department: M. A. Cameron.
Assistant Professor of Education and Psychology: F. T. Tyler.
Lecturer: C. B. Wood.
Lecturers in Methods:
Professors: A. C. Cooke, L. A. MacKay.
Special Lecturers: Miss S. M. Boyles, Mrs. I. V. Green, T. R. Hall,
A. R. Lord, Miss M. McManus, Miss G. Moore, Miss Anne Mossman,
C. H. Scott, Miss D. Somerset, M. Van Vliet.
Notes
1. Psychology 4, 6, and 9 may be counted as courses in Education.
2. Undergraduates who intend to proceed to the Teacher Training
Course are required to take Psychology 1, and their attention is
called to Philosophy 1, 9, Psychology 4, 9.
3. Six units chosen from Education 9, 10, 12, 16, 20 to 39 may
be taken for undergraduate credit but only by students who have
completed their normal school training.
4. The Teacher Training Course consists of Education 9 to 15
inclusive.
Courses
9. Principles of Education.—The first part of this course deals
with some of the broader principles of method and the main types
of teaching and learning activities. The second part of the course
attempts to develop a philosophy of education around such topics
as the individual and society, curriculum theories, and the role of
education in a democracy.
Text-books: To be announced.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
10. Educational Psychology.—The applications of psychology to
education; a consideration of the origin, motivation, development,
and modification of human behaviour; native equipment; intelligence; individual differences; learning; the transfer of training; Education 155
the mental hygiene of the school child; and the psychology of
elementary and secondary school subjects.
Text-book: Pressey and Robinson, Psychology and the New Education, Harpers.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Lectures: 2.30-3.30, Monday, Tuesday, and Friday.
12. School Administration and Law.—The organization of the
school system; aims and characteristics of the elementary, junior
high, and senior high schools; fundamentals of school administration; control; the co-curriculum; accrediting; correspondence
courses; the school law of British Columbia.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
13. Tests and Measurements.
14. (a) Methods.
1. Elementary School Subjects.
2. High School Subjects.—English, Social Studies, Latin,
French, German, Mathematics, Biology, Chemistry,
Physics, General Science, Agriculture, Geography, Home
Economics.
Two of these courses are required, but students
are advised to attend a third course. All students taking
one or more of the special sciences (Biology, Chemistry,
and Physics) are required to take also General Science.
3. Additional Subjects.—Art, Music, Health and Physical
Education, Librarianship, Guidance, Speech, Dramatics.
(b) Observation and Practice.
Note. Supplementals will not be granted in the practice teaching. Students who fail in practice teaching will be required to.
repeat this part of the Second Term of the Teacher Training Course.
15. Seminar.—A special study, with an essay or report, in one
of the four fields, Education 9, 10, 12, 13.
One hour a week.
16. High School Methods.—In this course, which will be given
by reading, methods of teaching two high school subjects will be
studied. Not open to students in the Teacher Training Course nor
to students who have not taken normal school training.
iy2 units. 156 Faculty of Arts and Science
20. History of Education. — The development of educational
theory from the time of ancient Greece to the present day, with
special attention to the period since 1800.
3 units.
21. Advanced Educational Psychology. — A survey of recent
psychological theories and a critical analysis of their implications
for education.
3 units.
22. Philosophy of Education. '-— A study of current trends in
educational philosophy; the social implications of contemporary
educational theories.
3 units.
23. Problems in Education.—An investigation and report of an
educational problem.
3 units.
24. Methods of Educational Research.—The scientific method in
education; discovering educational problems; types of educational
research; standards in thesis writing; critical study of published
research. This course may be successfully taken with Education 28.
iy2 units.
25. Administration of School Systems.—Dominion participation
in education; the Provincial Department of Education; centralization and decentralization; school finance; the local unit of administration.
iy2 units.
26. Administration of the Elementary School.—The organization of the elementary school; the work of the principal; participation of staff in administration.
iy2 units.
27. Administration of the Secondary School.—The administrative
staff and their duties; office routine; administration of guidance
programme; assemblies; co-curricular activities; construction of
the time table. Applications to British Columbia circumstances
will be stressed throughout.
iy2 units.
28. Educational Statistics.—The frequency distribution; measures
of central tendency; measures of variability; the normal probability
curve and its applications; sampling; reliability; correlation, its
meaning and application; partial and multiple correlation.
iy2 units. Education 157
29. The Secondary School.—A foundation for this course will
be laid by a study of the basic principles of secondary education.
Consideration will be given to some of the more important modern
developments in the light of these principles both in Canada and
in other countries of the world.
IV2 units.
30. Psychology of Adolescence.—The junior and senior high
school pupil as an individual and as a member of social groups; the
physical, mental, social, emotional, and religious development typical of adolescence; the interests of teen-age, boys and girls and
their problems in personal relations, in the home, in the school,
and in the community.
iy2 units.
31. Psychology of Childhood.—The mental, social, emotional, and
physical characteristics of pre-school and elementary school pupils;
their interests and their problems; implications for organization and
administration of school systems.
iy2 units.
32. Psychology of the School Subjects.—This course aims to
cover that part of educational psychology which is directly concerned with classroom subject-matter activities. It considers the
research findings in the various elementary and secondary school
fields and applies them to teaching and learning procedures."
iy2 units.
33. Psychology of Exceptional Children.—The physical, mental,
social, and emotional characteristics of exceptional children (gifted,
backward, crippled, hard-of-hearing, etc.) ; factors in their growth
and development; educational provisions suited to their needs.
iy2 units.
34. Diagnostic and Remedial Instruction.—This course is intended to help teachers in their work with seriously retarded pupils.
It includes a study of the diagnostic point of view in education,
types and causes of subject-matter disabilities, and possible remedies of difficulties. Disabilities in spelling, reading, and arithmetic
will be studied chiefly, and over half the course will be devoted to
reading. Some opportunity will be given teachers to specialize on
primary, intermediate, or secondary school levels of work.
iy2 units.
35. Guidance.—The objectives of guidance; gathering and using
information concerning students; counselling with students; articu- 158 Faculty of Arts and Science
lation of the different forms of guidance; contributions of teachers,
principal, and specialists in guidance; analysis of guidance programmes in secondary schools.
iy2 units.
36. Supervision.—A study of techniques for the improvement
of instruction. Responsibilities of inspectors, supervisors, and
principals.
iy2 units.
37. Comparative Education.—Types and systems of schools in
some of the principal nations. Study will be mostly but not
entirely of England, France, Germany, the United States, and
Canada.
iy2 units.
38. Evaluation.—The basic principles of evaluation; tests and
measuring instruments for the determination of the outcomes of
instruction; analyzing the results of evaluation.
iy2 units.
39. Teaching in the Secondary School.—This course on modern
techniques of secondary sehool teaching will include a study of such
matters as socialized procedures and provision for individual differences through unit methods. Some opportunity for specialization
according to subject will be provided.
iy2 units.
Department of English
Professor and Head of the Department: G. G. Sedgewick.
Prof essor: W. L. MacDonald.
Professor: F. G. C. Wood.
Professor: Thorleif Larsen.
Associate Professor: Miss Dorothy Mawdsley.
Assistant Professor: H. C. Lewis.
Assistant Professor: Mrs. Dorothy Blakey Smith.
Assistant Professor: Edmund Morrison.
Assistant Professor: F. E. L. Priestley.
Assistant Professor: John H. Creighton.
Instructor: G. P. V. Akrigg.
First Year
1. (a) Literature.—Elementary study of a number of literary
forms to be chosen from the short story, the play, the novel, the
essay, the simpler sorts of poetry.
Texts for 1944-45: An anthology of short stories to be announced;
Euripides, Bacchae, in Gilbert Murray's paraphrase, Allen and
Unwin; Shakspere, Julius Caesar; Sheridan, The School for English 159
Scandal, Everyman; Ibsen, A Doll's House, Everyman; an
anthology of contemporary poetry.
Two hours a week.
(b) Composition.—Elementary forms and principles of composition.
Text-books: Foerster and Steadman, Writing and Thinking, new
edition, Houghton Mifflin; Biaggini, The Reading and Writing of
English, Harcourt, Brace.
Two hours a week.
The work in composition consists (i) of themes and class exercises,
and (ii) of written examinations. Students will be required to make
a passing mark in each of these two parts of the work.
3 units.
Lectures:
Section 1, 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday, and 2.30-
3.30, Thursday;
Section 2, 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday, and 2.30-
3.30, Thursday;
Section 3, 8.30-9.30, Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday, and 2.30-
3.30, Tuesday;
Section 4, 11.30-12.30, Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday, and 2.30-
3.30, Tuesday;
Section 5, 2.30-3.30, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday.
Second Year
2. Literature.—Studies in the history of English literature.
Lectures and texts illustrative of the chief authors and movements from Tottel's Miscellany to Shelley.
Text-book: Legouis, A Short History of English Literature, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
3. English Composition for Students in Agriculture and Applied
Science.—See Applied Scienee and Agriculture sections of the
Calendar.
4. Technical Writing for Students in Applied Science.—See
Applied Science section of the Calendar.
Third and Fourth Years
9. Shakspere.—This course may be taken for credit in two successive years. In 1944-45 9 (b) will be given as follows: 160 F'aculty of Arts and Science
i. A detailed study of the text of A Midsummer Night's
Dream; Henry IV, Part I; Othello; Antony and Cleopatra;
Coriolanus.
ii. Lectures on Shakspere's development, on his use of sources,
and on his relation to the stage and the dramatic practice
of his time.
Students will provide themselves with annotated editions of the
five plays named above, and with The Facts About Shakespeare, by
Neilson and Thorndike, Macmillan. They are advised to get The
Complete Works of Shakespeare, ed. Kittredge, Ginn, or the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson and Hill, Houghton Mifflin.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
9. (a) (Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
10.' The Drama to 1642.—The course begins with a study of the
Theban plays of Sophocles and of Aristotle's theory of tragedy.
The main subject of the course is Elizabethan drama: (1) its beginnings in the Miracle and Morality Plays and in the Interludes;
(2) its development in Shakspere's predecessors—Lyly, Peele,
Greene, Kyd, and Marlowe; (3) its culmination in Shakspere;
and (4) its decline in Jonson, Beaumont and Fletcher, Middleton,
Webster, Massinger, Shirley, and Ford.
Texts: Campbell, Sophocles in English Verse, World's Classics,
Oxford; Everyman and Other Interludes, Dent; The Chief Elizabethan Dramatists, ed. Neilson, Houghton Mifflin; Shakespeare,
Shakespeare Head Press, or the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson and Hill, Houghton Mifflin.
Three hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
13. The English Novel from Richardson to the Present Time.—
The development of English fiction will be traced from Richardson,
Fielding, Smollet, and Sterne through Goldsmith, Mrs. Radcliffe,
Jane Austen, Scott, C. Bronte, Dickens, Thackeray, and George
Eliot to Trollope, Meredith, Stevenson, Hardy, and a few representative novelists now living.
A fair knowledge of the works of Jane Austen, Scott, Dickens,
Thackeray, and George Eliot is a prerequisite for those taking this
course.
Three hours a week. Mr. Wood. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
14. Eighteenth Century Literature.—This course aims to give
a view, as comprehensive as possible, of the main currents of English English 161
thought and literature during the period 1660-1800. It is concerned
mainly with the work of such men as Dryden, Pope, Swift,
Addison, Steele, Johnson, Goldsmith, Burke, and Burns.
Three hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
16. Romantic Poetry, 1780-1830.—Studies in the beginnings and
progress of Romanticism, based chiefly upon the work of Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Shelley, and Keats.
Texts: Students should provide themselves with the poems of the
authors listed above. The Oxford editions are recommended, but
are not required.
References: Bernbaum, Guide Through the Romantic Movement,
Nelson; Elton, A Survey of English Literature 1780-1830, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. Mrs. Smith. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
17. Victorian Poetry.—This course is concerned chiefly with the
work of Tennyson, Browning, and Arnold. A few weeks at the close
of the term will be devoted to a survey of the development of later
poetry.
Texts: Browning, Complete Poetical Works, Cambridge; Arnold,
Poems, Oxford; Tennyson, Poems, Globe edition, Macmillan;
Stephens, Beck, and Snow, Victorian and Later English Poets,
American Book Company.
Reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature, 1830-1880,
Macmillan.
Three hours a week. Mr. Priestley. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
18. Victorian Prose Literature.—Literary, social, religious, and
scientific currents of thought as represented by the work of Mill,
Ruskin, Carlyle, Newman, Arnold, Darwin, Huxley, and Butler.
The following texts in whole or part will be dealt with in lectures
and class discussion: Mill, Utilitarianism and Liberty, Everyman;
Ruskin, Unto This Last, Everyman; Carlyle, SartorResartus (selections), Heroes and Hero Worship (selections), Past and Present,
Everyman; Newman, Apologia Pro Vita Sua, Everyman; Idea of a
University (selections), ed. Yardley, Cambridge; Arnold, Representative Essays, ed. Brown, Macmillan; Literature and Dogma (selections), Burt's Home Library; Darwin, Origin of Species, chapter
IV; Everyman, or World's Classics, Oxford; Huxley, Readings from 162 Faculty of Arts and Science
Huxley, ed. Rinaker, 1934, Harcourt, Brace; Butler, Erewhon,
Everyman.
Three hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
19. Contemporary Literature. — Some tendencies of English
literature of the present generation, in poetry and the essay and
the novel, will be studied in this course.
Texts: Noyes, Readings in the Modem Essay, Houghton Mifflin;
Sanders and Nelson, Chief Modern Poets of England and America,
Macmillan.
Three hours a week. Mr. Lewis. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
20. Chaucer and Middle English.—(i) Middle English grammar
with the reading of representative texts; (ii) The Canterbury Tales.
Texts: Chaucer's Complete Works, ed. Robinson, Houghton
Mifflin; Manly, The Canterbury Tales, Holt; a Middle English
reader.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-3.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
21. Anglo-Saxon.—Moore & Knott, The Elements of Old English,
edition of 1940 or later, Wahr.
Two hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 2 units.
Lectures: 3.30-5.30, Thursday.
22. The History of the English Language.—The study of the
vocabulary, syntax, accidence, and phonology of the English language from the historical point of view. A brief introduction to
philological method; the ancestry of English; the language in the
Old and Middle English periods, with illustrative readings; the
development of modern English.
Prerequisite: English 21.
Two hours a week. Mrs. Smith. 2 units.
Lectures: To be arranged.
24. (a) and (b) Seminars.
(a) Bibliography and General Method.—Third Year Honours
students in English are required to take this course.
One hour a week. Mrs. Smith.
Lectures: To be arranged.
(b) Practice with Problems of Criticism and Investigation.—
All Honours students in English, whether of the Third or English 163
the Fourth Year, are required to take this course. The
subject for 1944-45 will be announced later.
Hours: 3.30-5.30, Friday. 2 units.
25. (a) Private Reading.—Students who are candidates for an
Honours degree in English may elect a course of private reading in
their Third Year. 3 units.
25. (b) Private Reading.—Students of the Fourth Year may
pursue, with the consent and under the direction of the Department,
a course of private reading. 3 units.
In such courses examinations will be set, but no class instruction
will be given.
Teacher Training Course
26. Methods in High School English.—This course does not carry
undergraduate credit.
Two hours a week. Second Term.
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor and Head of the Department: M. Y. Williams.
Professor of Mineralogy and Petrography: Clarence Otto Swanson.
Professor of Economic Geology: Henry C. Gunning.
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrography: H. V. Warren.
Assistant Professor: Vladimir J. Okulitch.
Lecturer: Mrs. Gwendolen O'Brien.
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction to
the science of geology, and includes the following subdivisions:
(a) Physical Geology, including weathering, the work of the
wind; ground water, streams, and glaciers, the ocean and its work,
the structure of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes, igneous intrusions, metamorphism, mountains, plateaus, and ore deposits.
Two hours a week. First Term and to Jan. 31. Mr. Swanson.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday and Wednesday.
(b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, including the
study and identification of the commoner minerals and rocks.
Field Work may replace laboratory occasionally, and will take
the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood
of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the lectures.
Two hours laboratory a week. First Term and: to Jan. 31. Mr.
Warren, Mr. Gunning, and assistants.
Laboratory: 1.30-3.30, Tuesday or Thursday. 164 Faculty of Arts and Science
(c) Historical Geology, including the history of the earth and
its life from pre-Cambrian to recent time.
Two hours a week. Second Term from Feb. 1. Mr. Williams.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday and Wednesday.
(d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, including the
study of index fossils representative of the periods of geological
time.
Two hours laboratory a week. Second Term from Feb. 1. Mr.
Williams and assistants.
Laboratory: 1.30-3.30, Tuesday or Thursday.
Text-book: Longwell, Knopf, Flint, Schuchert, Dunbar, Outlines
of Geology, 1941, Wiley.
Prerequisite: University Entrance Chemistry or Physics, or
Chemistry A or 1, or Physics A or 1, taken either before or concurrently.
Students will be required to make passing marks in the combined
written and the combined practical divisions of the course, and may
be required to pass in each of the laboratory divisions. 3 units.
2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief introduction to the field
of mineralogy, with particular emphasis on the cultural aspect.
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) elementary
crystallography, (2) physical mineralogy, and (3) descriptive
mineralogy of 50 of the more common mineral species, with special
reference to gem stones and to the minerals which are important in
present day Canadian and world economics.
Laboratory Work consists of a study of the more common crystal
forms of about 50 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a brief
outline of the principles and methods of determinative mineralogy
and blowpipe analysis.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, 4th
edition, Wiley.
References: Brush and Penfield, Determinative Mineralogy and
Blowpipe Analysis, 16th edition, Wiley; Kraus, Hunt, and Ramsell,
Mineralogy, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Geology 1 must, and Chemistry 1 and Physics 1
should, precede or accompany this course.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First Term.
Mr. Warren and assistants. iy2 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 1.30-3.30, Friday. Geology and Geography 165
2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy.—This course
supplements 2 (a) and consists of a more complete survey of crystallography and of physical and chemical mineralogy, with a critical
study of about 70 of the less common minerals, special emphasis
being laid on their crystallography, origin, association, alteration,
and economic significance.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
4th edition, Wiley.
References: Brush and Penfield, Determinative Mineralogy and
Blowpipe Analysis, 16th edition, Wiley; Kraus, Hunt, and Ramsell,
Mineralogy, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Geology 2 (a), Chemistry 1, and Physics 1 must
precede or accompany this course.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
Mr. Warren. 1% units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 1.30-3.30, Friday.
Note. Students who take either 2 (a) or 2 (b) separately will
be required to pass in both the lecture and the laboratory divisions.
Those who take both 2 (a) and 2 (b) may be required to pass in each.
4. Structural Geology.—A study of primary ana secondary structures in rocks. The course includes practice in graphical methods
for solving various problems. In addition, it briefly surveys the
use of geophysical methods in tracing concealed structures.
Text-book: Nevin, Structural Geology, 2nd edition, Wiley,
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Swanson. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
5. History of the Earth Sciences and Geological Theories.—A
brief study of the development of the geological sciences and
theories employed in geological interpretations.
References: Geikie, The Founders of Geology, Macmillan; Merrill,
The First One Hundred Years of American Geology, Yale; Adams,
The Birth and Development of the Geological Sciences, Williams
and Wilkins.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
One hour a week. Mr. Williams. 1 unit.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday.
Note. Geology 5 may be counted as a course in Geography. 166 Faculty of Arts and Science
6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate fossils,
their classification, identification, and geological distribution.
Text-book: Twenhofel and Shrock, Invertebrate Palaeontology,
McGraw-Hill.
References: Grabau and Shimer, North American Index Fossils,
Seiler; Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology, Macmillan;
Berry, Paleontology, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Biology 1 and Zoology 1 are recommended. For students majoring or taking Honours in Zoology, a
reading course in historical geology may be substituted for
Geology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Williams.
3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Wednesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 3.30-5.30, Thursday.
7. Petrography.—This course consists of systematic studies of
(i) optical mineralogy and (ii) petrography, with an introduction
to petrogenesis.
The laboratory work deals with the determination of rocks under
the microscope and in hand specimens.
Text-books: Tyrrell, The Principles of Petrology, Dutton; Rogers
and Kerr, Thin-Section Mineralogy, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 2.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Mr. Swanson.
4 units.
Lectures: 3.30-4.30, Tuesday, and 9.30-10.30, Friday.
Laboratory: 1.30-3.30, Tuesday and Wednesday.
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the manner of occurrence,
genesis, structure, and distribution of the principal metallic and
non-metallic mineral deposits, with type illustrations; special stress
is placed upon Canadian deposits.
Text-book: Bateman, Economic Mineral Deposits, 1942, Wiley.
Prerequisites: Geology 2, 4, and 7 must precede or accompany
this course.
Four hours a week. Mr. Williams, Mr. Gunning, Mr. Swanson,
Mr. Warren. 4 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday;
2.30-3.30, Friday.
9. Mineralography. — Principally a laboratory course dealing
with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means of
the reflecting microscope. Geology and Geography 167
The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding, and
polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in micro-
chemical methods of mineral determination.
During the Second Term each student is assigned a suite of ores
from some mining district for a critical examination and report.
Text-book: U. S. Geological Survey Bulletin 914, Microscopic
Determination of the Ore Minerals.
Prerequisite: Geology 8 must precede or accompany this course.
Two to four hours a week by arrangement. Mr. Warren.
1 to 2 units.
Lectures and laboratory: 1.30-3.30, Thursday, and additional
hours to be arranged.
10. Field Geology.—The methods taught are the fundamental
ones used by professional geologists and by the officers of the
Geological Survey of Canada. This course is essentially practical
and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording, and
correlating geological facts in the field. The students construct
geological maps of selected areas and visit localities of interest
within reach of Vancouver. The cost to each student may approach
$10.
Text-book: Lahee, Field Geology, 4th ed., 1941, McGraw-Hill.
References: Hayes, Handbook for Field Geologists, Wiley; Spurr,
Geology Applied to Mining, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Geology 2 and 4.
Two hours a week in the Second Term by arrangement and ten
days in the field at the close of examinations in the spring. Mr.
Gnnning. IV2 units.
11. Regional Geology.—A study of the geology of Canada and of
th-? main geological features of the continental and oceanic segments
of the earth.
References: Young, Geology and Economic Minerals of Canada,
Geological Survey of Canada, Economic Geology Series No. 1,
1926; Suess, Das Antlitz der Erde, Tempsky; maps and reports of
various national surveys.
Prerequisite: Geology 5.
Three lectures a week. Mr. Williams, Mr. Gunning. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday and Wednesday; 1.30-2.30, Monday. 168 Faculty of Arts and Science
Courses for Graduate Students
20. Sedimentation.
Text-book: Twenhofel, Principles of Sedimentation, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisites: Geology 2 and 11.
Two seminars arid 6 hours of reading or laboratory a week. Mr.
Williams. 3 units.
21. Problems in Palaeontology.
Prerequisite: Geology 6.
One seminar and 6 hours laboratory a week. Mr. Williams.
3 units.
23. (a) Advanced Mineralogy (Gems and Precious Stones).—
A systematic study of the gem minerals and of some of the mere
popular semi-precious stones.
Text-books: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
4th edition, Wiley; Smith, Gemstones, Methuen.
Prerequisite: Geology 2 (a).
One seminar and four hours laboratory a week. First Term. Mr.
Warren. iy2 units.
Note. This course may be taken as an undergraduate course,
subject to the approval of the Department.
(b) Advanced Mineralogy.—A systematic study of some of the
rarer minerals, particular attention being given to those of economic
importance.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
4th edition, Wiley.
References: Brush and Penfield, Determinative Mineralogy and
Blowpipe Analysis, 16th edition, Wiley; Kraus, Hunt, and Ramsell,
Mineralogy, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 8.
One seminar and four hours laboratory a week, or six hours
laboratory a week. Second Term. Mr. Warren. iy2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday.
24. Advanced Mineralography. — A critical study of some
approved suite of ores, using the more recent methods of investigation, including the examination of polished sections under polarized
light, microehemistry, microphotography, use of "super-polisher,"
etc. Geology and Geography 169
Frequent reference will be made to U. S. Geological Survey
Bulletin 914, Microscopic Determination of the Ore Minerals.
Prerequisite: Geology 9.
Occasional seminars and from five to seven hours laboratory a
week. Mr. Warren. 3 to 4 units.
25. Petrogeny.—A reading and lecture course, supplemented with
occasional laboratory work, which deals with the origin of igneous
and metamorphic rocks.
References: Harker, Metamorphism, Methuen; Bowen, Evolution
of Igneous Rocks, Princeton.
Prerequisite: Geology 7.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Swanson.
3 units.
26. Mineral Deposits.—A seminar course, supplemented by laboratory work, dealing with the character, origin, and structure q£
mineral deposits, with emphasis on ore deposits.
Text-book: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits, 4th edition, 1933, McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Ore Deposits of the Western States, A.I.M.E., 1933.
Prerequisites: Geology 7 and 8.
Two hours seminar and two hours laboratory a week. Mr.
Gunning. 4 units.
Geography
Note. Commerce 5 (as a Second Year course) and Geology 5
(as a Third or Fourth Year course) may be taken as courses in
Geography.
1. Principles of Geography.—This introductory course aims to
develop in the student the point of view of modern geography and
to furnish a foundation or background that will be useful not only
to those who may intend to continue a study of geography or to
teach it in the schools, but also to those who intend to study history,
economics, and other subjects, or to enter business or professional
careers into which geographical considerations enter.
As geography is a study of man in relation to his environment,
the lectures involve a consideration of earth relations and the principal occupations of man, and a brief introduction to man and his
response to geographical environment. The laboratory portion of
the course includes elementary map making and map reading; a
study of the common minerals, rocks, and fossils; a consideration 170 Faculty of Arts and Science
of population responses to varying conditions of temperature,
humidity, and food as illustrated by experiments with Drosophila,
and some elementary soil analyses. The role of bacteria in soils may
also be demonstrated. The rate of growth of wheat seedlings or
bacteria as affected by temperature, hydrogen-ion concentration,
and the presence of toxic substances, may be shown.
Geography 1 is prerequisite for all other courses in Geography
except Geography 2 and is a prerequisite for any student wishing
to take Geography as either a Major or a Minor subject.
Text-books: Klimm, Starkey & Hall, Introductory Economic
Geography, 2nd edition, Hareourt, Brace, chapters 1-31 inclusive;
Stamp, An Intermediate Commercial Geography, Part I, Commodities and World Trade, Longmans, chapters 1-12 inclusive.
References: James, An Outline of Geography, Ginn; Case and
Bergsmark, College Geography, Wiley. •
An atlas is requisite; failing a large, comprehensive atlas, one of
the following inexpensive ones will serve: The University Atlas,
Geo. Philip & Son; Canadian School Atlas, Dent; Goode's School
Atlas, Rand McNally; Appleton'S Standard School Atlas, Appleton-
Century.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Warren.
3 units.
Lectures: 2.30-3.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 3.30-5.30, Friday.
2. (a) Weather.—Introduction to the study of weather phenomena.
Text-book: Trewartha, An Introduction to Weather and Climate,
McGraw-Hill.
References: Blair, Weather Elements, Prentice-Hall; Pettersen,
Introduction to Meteorology, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: To be arranged.
Laboratory: To be arranged.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
2. (b) Climate.—A study of climatic classification and description and distribution of climatic types.
Text-book: Trewartha, An Introduction to Weather and Climate,
McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units. Geology and Geography 171
Lectures: To be arranged.
Laboratory: To be arranged.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
3. Human and Regional Geography.—A study of man and his
physical environment treated regionally.
Reference: Newbigins, A New Regional Geography of the World,
Hareourt, Brace.
Prerequisite: Geography 1.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
4. Geomorphology.—This course is intended for advanced students in geography and geology. The subject represents the overlap
between these two major sciences. It involves a study of the processes, principles, and laws of land formation, types of land forms,
and their distribution.
References: Lobeck, Geomorphology, McGraw-Hill; Wooldridge
and Morgan, The Physical Basis of Geography, Longmans.
Prerequisite: Geography 1 or Geology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: To be arranged.
Department of History
Professor and Head of the Department: W. N. Sage.
Professor: F. H. Soward. (On leave of absence.)
Associate Professor: A. C. Cooke.
Instructor: Miss Sylvia Thrupp. (On leave of absence.)
Lecturer: Miss Margaret A. Ormsby.
Students who intend to specialize in history or who are preparing for the Teacher Training Course are advised to associate with
it such allied subjects as economics, government, sociology, and
geography. Economics 1, 2, 9, 10, Government 1, 3, 4, Sociology 1,
Philosophy 4, 9, Psychology 3, and Geography 1 will be found
especially helpful. Attention, however, is called to the regulation
in paragraph 3, page 86, regarding the number of First and Second
Year courses which may be taken in the Third and Fourth Years.
This rule applies also to Third and Fourth Year students electing
History 1, 2, 3.
A reading knowledge of French and German will be found extremely valuable in Third and Fourth Year courses, while in certain
classes of more advanced work Latin is advisable. 172 Faculty of Arts and Science
French, at least, will be required for Honours work, and the study
of Germari is recommended.
First and Second Years
1. Main Currents in Twentieth-Century History.—This course
completes the study of world history in the high schools and offers
a background for contemporary world problems. The following
topics are discussed: The Great Powers at the Opening of the
Century, Alliance and Entente, The Coming of the First World
War, The First World War, The Peace Treaties, The New Map of
Europe, Reparations and War Debts, Security and Disarmament,
The League of Nations, The Russian Revolution and the U.S.S.R.,
Italy and Fascism, Germany from Empire to Third Reich, Britain
and France between the Wars, The New Balkans, The Little
Entente and Poland, Nationalism and Imperialism in the Far East,
The United States and World Peace, The Road to the Second
World War.
Text-books: Benns, Europe Since 1914, Crofts, or Langsam, The
World Since 1914, Macmillan; Sehmitt, Triple Alliance and Triple
Entente, Oxford; Carr, Conditions of Peace, Macmillan (for upper
year credit).
Essays will be assigned throughout the session. (Extra work
will be required from Third and Fourth Year students taking this
course.)
Three hours a week. Miss Ormsby. 3 units.
Lectures: 2.30-3.30, Monday and Wednesday.
The third hour will be devoted to group discussions.
2. The History of Canada.—Geographical factors; exploration
and early settlements; the French Regime; constitutional development, 1759-1867; economic and social progress to Confederation;
development of the Dominion of Canada since 1867; Canada in the
Commonwealth; Canada in the world.
Text-books: Wittke, A History of Canada, McClelland and Stewart ; Wrong, The Canadians, Macmillan; Scott, Canada Today, Oxford ; Sage, Canada from Sea to Sea, University of Toronto; Currie,
Canadian Economic Development, Nelson; Report of the Royal
Commission on Dominion-Provincial Relations, Book I, Canada,
1867-1939, King's Printer, Ottawa.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session. (Extra work
will be required from Third and Fourth Year students taking this
course.)
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.) History 173
3. Canada West of the Great Lakes.—The place of Western
Canada in Canadian development; Anglo-French rivalry in the
West; struggle for supremacy between the Hudson's Bay Company
and the North West Company; the Selkirk Settlement; discovery
and exploration of the Pacific Coast; the Maritime fur trade; the
North West Company in British Columbia; the Western Department of the Hudson's Bay Company, 1821-70; rivalries in Old
Oregon; the colonial period of British Columbia; Confederation;
the Riel rebellion; the rise of the new West; the agrarian movement on the prairies; development of the Province of British
Columbia.
Text-books: Wittke, A History of Canada, McClelland and
Stewart; Howay, British Columbia, the Making of a Province,
Ryerson; Sage, Sir James Douglas and British Columbia, Univer
sity of Toronto; England, The Colonization of Western Canada,
King; Morton, A History of the Canadian West to 1870-71, Nelson;
Sage, Canada from Sea to Sea, University of Toronto; Howay, Sage,
and Angus, British Columbia and the United States, Ryerson.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units.
. Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
Third and Fourth Years
4. Mediaeval Europe, 500-1300.—A general outline of mediaeval
history from the fall of the Roman Empire to the 13th century.
Sketches of Byzantine history and of the rise of Islam are included,
but the main emphasis is laid upon the culture of the 12th and 13th
centuries in the West.
Text-book: Stephenson, Mediaeval History, revised edition,
Harpers..
Essays are assigned throughout the session. This course is open
also to Second Year students.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
History 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, and 18 are intended primarily for
Third Year students; History 15,17,19,20, and 25 for Fourth Year.
History 10 must be taken by all candidates for Honours.
All Honours students (whether in History alone or in a combined
course) must take the History seminars in their Third and Fourth
Years. The seminar is offered as a training in intensive work and
carries no credits. 174 Faculty of Arts and Science
If the graduating essay be written in History it will count as
3 units.
10. British History to 1688.—This course aims at an interpretation of the political, constitutional, economic, and religious development of the British Isles from the earliest times to the Revolution
of 1688.
Text-books: Trevelyan, A History of England, Longmans; Williamson, The Evolution of England,, Oxford; Adams and Stephens,
Select Documents of English Constitutional History, Macmillan, or
Stephenson and Mareham, Sources of English Constitutional History, Harpers; Adams, Constitutional History of England, Holt;
Hall and Albion, A History of England and the British Empire,
Ginn.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
11. The Development and Problems of the British Empire-
Commonwealth.
This course is given in two parts, and may be taken for credit
in two successive years.
(a) The Development and Problems of the British Commonwealth.
(b) The Development and Problems of the British Colonial
Empire.
In the session 1944-45, and alternate years, 11 (a) will be given,
which deals with British colonial policy, the development of the
Dominions, and problems of the Commonwealth.
Text-book: Knaplund, The British Empire, 1815-1939, Harpers.
Bibliographies for voluntary summer reading will be supplied on
application to the instructor in charge.
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
12. History of the United States of America.—This course begins
with a sketch of the American colonies at the outbreak of the
Revolution and traces the history of the United States from the
commencement of the War of Independence to the outbreak of
the Second World War.
Text-book: Faulkner, American Political, and Social History,
Crofts. History 175
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
13. The Age of the Renaissance and Reformation.—A study of
the cultural development of Europe from the 14th to the 17th century, including a consideration of the transition from the mediaeval to the modern world; humanism; Renaissance art; overseas
exploration and expansion; the rise of national states; the Reformation ; the scientific revolution and intellectual developments.
Text-book: Lucas, The Renaissance and the Reformation, Harpers.
Readings and reports will be assigned. A
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
14. Europe from Westphalia to Waterloo.—Europe in the 17th
and 18th centuries; the establishment of absolutism; the ascendancy
of France; expansion and conflict overseas; the enlightened despots;
the Age of Reason; the French Revolution; Napoleon; the Congress
of Vienna.
Text-books: Garrett, European History, 1500-1815, Heath; Dorn,
Competition for Empire, Harpers; Brinton, A Decade of Revolution, Harpers; Bruun, Europe and the French Imperium, Harpers.
Readings and reports will be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
15. Europe, 1815-1914. — The political, social, and economic
history of the chief countries of continental Europe, with especial
attention to international relations.
Text-books: Hayes, A Political and Cultural History of Modern
Europe, Vol. II, Macmillan; Hall and Davis, The Course of Europe
Since Waterloo, Appleton-Century.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Miss Ormsby. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
16. Social and Economic History of Mediaeval Europe. — A
reading course on the development of economic and social life
through the Middle Ages in Europe, c. 500-1500 A.D. 176 Faculty of Abts and Science
Text-books: Pirenne, An Economic and Social History of Mediaeval Europe, and Mediaeval Cities and the Revival of Trade,
Kegan Paul. Further reading assigned.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
3 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
17. World Economic History, 1850-1948.—A comparison of the
means by which industrial progress has been achieved in Western
Europe, the Americas, Japan, Russia, and India, and a study of
the social changes involved. Regular reading will be required, but
no essays.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
18. British History, 1485-1760. — This course offers a general
survey of political, economic, social, and cultural change in the
Tudor and Stuart periods and the early 18th century. Some
knowledge of contemporary literature in any of the three periods
will be helpful.
Text-books: Trevelyan, History of England, Longmans; Adams
and Stephens, Select Documents of English Constitutional History,
Macmillan; Bland, Brown, and Tawney, English Economic History,
Select Documents, Bell. I
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
19. Great Britain Since 1688.—This course aims at an interpretation of the constitutional, political, economic, and religious development of the British Isles since 1688.
Text-books: Williamson, The Evolution of England, Oxford;
Fay, Life and Labour in the Nineteenth Century, Oxford; Ensor,
England, 1870-1914, Oxford; Stephenson and Marcham, Sources
of English Constitutional History, Harpers; Woodward, The Age
of Reform, Oxford; Hall and Albion, A History of England and
the British Empire, Ginn.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
20. The Evolution of Canadian Self-Government.—A survey of
the period from the Peace of Utrecht to the present day. The
following subjects will be dealt with: French and British colonial History 177
systems; British experience in Acadia; British policy after the
Treaty of Paris; the Quebec Act; the effect of the American Revolution ; the Constitutional Act; the opening of the West; the War
of 1812; the formation of parties and the struggle for reform;
Durham's Report; the achievement of responsible government;
.Confederation and the completion of the Dominion; the development of responsible government and the growth of nationhood.
Text-books: Martin, Empire and Commonwealth, Oxford; Kennedy, The Constitution of Canada, Oxford; Kennedy, Statutes,
Treaties and Documents of the Canadian Constitution, 1713-1929,
Oxford; Scott, Canada To-day, Oxford.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
21. Methods in High School Social Studies. — This course is
offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training Course and
does not carry undergraduate credit.
Text-book: Wesley, Teaching the Social Studies, Heath.
Readings to be assigned.
Mr. Cooke.
22. Honours Seminars:
(a) Third Year: Problems of Bibliography and Historical
Method. Mr. Cooke.
(b) Fourth Year: Problems of Modern British History. Mr.
Sage.
23. M.A. Seminar: The History of British Columbia. Mr. Sage.
24. History of Latin America. 3 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
25. History of Historical Writing.—A survey of the development
of Western culture as reflected in the changing outlook of historians
from classical times to the present day. Emphasis will be laid on
19th and 20th century philosophies of history.
Text-books: Barnes, A History of Historical Writing, Oklahoma
University; Shotwell, An Introduction to the History of History,
Columbia; Gooch, History and Historians in the 19th Century,
Longmans.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
Greek 9. Greek History to 14 A.D. (See under Classics, page 137.)
Latin 7. Roman History. (See under Classics, page 140.) 178 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of Home Economics
Associate Professor and Acting Head of the Department: Miss Dorothy P.
Lefebvre.
Assistant Professor: Miss Stella Beil.
Assistant Professor: Miss Charlotte S. Black.
The following courses are open only to students of the degree
course in Home Economics except by permission of the Faculties
concerned.
A. Introduction to Foods and Nutrition.—An introductory
course designed to give basic principles of food preparation and
of nutrition.
Text-books: Sherman and Lanford, Essentials of Nutrition, 2nd
edition, Macmillan; Wilmot and Batjer, Food for the Family,
Lippincott.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 2.00-5.00, Thursday.
B. Introduction to Textiles and Clothing. — An introductory
course designed to give basic principles of textile selection and of
clothing construction by using commercial patterns.
Text-book: Erwin, Practical Dress Design, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 3.15-6.15, Thursday.
1. Foods and Nutrition.—Lectures are devoted to, a study of
human nutrition with emphasis on the requirements of the normal
adult. The preparation of various types of food is presented from
the experimental viewpoint in the laboratory hours.
Text-books: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Home Economics A or equivalent.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: Section 1, 2.00-5.00, Tuesday; Section 2, 8.30-11.30,
Saturday.
2. Principles of Design.—The study and application of fundamental art principles to problems in design. Application of design
principles to dress. Wardrobe planning. Home Economics 179
Text-book: Goldstein, Art in Everyday Life, 3rd edition, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: Section 1, 3.15-6.15, Tuesday; Section 2, 8.30-11.30,
Saturday.
3. Clothing.—Development of foundation patterns. Flat pattern
designing. Consumer problems in relation to ready-to-wear.
Text-book: Latzke and Quinlan, Clothing, Lippincott.
Prerequisite: Home Economics B or equivalent.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: Section 1, 3.15-6.15, Tuesday; Section 2, 3.15-6.15,
Thursday; Section 3, 8.30-11.30, Saturday.
Fourth hour to be arranged. A
4. Food Management.—Food buying and utilization, food legislation, brands and grades. Meal planning and table service.
Advanced food preparation related to food service. Group preparation and service of at least one meal.
Text-book: Wilmot and Batjer, Food for the Family, Lippincott.
Prerequisite: Home Economics 1.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: Section 1, 2.00-5.00, Tuesday; Section 2, 2.00-5.0O,
Thursday; Section 3, 8.30-11.30, Saturday.
5. Household Equipment and Furnishings.—A study of house
plans, furnishings, and equipment. Problems of selection and care
of equipment and furnishings.
Text-books: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Physics A or Physics C or Physics 1.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
Laboratory: 9.30-11.30, Saturday. 180 Faculty of Arts and Science
6. Economics of the Household.—Family expenditures and
standards of living. Budgeting of time, energy, and family funds.
Text-books: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Economics 1.
Two lectures and two hours discussion a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Discussion: 9.30-11.30, Saturday.
7. Experimental Cookery.—Experimental procedure applied to
food preparation. Each student will undertake the solution of a
cookery problem.
Text-book: Lowe, Experimental Cookery, 3rd edition, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Home Economics 1.
One lecture and five hours laboratory a week.
This course may be taken in either term. iy2 units.
Lectures: First Term, 10.30-11.30, Wednesday; Second Term,
10.30-11.30, Friday.
Laboratory: First Term, 2.00-5.00, Wednesday; 2.00-4.00, Friday;
Second Term, 2.00-5.00, Wednesday; 10.30-12.30, Thursday.
8. Advanced Nutrition and Dietetics.—Food requirements of the
healthy infant, child, adolescent, and adult. These requirements
applied to the planning of adequate dietaries at various cost levels.
Students will be expected to present oral and written reports of
recent advances in the science of nutrition.
Reference: Sherman, Chemistry of Food and Nutrition, 6th
edition, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Home Economics 1.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 2.00-5.00, Friday.
9. Textiles.—A study of textile construction, finish, and design.
Identification of fibers. Problems of textile consumers.
Text-books: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Chemistry C. Home Economics 181
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
10. Advanced Clothing.—Development of dress design by means
of draping. A study of the social significance of fashion.
Text-books: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Home Economics 3.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
11. Advanced Foods.—A course in advanced food preparation
with emphasis placed upon the more difficult techniques of preparation and service. Students will devote considerable time to the
planning and presentation of food demonstrations.
References: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Home Economics 4.
One lecture and five hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
12. Interior Decoration.—Application of design principles to furnishing and decorating homes.
Text-books: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Home Economics 2.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
^^ iy2 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
13. Diet Therapy.—A discussion of the relation of normal nutrition to certain diseases and the part that diet therapy may play in
their treatment. Special diets are calculated and prepared in the
laboratory
Text-books: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Home Economics 8.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
14. Quantity Cookery.—Experience in the preparation of food
in large quantities. 1852 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text-books: To be announced.
' Prerequisite: Home Economics 4.
One lecture and five hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
iy2 units.
15. Institution Administration.—Discussion of the organization
and administration problems of food departments of institutions.
Text-books: To be announced.
Open only to Third and Fourth Year students.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First Term.
iy2 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
16. Institution Buying.—Discussion of problems of purchasing
food in large quantities and of the selection, arrangement, and care
of equipment for large quantity food service.
References: To be announced.
Open only to Third and Fourth Year students.
Three lectures a week. Second Term. iy2 units.
Field trips to be arranged.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
17. Home Management.—(To be arranged.)
Open only to Fourth Year students.
First or Second Term. iy2 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
18. Child Development.—The physical, mental, social, and emotional development of the infant and pre-school child. Discussion
of care and problems of training.
Text-books: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Two lectures and three hours observation a week. Second Term.
iy2 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
19. Family Relations.—A study of the dynamic relations of
family members to one another and to the community.
Text-books: To be announced.
Open only to Fourth Year students.
Three lectures a week. First Term. iy2 units.
(Not given in 1944-45.) Mathematics 183
Department of Mathematics
Professor and Head of the Department: Daniel Buchanan.
Professor: F. S. Nowlan.
Professor: Ralph D. James.
Professor:
Professor: Walter H. Gage.
Associate Professor: S. A. Jennings.
Instructor: Miss May L. Barclay.
For First Year Students
1. Introductory Mathematics.—An elementary course in algebra,
including proportion, variation, logarithms, progressions, theory of
quadratic equations, permutations, combinations, annuities, binomial theorem; analytical geometry, including the study of the
straight line and the circle, with an introductory study of the
parabola, ellipse, and hyperbola; elementary trigonometry.
Text-books: Nowlan, Analytic Geometry, McGraw-Hill; Rider,
Plane amd Spherical Trigonometry, Macmillan; Hedrick, Logarithmic and Trigonometric Tables, revised edition, Macmillan.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures:
Section 1, 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday; 1.30-2.30,
Tuesday;
Section 2, 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday; 1.30-2.30,
Thursday; A ^\\
Section 3,11.30-12.30, Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday; 1.30-2.30,
Wednesday.
Primarily for Second Year Students
2. Algebra, Calculus, and Geometry.—Induction, complex numbers, Homer's method, series, undetermined coefficients, determinants ; introduction to differential and integral calculus, with various
applications; review of conies, introduction to solid analytic
geometry.
Text-books: Nowlan, College Algebra; Nowlan, Analytic
Geometry, McGraw-Hill.
Calculus text to be announced.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures:
Section 1, 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday. Mr.
James.
Section 2, 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday. Mr.
Nowlan. 184 Faculty of Arts and Science
3. The Mathematical Theory of Investments.—This course deals
with the exponential law, the power law, curve fitting, the theory
of interest, annuities, debentures, valuation of bonds, sinking funds,
depreciation, probability and its application to life insurance.
Text-book: Hart, Mathematics of Investment, revised, Heath.
Reference: Bauer, Mathematics Preparatory to Statistics and
Finance, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. Mr. Jennings. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
4. Descriptive Astronomy.—An introductory course dealing with
the solar system, stellar motions, the constitution of the stars, and
nebulae.
Text-book: Baker, Astronomy, latest edition, Van Nostrand.
Two hours a week. • 2 units.
Lectures: 2.30-3.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Students desiring credit for an additional unit in connection
with this course may register for Mathematics 18. They will be
required to write essays on prescribed subjects dealing with various
phases of astronomy. 1 unit.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
5. Spherical Trigonometry.—An introductory course.
Text-book: Hammond, Concise Spherical Trigonometry, Houghton Mifflin.
One hour a week. 1 unit.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Wednesday.
Primarily for Third Year Students
Mathematics 2 is prerequisite to all the following courses.
10. Calculus.—The elementary theory and applications of the
subject.
Text-book: Smith, Granville, Longley, Differential and Integral
Calculus, Ginn.
Three hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
11. Mathematical Analysis.—A study of mathematical principles
which are of importance in pure and applied mathematics. Applications to specific problems in mathematics, chemistry, and physics.
Text-book: To be announced. Mathematics 185
Two hours a week. Mr. James. 2 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday and Friday.
12. Differential Equations.—Ordinary and partial differential
equations with various applications to geometry, mechanics, physics,
and chemistry.
Text-book: Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans.
This course may be taken concurrently with Mathematics 10.
Three hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
13. Plane and Solid Analytical Geometry.—A general study of
the conies and systems of conies, and elementary work in three
dimensions.
Text-book: Nowlan, Analytic Geometry, McGraw-Hill.
Three hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
14. Theory of Equations, Determinants, and Matrices.—A course
covering the main theory and use of these subjects.
Text-book: Dickson, Elementary Theory of Equations, Wiley.
Three hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
Primarily for Fourth Year Students
15. Higher Algebra.—Postulational treatment of various algebraical systems, including groups, rings, and fields; elementary
divisibility properties of the rational integers, including Fermat's
theorem and the Euler function.
Text-book: To be selected.
References: Albert, Modern Higher Algebra, University of Chicago; Bocher, Higher Algebra, Macmillan; Dickson, Introduction
to the Theory of Numbers, University of Chicago; Hilton, Finite
Groups, Oxford.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
16. Advanced Calculus.—A continuation of the previous course
in calculus, treating partial differentiation, expansions of functions
of many variables, singular points, successive integration, elliptic
integrals, harmonic analysis, and Fourier series. 186 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text-book: Woods, Advanced Calculus, Ginn.
Reference: Burington and Torrance, Higher Mathematics, McGraw-Hill.
Three hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
17. Applied Mathematics.—A course dealing with the applications of mathematics to dynamics of a particle and of a rigid body,
and to the two body problem in celestial mechanics.
Prerequisite: Physics 6, Mathematics 12.
Text-book: Synge and Griffith, Principles of Mechanics, McGraw-Hill.
Three hours a week. Mr. Jennings. 3 units.
This course may be taken either as an undergraduate or as a
graduate course.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
18. History of Mathematics.—A reading course covering the
historical development of the elementary branches of mathematics
from the earliest times to the present. Essays will be assigned.
1 unit.
19. Advanced Geometry.—An introduction to projective and
metric geometry, including a brief discussion of non-euclidean
geometries. Fundamentals of differential geometry in two and
three dimensions.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 12, 13.
Text-book: To be announced.
Two hours a week. Mr. James. 2 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
Courses for Graduate Students
20. Tensor Analysis.—Text-book: McConnell, Applications of the
Absolute Differential Calculus, Blackie.
21. Theory of Functions of a Real Variable.
22. Theory of Functions of a Complex Variable.
23. Differential Geometry.—Text-book: Weatherburn, Differential Geometry.
24. Projective Geometry.—Text-book: Veblen and Young, Projective Geometry, Vol. I. Mathematics 187
25. Celestial Mechanics.—Text-book: Moulton, An Introduction
to Celestial Mechanics.
26. Ordinary and Partial Differential Equations.
27. Theory of Numbers and Algebraic Numbers.
28. Linear Algebras.—Text-book: Dickson, Algebras and Their
Arithmetics.
29. Modem Algebraic Theories.-—Text-book: Birkhoff and Mac-
Lane, Survey of Modern Algebra.
30. Harmonic and Elliptic Functions.—Text-books: Byerly, Integral Calculus; Whittaker and Watson, Modem Analysis; Gray,
Mathews, and MacRobert, Bessel Functions. *
31. Topology.
32. Theory of Groups.
Department of Modern Languages
Professor and Head of the Department: D. O. Evans.
Professor of French: A. F. B. Clark.
Professor of German: Miss Isabel Maclnnes.
Assistant Professor of French: Miss Janet T. Greig.
Assistant Professor of French: Miss Dorothy Dallas.
Assistant Professor of German: Miss Joyce Hallamore. •
Assistant Professor of German:- Charles E. Borden.
Assistant Professor of Spanish: C. V. Brooke.
Instructor in French: Madame Y. Darlington.
Lecturer: Miss Ethel Harris.
With the consent of the professor in charge of the course, a
student taking a General Course B.A. degree may be admitted to
any course in the Third and Fourth Years in addition to, but not
in lieu of, 3 (a) and 4 (a); and a student taking a B.Com. degree
may be admitted to French 3 (b) in lieu of French 3 (a). Students
from other universities who have already taken the work of 3 (a)
and 4 (a) may be given special permission by the Head of the
Department to substitute other courses.
French
1. Texts: Modem French Short Stories, edited by Fanniere,
Oxford; Moliere, L'Avare (Larousse), Dent, Les Cent meilleurs
poemes lyriques, Gowans & Gray; Barton and Sirich, French Review Grammar and Composition, Crofts.
Prerequisite: University Entrance French or its equivalent.
Three hours a week. 3 units. 188 Faculty of Arts and Science
Lectures: Section 1, 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday;
Section 2, 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday,
Section 3, 1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday.
2. Texts: Balzac, Cesar Birotteau, Nelson; Anatole France, Nelson. Independent reading to include Balzac, Le Pere Goriot;
Anatole France, Le Crime de Sylvestre Bonnard, Holt; and the
author listed under Summer Reading.
Composition in French based on the above readings, and from
Ratner and Sorkin, French Review Grammar, Gage.
Prerequisite: French 1 or its equivalent.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: Section 1, 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday;
Section 2, 8.30-9.30, Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday;
Section 3, 2.30-3.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday.
3. (a) The Literature of the Age of Louis XIV.—Lectures on the
history and social conditions of the period, and on the development
of the literature. Careful reading and discussion of the following
texts: Schinz and King, Seventeenth Century French Readings,
Holt; Corneille, Le Cid, Didier, or Polyeucte, Didier; Racine,
Iphigenie, American Book Co., or Andromaque, Didier, or Phedre,
Heath; Moliere, Le Misanthrope, Didier, or Les Femmes Savantes,
Didier, or L'Avare, Manchester University; Le Tartuffe, Didier.
Conversation and written resumes based on the above.
This course is obligatory for all students taking Third Year
French. French 2 is a prerequisite. Students who cannot write
French with some facility are advised not to attempt 3 (a).
Students who intend to take French throughout the four years
or who wish to teach this subject should take also 3 (c).
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
3. (b) French Verse.—A study of the forms of French verse and
of poetic diction and imagery from 1820 onwards.
Texts: Berthon, Nine French Poets, Macmillan; Victor Hugo,
Selections, Manchester University; Charles Marc des Granges,
Les poetes francais 1820-1920, Hatier.
Independent readings to include Vigny, Eloa. See also, under
Summer Reading, Chateaubriand and Rivarol.
Three hours a week. For Honours students. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday. Modern Languages 189
3. (c) French Practice.—Phonetics; training in speaking and
essay writing. This course should be taken by all who elect French
as a Third Year subject. It may not be substituted for French 3 (a).
Text-books: Klinghardt and Fourmestraux, French Intonation
Exercises; Bascan, Manuel pratique de prononciation et de lecture,
Dent.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
4. (a) The Romantic Movement. — Romanticism, lyrical and
social, in French literature; its significance in poetry and life.
Texts: Victor Hugo, Hernani, Nelson; Ruy Bias, Delagrave;
Alfred de Vigny, Chatterton, Oxford; Alfred de Musset, Three
Plays, Nelson. Independent readings include the plays of Mari-
vaux, Voltaire, Sedaine, and Banville listed under Summer Reading.
Reference: Stewart and Tilley, The Romantic Movement in
French Literature, Cambridge.
Prerequisites: French 3 (a) and (c).
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
4. (b) The Literature of the Eighteenth Century.—Lectures on
the history and social conditions of the period, with special emphasis
on the philosophe movement, and the beginnings of Romanticism.
The interrelations of French and English thought and literature
will be touched upon.
Texts: Havens, Selections from Voltaire, Appleton-Century;
Mornet, Rousseau, Morceaux choisis, Didier; Fallex, Diderot, Ex-
traits, Delagrave; Beaumarchais, Le Barbier de Seville, Macmillan.
Prerequisites: French 3 (a) and 3 (b).
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
4. (c) Lectures on the educational and administrative institutions of modern France; one hour. Oral and written practice,
readings, and discussions; two hours.
This course may be taken with French 4 (a), but not in place
of it.
Prerequisite: French 3 (c).
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Courses for Graduate Students
5. (b) The Middle Ages and XVIth Century.—Texts: Le Mystere
d'Adam, Manchester University; Rabelais, Gargantua xiv, xv, 190 Faculty of Arts and Science
xxi, xxiii, xxiv, Pantagruel viii, Jouaust; Montaigne, Essais i, xxv;
Ronsard, Poesies choisies, Garnier. 3 units.
5. (c) The History of French Criticism.—French literary criticism and theory, from the Pleiade to the present day.
Text-book: Vial-Denise, Idees et doctrines litteraires, three vols.,
Delagrave. 3 units.
5. (d) Contemporary French Literature.—The poetic movement
from Peguy to the Surrealistes.
Text: Anthologie de la nouvelle poesie frangaise, Kra.
Lectures expliqnees from Valery, Variete i, Gallimard; Gide,
Pages de Journal, Gallimard; Valery Larbaud, Amants, heureux
amants, Gallimard. Further readings to be specified. 3 units.
Summer Reading
Upon entering the courses for .the years stated, the student must
satisfy the instructor that he has read the books mentioned below.
Second Year:
1. Louis Hemon, Maria Chapdelaine, Fayard.
Third Year:
1. Chateaubriand, Atala, Larousse.
2. Madame de Stael, De I'Allemagne, Larousse*.
3. Rivarol, Discours sur I'universalite de la langue frangaise,
Larousse.
Fourth Year:
1. Marivaux, Le Jeu de Vamour et du hasard, Larousse.
2. Voltaire, Contes, Hatier.
3. Voltaire, Zaire, Larousse.
4. Sedaine, Le philosophe sans le savoir, Larousse.*
5. Bernardin de Saint-Pierre, Paul et Virginie, Larousse.*
6. Banville, Gringoire, Hatier.*
Note. Books marked with an asterisk are to be read by Honours
students only.
German
Beginners' Course.—Schinnerer, Beginning German, Macmillan;
Durian, Kai aus der Kiste, Holt.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures:
Sections 1 and 2,10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday;
Section 3, 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday; Modern Languages 191
Sections 4 and 6, 1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday;
Section 5, 2.30-3.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
Each section has also a fourth period at 11.30-12.30 Tuesday,
Thursday, or Saturday.
1. (a) Texts: Chiles, German Composition and Conversation,
Part I, Ginn; Appelt and Funke, Modern German Prose, Heath;
Kastner, Drei Manner im Schnee, Crofts; Bruns, Book of German
Lyrics, Heath.
Prerequisite: University Entrance or Beginners' German.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures:
Section 1, 8.30-9.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday;
Section 2, 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
1. (b) Scientific German.—An introduction to the reading of
scientific German, supplemented by a review of essentials in
German grammar and composition.
Text-books: Wild, An Introduction to Scientific German, Oxford; Wild, An Anthology of Scientific German, Oxford; Chiles,
German Composition and Conversation, Part I, Ginn.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
2. Texts: Chiles, German Composition and Conversation, Part
II, Ginn; Diamond and Schomaker, Lust and Leid, Holt; Eichen-
dorff, Aus dem Leben ernes Taugenichf,s, Prentice-Hall; Thomas
Mann, Tonio Kroger, Crofts; Bruns, Book of German Lyrics, Heath.
Prerequisite: German 1 (a) or 1 (b) or the equivalent.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures:
Section 1, 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday;
Section 2, 2.30-3.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
3. (a) The Classical Period.—Lectures on the development of
German literature, with special emphasis on that of the eighteenth
century.
Texts for special study: Lessing, Emilia Galotti, Heath; Goethe,
Faust I, Heath; Schiller, Die Jungfrau von Orleans, Holt. Some
knowledge will also be required of Lessing's Minna von Bamhelm,
Goethe's Iphigenie, and Schiller's Maria Stuart.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday. 192 Faculty of Arts and Science
Summer Reading. Before entering German 3 (a) students must
read: Fleissner, Deutsches Literatur-Lesebuch, Crofts, to page 92.
(Robertson, The Literature of Germany, Home University Library,
is also recommended.)
3. (b) The Novelle.—Lectures on the development of the German
Novelle, with special emphasis on the nineteenth century.
Text: Deutsche Erzahler, Insel Verlag. Extensive independent
reading will be expected. 3 units.
3. (c) A course in oral and written composition, based largely
on a study of the development of German civilization.
Text: Jordan, Deutsche Kulturgeschichte, Crofts.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
4. (a) Nineteenth Century German Drama.—Text: Campbell,
German Plays of the Nineteenth Century, Crofts. 3 units.
4. (b) Nineteenth Century German Fiction. 3 units.
Courses 4 (a) and 4 (b) are given alternately.
5. (a) Lessing, Goethe, and Schiller.—Reading and discussion of
the most important works of these authors. 3 units.
5. (b) Middle High German. — Text-book: Bachmann, Mittel-
hochdeutsches Lesebuch. 3 units.
Spanish
Beginners' Course.—Grammar, composition, translation, conversation.
Texts: House and Mapes, Essentials of Spanish, Ginn; Hills,
Spanish Tales, Holt: Oteyza. El Diablo Blanco, Macmillan.
Four hours a week. Mr. Brooke. 3 units.
Lectures:
Section 1, 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday;
Section 2, 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday;
Section 3, 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
Fourth hour to be arranged.
1. Review of grammar, composition, translation, conversation.
Texts: To be announced.
Three hours a week. Mr. Brooke. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday*Thursday, and Saturday. Philosophy and Psychology 193
Department of Philosophy and Psychology
Professor and Head of the Department: John Allan Irving.
Associate Professor: Thomas G. Henderson. (On leave of absence.)
Associate Professor: Joseph E. Morsh.
Associate Professor: Alexander P. Maslow.
Assistant Professor of Psychology and Education: F. T. Tyler.
Philosophy
Philosophy 1 is intended for two classes of students: first,
those who contemplate specializing in philosophy or psychology
either as Honours or as General Course students in their Third
and Fourth Years; and second, those who wish a single course
which will give in an untechnical way a statement and discussion
of fundamental philosophical problems and thus assist them in
their special studies in other departments.
1. Introduction to Philosophy.—The development of philosophy
in the Western World, studied in its relation to other aspects of
cultural history, with especial reference to cognate developments
in literature, religion, politics, and science. During 1944-45 the
philosophical issues involved in the war will be discussed. This
course may be counted for credit as a Second, Third, or Fourth
Year subject.
Text-book: Patrick, Introduction to Philosophy, revised edition,
Houghton Mifflin.
Three hours a week. Mr.' Irving. 3 units.
Lectures: 2.30-3.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
2. Ancient and Mediaeval Philosophy.—Primitive thought and
the origins of Western civilization; early Greek schools and the relations between philosophy and science; the Greek Enlightenment
and the Sophists; the role of Socrates; the intellectual reconstruction of Plato; the philosophy of Aristotle; the Stoic, Epicurean,
and Sceptic schools; the later history of Platonism; the development
of mediaeval philosophy to the Renaissance.
Text-books: Nahm, Selections from Early Greek Philosophy,
Crofts; Plato, Republic, Macmillan; Edman, ed., The Philosophy
of Plato, The Modern Library; Aristotle, Selections, ed. Ross,
Scribners; Clark, Selections from Hellenistic Philosophy, Crofts;
St. Augustine, Confessions, Everyman.
Three hours a week. Mr. Maslow. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.) 194 Faculty of Arts and Science
3. Early Modern Philosophy.—The Renaissance; the rise of modern science, and its transformation of traditional beliefs; continental rationalism (Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz); English empiricism (Bacon, Locke, Berkeley, Hume); the Age of Reason in France;
the encyclopedists; French materialism; Rousseau; the Kantian
philosophy.
Text-books: Burtt, The English Philosophers from Bacon to Mill,
The Modern Library, Random House; Descartes, Selections, Scribners; Spinoza, Selections, Scribners; Leibniz, Discourse on Metaphysics, Open Court; Kant, Prolegomena, Open Court.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
4. Recent European and American Philosophy.—The main currents of philosophical thought in the nineteenth and twentieth
centuries, with special reference to the literary and scientific movements, including the critical philosophy, the romantic movement,
sociological positivism, the development of modern psychology in
relation to philosophy and education, the influence of evolution on
modern thought, pragmatism, realism, and logical positivism.
Text-book: Rand, Modern Classical Philosophers, Houghton
Mifflin. This will be supplemented by reading assignments in other
recent original sources.
Three hours a week. Mr. Maslow. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
5. Ethics.—The development of ethical, thought within the
history of civilization. The historical and evolutionary approach
will be followed by a systematic discussion of the fundamental
problems of ethics in the light of the modern sciences of man and
society. The interrelation between individual and social morality
will be stressed.
Text-book: Dewey and Tufts, Ethics, revised edition, Holt.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
6. Aesthetics.—The investigation of the nature of the aesthetic
experience. Art and its place in the normal life of the individual
and society. A brief survey of aesthetic theory with a more detailed
study of the main trends of modern thought in aesthetics. The Philosophy and Psychology 195
views of contemporary philosophers, psychologists, and artists will
be stressed. Illustrations will be drawn largely from literature and
the visual arts.
Text-books: Tolstoy, What is Art? Oxford; Rader, A Modern
Book of Aesthetics, Holt.
Three hours a week. Mr. Maslow. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
7. Philosophy of Education.—A course of lectures and discussions dealing with educational movements since the beginning of the
nineteenth century, and with the theories of life and of mind which
are implicit in these movements.
Text-books: Spencer, Education, Everyman; Dewey, Democracy
and Education, Macmillan.
References: Demiaskevich, An Introduction to the Philosophy of
Education; Jacks, The Education of the Whole Man; Martin, The
Meaning of a Liberal Education; Lodge, The Philosophy of Education; Whitehead, The Aims of Education and Other Essays; Hut-
chins, The Higher Learning in America.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
8. Logic and Scientific Method.—A general course in the fundamental problems of logic and scientific method, for students of the
natural and social sciences as well as philosophy. The function of
reason in the discovery and systematization of scientific knowledge
will be emphasized throughout the course.
Text-books: Cohen and Nagel, An Introduction to Logic and
Scientific Method, Hareourt, Brace; Lenzen, Procedures of Empirical Science, University of Chicago.
Three hours a week. Mr. Maslow. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
9. Social and Political Philosophy.—A study of modern political
theory, with emphasis upon the relation between changes in the
general current of political idea? and beliefs and changes in the
social and political structure. The leading political ideas today,
democracy and aristocracy; collectivism and individualism; socialism, communism, fascism; nationalism and pluralism. Contemporary social and political philosophy in China and in Japan. Proposals for social reconstruction in the post-war period.
Text-book: Maclver, The Modem State, Oxford. 196 Faculty of Arts and Science
Three hours a week. Mr. Irving. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
20. Philosophy of Mind.—A study of the structure and function
of mind, including the discussion of such topics as the philosophical
implications of scientific psychology, the self and personality, the
relation of body and mind, the place of mind in nature and in
society.
Text-book: Mead, Mind, Self and Society, University of Chicago.
Three hours a week. Mr. Irving. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday.
Seminar: 2.30-4.30, Thursday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
Psychology
Psychology 1 is a prerequisite for all courses in Psychology
numbered 2-20, which are open only to Third and Fourth Year
students.
A. Introduction to Psychology.—The beginnings of psychology;
psychology among the sciences and the pseudo-sciences; the fields
of psychology; adjustment to college and life; learning and study;
applications of psychology. Open to First Year students.
Text-book: To be announced.
Three hours a week. Mr. Morsh. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
1. Elementary Psychology.—Psychology as a science; the nervous system; sensation; perception; emotion; motivation; attention;
learning; thinking; intelligence; personality. This course is introductory to courses in advanced psychology. Not open to First Year
students.
Text-book: Dashiell, Fundamentals of General Psychology,
Houghton Mifflin.
Three hours a week. Mr. Irving. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
2. Experimental Psychology. — The aim of this course is to
introduce the student to the scientific method as applied to psychology. The work will include performance of individual and
group experiments involving the various sense modes, images,
illusions, motor performance, reaction time, hand-eye coordination, Philosophy and Psychology 197
attention, learning, memory, and reasoning. Open to Third and
Fourth Year students by permission of the instructor.
Text-books: Seashore, Elementary Experiments in Psychology,
Holt; Woodworth, Experimental Psychology, Holt.
References: Bills, Experimental Psychology, Longmans; Boring,
Sensation and Perception in the History of Experimental Psychology, Appleton-Century; Murehison, ed., The Foundations of Experimental Psychology, Clark University.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Morsh.
3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 2.30-4.30, Tuesday.
3. Social Psychology.—The psychological analysis of social life
from the point of view of the individual. Topics included are the
social setting of human behaviour, personality and group participation, language, suggestion, imitation, attitudes, _ stereotypes,
propaganda, rumors in wartime, crowd behaviour, social movements, leadership, the psychological effects of air-raids, and civilian
morale in wartime.
Text-book: Katz and Schanck, Social Psychology, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Irving. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
4. Psychology of Adjustment.—Origins and modification of
behaviour, motivation, varieties of adjustive behaviour, personality,
mental hygiene, guidance.
Text-book: Shaffer, The Psychology of Adjustment, Houghton
Mifflin.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Morsh. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
5. Abnormal Psychology.—The study of abnormal behaviour and
mental processes as an approach to the understanding of human
nature. The lectures will be supplemented with field trips and case
studies.
Text-book: Dorcus and Shaffer, Abnormal Psychology, 2nd edition, Williams and Wilkins. 198 Faculty of Arts and Science
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Morsh. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
6. Statistics.—Statistical methods applied to psychological investigations ; measures of central tendency and variability; correlation; the normal curve of error; sampling and reliability; the
analysis of variance and covariance; factor analysis.
Text-book: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Tyler. 3 units.
Lectures: 3.30-4.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.)
7. Applied Psychology.—The applications of psychology in the
professions, in business, and in industry; advertising; salesmanship ; personnel management; human efficiency; human motivation.
Text-book: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Three hours a week. " 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Not given in 194445.)
8. Psychology of Culture.—The psychological analysis of social
life from the point of view of culture. Topics included are the
meaning of culture, its psychological relevance for personality, its
value relativity, and the problem of reconciling personality variations and cultural variations.
Text-book: Linton, The Study of Man, Appleton-Century.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Irving. 3 units.
Lectures: 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
9. Child Psychology.—Problems and methods of child psychology, origins of behaviour, development of motor capacities,
mental functions and emotions, social development, child hygiene,
prediction, guidance, and control of child behaviour.
Text-book: To be announced.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Morsh. 3 units. Philosophy and Psychology 199
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Not given in 1944-45.)
10. Mental Measurement and Psychological Tests.—
(a) The principles underlying the construction and interpretation of various psychological measuring instruments; intelligence
tests, personality inventories, questionnaires, and application blanks.
(b) The use and interpretation of standardized psychological
measuring instruments, including the administration of the Stan-
ford-Binet intelligence examination, personality questionnaires, interest tests, and attitude scales.
It is suggested that students should take Psychology 6 before
Psychology 10.
Text-book: Thurstone, The Reliability and Validity of Tests,
Edwards.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Tyler. 3 units.
Lectures: 3.30-4.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
(Given in 1944-45 and alternate years.)
20. Psychology Seminar: The Learning Process.—This course is
offered primarily for Honours and graduate students. It is open
to a limited number of Fourth Year students by permission of the
instructor. Reports and discussions will be based on assigned
readings.
References: Bartlett, Remembering, Cambridge; Book, Economy
and Technique of Learning, Heath; Davis, Psychology of Learning,
McGraw-Hill; Ebbinghaus, Memory, Columbia; Guthrie, The Psychology of Learning, Harpers; Hilgard and Marquis, Conditioning
and Learning, Appleton-Century; Holt, Animal Drive and the
Learning Process, Holt; Meumann, The Psychology of Learning,
Appleton-Century; Pavlov, Conditioned Reflexes, Oxford; Thorn-
dike, Human Learning, Appleton-Century; Tolman, Purposive Behavior in Animals and Men, Appleton-Century; Troland, The Fundamentals of Human Motivation, Van Nostrand; Young, Motivation
of Behavior, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Psychology 1.
Three hours a week. Mr. Morsh. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday.
Seminar: 2.30-4.30, Thursday.
(Given in 1945-46 and alternate years.) 200 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of Physics
Professor and Head of the Department: Gordon Merritt Shrum.
Professor: A. E. Hennings.
Associate Professor: Harold D. Smith.
Assistant Professor: A. M. Crooker. (On leave of absence.)
Assistant Professor: Kenneth C. Mann. (On leave of absence.)
Assistant Professor: George Michael Volkoff. (On leave of absence.)
Lecturer: R. Eric Langton.
Lecturer: William Petrie.
Lecturer: R. Keith Brown.
Lecturer: J. H. L. Watson.
Lecturer: Kenneth O. Wright.
Primarily for First and Second Year Students
A. Introduction to Physics.—A course of demonstration lectures
in non-mathematical language presenting the fundamental principles of physics so that they can be understood by students who
have had no previous special training in the subject. The lectures
deal with the principles of mechanics, properties of matter, heat,
light, sound, and electricity and are supplemented by practical work
in the laboratory. The chief aim of the course is to give the minimum
acquaintance with physical science requisite for a liberal education
to those whose studies will be mainly literary. Students must reach
the required standing in both theoretical and practical work. Open
only to students who have not presented Physics for University
Entrance.
Text-book: White, Classical and Modern Physics, Van Nostrand.
Reference: Lemon, From Galileo to Cosmic Rays, University
of Chicago.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures:
Section 1, 8.30-9.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday;
Section 2, 9.30-10.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
C. Elementary Physics.—An elementary course in general
physics for students taking courses in the Department of Home
Economics. The course will cover mechanics, molecular physics,
heat, sound, light, electricity, and modern physics without stressing
their mathematical aspect. Topics which are of particular interest
in home economics will be given special emphasis.
Text-book: To be announced.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
1. Elementary Physics.—A study of general college physics suitable for those students who have obtained credit for University
Entrance Physical Sciences or its equivalent. The course covers Physics 201
the fundamental principles of mechanics, properties of matter, heat,
light, sound, electricity, and some of the more recent developments
in physics in a mOre quantitative way than Physics A.
Text-book: Stewart, Physics, A Text-book for Colleges, Ginn.
Reference: Smith, Elements of Physics, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: University Entrance Physical Sciences or Physics A.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: Section 1, 8.30-9.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday;
Section 2, 9.30-10.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday;
Section 3,10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday;
Section 4, 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, Friday.
2. General Physics.—This course in general physics is offered
primarily for those students who intend to proceed to a medical
course. The course is also suitable for those students who plan to
major in the humanities and desire a second course in physics. Concurrent with a more advanced study of general physics, special
emphasis is placed upon those topics which are most important in
medicine.
Candidates for Honours in Physics receive no credit for this
course.
References: Robertson, Radiology Physics, Van Nostrand; Stuhl-
man, Introduction to Biophysics, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Physics 1.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 11.30-12.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
3. General Physics.—This course is designed for those students
who plan to teach general science in high school and who are not
majoring in Physics. In addition to a more advanced study of
general physics than is usual in a college text, a critical study of
selected topics as presented in a number of high school texts will be
made. The laboratory period will be devoted to acquiring laboratory technique along the lines most valuable to prospective teachers.
Candidates for Honours in Physics receive no credit for this
course.
Text-book: To be announced.
Reference: Perkins, College Physics, Prentice-Hall.
Prerequisite: Physics 1.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
4. Mechanics, Molecular Physics, and Heat.—A study of statics
and dynamics of both a particle and a rigid body, the laws of gases, 2Q2 Faculty of Arts and Science
molecular theory, temperature, calorimetry, radiation laws, and
elementary thermodynamics.
Text-books: Reynolds, Elementary Mechanics, Prentice-Hall;
Allen and Maxwell, Text-book of Heat, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Physics 1.
Three lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday, Thursday, and Saturday.
Laboratory: Section 1, 1.30-4.30, Tuesday; Section 2, 1.30-4.30,
Thursday.
Primarily for Third Year Students
5. Electricity and Magnetism.—A study of the fundamentals of
magnetism and electricity, including alternating currents and
electron physics.
Text-book: Loeb, Fundamentals of Electricity and Magnetism,
2nd ed., Wiley.
Prerequisite: Physics 1.
Three lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.
Laboratory: 1.30-4.30, Monday.
6. Theoretical Mechanics.—A course in analytic and vector
mechanics of a particle and a rigid body. Among the topics
treated are central forces, vector fields, D'Alembert's Principle,
generalized coordinates, and Lagrange's equations of motion. An
introduction is given to the Principle of Least Action, Hamilton's
Principle, canonical transformations, and the Hamilton-Jacobi
equation. " ^
Text-book: Edwards, Analytic and Vector Mechanics, McGraw-
Hill.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
7. Introduction to Mathematical Physics.—A course of lectures
upon selected topics, including elasticity, viscosity, surface tension,
gravitation, heat conduction, wave motion, and hydrodynamics.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
If credit has not been obtained in Mathematics 10 and 12 they
should be taken concurrently with this course.
8. Physical Optics.—A study of geometrical and physical
optics supplemented by laboratory work, covering spectroscopy,
aberration theory, optical instruments, optical glass, photography,
interference, diffraction, polarization, reflection theory, magneto-
optics, electro-optics, and experiments on ether drift. Physics 203
Text-book: Jenkins and White, Fundamentals of Physical Optics,
McGraw-Hill.
References: Hardy and Perrin, The Principles of Optics, McGraw-
Hill ; Wood, Physical Optics, Macmillan.
Two lectures and six hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
9. Elementary Modem Physics.—A survey of the fundamental
ideas underlying modern physics. The arrangement of the material
is designed especially to suit the needs of general science teachers
and others who wish to study some of the recent developments in
physics. Analytical demonstrations, such as are given, do not involve advanced mathematics. Among the topics treated are electronic phenomena, radio and television, the nature of light and
electromagnetic radiation, X-rays, the quantum theory, spectroscopy, astrophysics, relativity, radioactivity, cosmic rays, and elementary particles.
Candidates for Honours in Physics receive no credit for this
course.
Text-book: Brown, Fundamentals of Modern Physics, Wiley.
Reference: Hull, An Elementary Survey of Modem Physics, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Physics A or 1.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Primarily foe Fourth Year Students
10. Light.—A short lecture course for students who have not
taken Physics 8. A study of optical instruments, photography,
spectroscopy, photometry, thermal radiation, refractometers, interference, diffraction, and polarised light.
References: Hardy and Perrin, The Principles of Optics, McGraw-Hill ; Gibb, Optical Methods of Chemical Analysis, McGraw-
Hill.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
11. Electricity and Magnetism. — A course dealing primarily
with the theoretical phases of electricity and magnetism, including
an introduction to the electromagnetic theory and the special
theory of relativity.
Text-book: Page and Adams, Principles of Electricity, Van
Nostrand.
References: Harnwell, Principles of Electricity and Magnetism,
McGraw-Hill; Smythe, Static and Dynamic Electricity, McGraw-
Hill.
Two lectures a week. 2 units. 204 Faculty of Arts and Science
12. Introduction to Atomic Structure.—A course of lectures
dealing with the various branches of physics which have most
directly contributed to the present status of our knowledge of
atomic structure. The topics treated include cathode and positive
rays, radioactivity, the photoelectric effect, atomic and molecular
spectra, X-rays, cosmic rays, and nuclear physics.
Text-book: Richtmyer and Kennard, Introduction to Modem
Physics, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Physics 4 and 5, and Mathematics 10.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
13. Kinetic Theory of Gases.—A course of lectures giving an
exposition of the classical deductions and an outline of recent
experimental advances of the subject.
Text-book: To be announced.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
14. Thermodynamics.—A course of lectures covering the fundamental principles of the subject.
Text-book -. Birtwistle, The Principles of Thermodynamics, Cambridge.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
17. (a) Elementary Principles of Electricity and Acoustics.—
This course is designed to aid those men enlisting in the communication and detection branches of our national defence units.
It will include the applications of fundamental principles of electricity and sound to the operation and understanding of devices
such as the telegraph, the telephone, the photo-cell, and sound
detecting apparatus.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
17. (b) Optical Instruments.—The elements of glass technology;
the calculation, manufacture, and testing of optical instruments,
including telescopes, binoculars, range-finders, searchlights, etc.;
applications of optics in photography; the use of X-rays in radiology and metallurgy.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
17. (c) Mechanics of Flight and Ballistics—The course includes
those branches of mechanics that are involved in a discussion of the
principles of flight of aeroplanes; elementary principles of hydrodynamics and aerodynamics, with special reference to stream-lining
and hull design; principles of ballistics and motion of bodies through
viscous media. Physics 205
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
Note. Courses 17 (a), (b), and (c) are open to anyone who may
profit by the lectures and demonstrations. Those requiring credit
for any of these courses must have taken Physics 4 and 5 and
Mathematics 2.
19. Experimental Physics.—This is chiefly a laboratory course
covering work in thermionics, spectroscopy, high vacua, and general
laboratory technique. Carefully prepared reports, abstracts, and
bibliographies constitute an essential part of the course.
Text-books: Hoag, Electron and Nuclear Physics, Van Nostrand;
Harnwell and Livingood, Experimental Atomic Physics, McGraw-
Hill; Strong, Procedures in Experimental Physics, Prentice-Hall.
Six hours laboratory a week. 2 or 3 units.
With the consent of the Head of the Department, Fourth Year
students may select one or more units from the following graduate
courses.
Primarily for Graduate Students
20. Spectroscopy.—A study of the excitation, observation, and
theory of optical spectra. This includes such subjects concerning
the origin of atomic and molecular spectra as spectral series, atomic
and molecular energy states, Zeeman, Paschen-Back, and Stark
Effects, etc. Also one or more lectures may be given on spectrograph^ methods in chemieal and metallurgical analysis.
1 unit.
21. Radiation and Atomic Structure.—A study of the theories
of radiation and miscellaneous related topics selected from current
literature.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
22. Electromagnetic Theory.—A study of the classical work of
Maxwell, Hertz, Lorentz, and others; the application of the theory
of relativity to electrodynamics; and recent advances.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
23. Vector Analysis.—A course of lectures upon the applications
of vector analysis to problems in physics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
24. X-rays and Crystal Structure. — A study of the modern
methods of production and observation of X-rays, the Compton
effect, X-ray analysis, and the structure of crystals.
One lecture a week. 1 unit. 206 Faculty op Arts and Science
25. Theory of Measurements.—A lecture course on the combination of observations, including a consideration of interpolation
formulae, normal frequency distributions, and least squares.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
26. Advanced Analytical Dynamics.—A lecture course on the
generalized methods of Lagrange, Hamilton, and Jacobi.
1 unit.
27. The Theory of Relativity.—An introductory course to the
theory of relativity.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
28. Quantum Mechanics. — An introduction to the theory of
quantum mechanics, and the application of wave mechanics to
atomic problems.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
29. Nuclear Physics.—An introduction to modern developments
in nuclear physics. Among topics treated are natural and artificial
radioactivity, interactions"" of various radiations with matter, artificial disintegration, and cosmic rays.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
40. Methods in High School Physics. — This course is offered
primarily for students in the Teacher Training Course and does not
carry undergraduate credit. Readings to be assigned.
Department of Zoology
Professor and Head of the Department: W. A. Clemens.
Associate Professor: G. J. Spencer.
Assistant Professor: I. McT. Cowan.
Note. Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology, except
for students proposing to take pre-medical courses.
1. General Zoology.—A course on the structure, classification,
life histories, and biology of animals.
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology.
Text-book: Hegner, College Zoology, 4th edition, Macmillan; or
Storer, General Zoology, McGraw-Hill.
References: Buchsbaum, Animals Without Backbones, University
of Chicago; Romer, Man and the Vertebrates, University of Chicago.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Clemens.
3 units. Zoology 207
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: Section 1, 1.30-3.30 Thursday;
Section 2, 3.30-5.30 Thursday;
Section 3, 2.30-4.30 Monday.
2. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.—The phylogeny and
comparative anatomy of the vertebrates and protochordates. The
dissection of representative forms.
Text-book: Neal and Rand, Chordate Anatomy, Blakiston.
Laboratory manual: Little and Kempton, A Laboratory Manual
for Comparative Anatomy, 1940, Macmillan.
References: Parker and Haswell, A Text-book of Zoology, Vol.
2, Macmillan; Goodrich, Studies on the Structure and Development
of Vertebrates, Macmillan.
Two lectures and eight hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
Mr. Cowan. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 1.30-5.30, Tuesday; 1.30-3.30, Thursday; and two
hours to be arranged.
3. Invertebrate Zoology.—A detailed course on the anatomy,
taxonomy, and life histories of the invertebrates, with special reference to marine forms.
References: Parker and Haswell, A Text-book of Zoology, Vol.
1, 6th edition, Macmillan; Hyman, The Invertebrates, McGraw-Hill;
Borradaile and others, The Invertebrata, Cambridge; Pratt, Manual
of the Common Invertebrate Animals, Blakiston; Ward and
Whipple, Freshwater Biology, Wiley.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First Term. Mr.
Clemens. 2 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Tuesday and Thursday.
Laboratory: 1.30-5.30, Tuesday.
4. Introduction to Entomology.—Morphology, classification, life
histories, and interrelation of insects; determination of common
forms.
This course is prerequisite to other courses in entomology.
Text-book: Folsom and Wardle, Entomology With Special Reference to Its Ecological Aspects, 4th edition, Blakiston; or Wardle,
General Entomology, Blakiston.
References: Comstock, An Introduction to Entomology, 9th
edition, Comstock; Essig, Insects of Western North America, Mac- 208 Faculty of Arts and Science
millan; Imms, A General Text-book of Entomology, 4th edition,
Dutton; Essig, College Entomology, Macmillan.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First Term. Mr.
Spencer. 2 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 1.30-5.30, Tuesday.
5. Histology.—Normal histology of representative human tissues
with references to and illustrations from domestic and common wild
animals. Methods in histology, fixing, embedding,' sectioning, and
staining with standard strains; the golgi method. Each student will
prepare a series of about 50 slides during the term.
Text-books: Pre-medical students are advised to purchase the
text-book adopted by the medical school they expect to attend; with
other students the selection of a text-book is optional. The following
are recommended: Maximow and Bloom, Text-book of Histology,
2nd edition, Saunders; Elwyn and Strong, Bailey's Text-book of
Histology, 8th edition, latest reprint, Wood; Bremer, A Text-book
of Histology, Blakiston; Schafer, Essentials of Histology, Lea and
Febiger; Jordan, J. Text-book of Histology, Appleton-Century.
Ten hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Spencer. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday; 10.30-11.30, Friday.
Laboratory: 2.30-5.30, Monday; 1.30-3.30, Wednesday; and three
hours to be arranged.
6. Vertebrate Embryology.—A general survey of the principles
of embryologieal development of vertebrates as exemplified by the
amphibians, birds, and mammals. The preparation and study of
chick or pig embryos.
Text-book: Huettner, Comparative Embryology of the Vertebrates, Macmillan.
Laboratory manual: Adamstone and Shumway, A Laboratory
Manual of Vertebrate Embryology, Wiley.
Two lectures and eight hours laboratory a week. First Term. Mr.
Cowan. 3 units.
Lectures: 1.30-2.30, Monday; 10.30-11.30, Friday.
Laboratory: 2.30-5.30, Monday; 1.30-3.30, Wednesday; and three
hours to be arranged.
7. Economic Entomology.—A study of the relation of insects to
man, his crops, and domestic animals; bionomics and control of
economic forms; natural control. Zoology 209
Text-books: Wardle and Buckle, The Principles of Insect Control,
Manchester University; Metcalf and Flint, Destructive and Useful
Insects, 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Wardle, The Problems of Applied Entomology, Manchester University.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
Mr. Spencer. 2 units.
Lectures: 10.30-11.30, Monday and Wednesday.
Laboratory: 1.30-5.30, Tuesday.
8. Private Reading and Seminar.—A course on the history, principles, and theories of biology.
References: Locy, Biology and Its Makers, Holt; Nordenskiold,
The History of Biology, Knopf; Darwin, Origin of Species; etc.
Assigned reading and one hour of seminar with preparation of
papers.
Time to be arranged. Mr. Clemens. 2 units.
9. Practical Entomology.—Habitat studies of local representatives of all insect orders; collecting, preserving, mounting, dissecting, and sectioning equipment and technique; clearing methods;
meteorological instruments and records; rearing methods and
equipment; the keeping and writing up of records; literature; the
elements of insect photography. Students will rear certain insects
under natural and controlled conditions, keeping full records.
References: Peterson, Manual of Entomological Equipment and
Methods, Parts I and II, Edwards; Kingsbury and Johannsen, Histological Technique, Wiley; The Meteorological Observer's Handbook, 1939 edition, H.M. Stationery Office; Culture Methods for
Invertebrate Animals, Comstock; Shelford, Laboratory and Field
Ecology, Williams and Wilkins.
Six hours a week by appointment. First Term. Mr. Spencer.
2 units.
10. Forest Entomology.—Insects in their relation to forests,
timber, and the health of camp personnel, especially in British
Columbia.
Text-book: Keen, Insect Enemies of Western Forests, U.S. Dept.
of Agr., Misc. Publ. No. 273, obtainable from University Book Store
or Supt. of Documents, Washington, D.C.
References: Doane, Van Dyke, Chamberlain, and Burke, Forest
Insects, McGraw-Hill; Graham, Principles of Forest Entomology,
2nd edition, McGraw-Hill. 210 Faculty of Arts and Science
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week by arrangement.
First Term. Mr. Spencer. 1 unit.
11. Biology of the Vertebrates.—The mammals, birds, reptiles,
amphibians, and fishes, chiefly of British Columbia; identification
of species, observational methods in study of behaviour and habitat
relations; systematics, distribution, and speciation; methods of
preservation for museum study. Field work will be emphasized.
Text-books: Allen, Birds and Their Attributes, Marshall Jones;
Hamilton, American Mammals, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week throughout the
year. Mr. Cowan. 3 units.
Lectures: 8.30-9.30, Friday.
Laboratory: 1.30-5.30, Friday.
Students intending to take this course should see Mr. Cowan in
the spring prior to the intended registration.
12. Classification and Bionomics of Fishes.—A course dealing
with (a) the classification, identification, life histories, and ecology
of fishes, with particular reference to the species of British Columbian waters; (b) problems of the commercial and sport fisheries;
(e) methods of investigation.
References: Jordan and Evermann, Fishes of North and Middle
America, 4 vols., U.S. Nat. Museum; Jordan, Fishes, Holt; Norman,
A History of Fishes, Benn.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods a week, times to be
arranged. Second Term. Mr. Clemens. 2 units.
Students majoring or taking Honours in Zoology may take the
courses Biology 2 and 3 and Geology 6 in fulfilment of credit requirements upon the approval of the Head of the Department of
Zoology. As a prerequisite for Geology 6, a reading course in historical geology may be substituted for Geology 1 and may be taken
concurrently with Geology 6.
Students are referred to pages 87 and 89 concerning Pass and
Honours courses in the Third and Fourth Years.
Courses for Graduate Students
Advanced courses correlated with the work for the major thesis
may be arranged, and the following special courses are offered.
20. Biological Methods and Procedures.—A course to acquaint
the student with the methods of dealing with research material,
use of literature, rules of nomenclature, designation of types, and
preparation of manuscripts and illustrative material. Zoology 211
One hour throughout the year. Mr. Clemens, Mr. Spencer, and
Mr. Cowan. 1 unit.
Required of all graduate students.
21. Limnology and Oceanography.—A course dealing with the
physical and chemical conditions in streams, lakes, and seas; methods
of investigation; life histories and ecology of aquatic organisms.
References: Welch, Limnology, McGraw-Hill; Needham, Life of
Inland Waters, Comstock; Harvey, Biological Chemistry and Physics of Sea Water, Macmillan; Sverdrup, The Oceans, Prentice-Hall.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week throughout the
year; times to be arranged. Mr. Clemens. 3 units.
22. Advanced Entomology.—A course leading to a better understanding of insect structure and functions. Insect morphology and
wing venation; internal anatomy and histology; taxonomy; the
physiology of insects.
References: Imms, Recent Advances in Entomology, latest
edition, Blakiston; Snodgrass, Principles of Insect Morphology,
McGraw-Hill; MacGillivray, External Insect Anatomy, Scarab;
Comstock, The Wings of Insects, Comstock; Ferris, The Principles
of Systematic Entomology, Stanford; Wigglesworth, The Principles
of Insect Physiology, Dutton; Uvarov, Insect Nutrition and Metabolism, Trans. Ent. Soc. of London.
Lectures and laboratory, four hours a week, both terms, by
appointment. Mr. Spencer. 3 units.
23. Economic Vertebrate Zoology.—Lectures, seminar, and laboratory study of the economically important birds and 'mammals of
British Columbia, particularly with respect to their parasites, diseases, food habits, and biology, and the principles involved in the
intelligent use of these resources.
Text-book: Leopold, Game Management, Scribners.
Prerequisite: Zoology 11.
Lectures, seminar, and laboratory, four hours a week, throughout
the year. Hours to be arranged. Mr. Cowan. 3 units. THE
FACULTY
OF
APPLIED SCIENCE
(ENGINEERING; NURSING AND HEALTH)
THIRTIETH SESSION
1944-1945 TIME TABLE
FACULTY OF
Key to Buildings: A, Arts; Ag.- Agriculture; Ap, Applied
Monday
Section*
or
Course
Room
Tuesday
Section*
or
Course
Room
Wednesday
Section*
or
Course
Room
Math. 2
Math. 8
a, b, c
d, e,f
a, b
c
5,S
6
6
2, 7, 8
1
2
h
6
S,6
7
Ap204
Ap202
S210
Ap235
Apl20
Me 111
Me 111
Me 132
S413
Me 109
Ap 205
Ap 102
Me 208
M204
Math. 8 _...
Math. 4
a, b, c
d, e, f
a, b, c, d
1,2,3,4
6,7,8
l,S,6
6, 7,8
h
h
Ap204
Ap202
AplOO
Ap208
AglOO
Ap235
Ap 235
Phys. 4
CE. 30
b
d, e,f
a, 6, c, d
c
1, 7,8
3,6
5,8
1
2
5
s,e
7
S212
Ap208
S300
Ap28«
Eng 4
F.E.1(c)
Geol. 4
M.E. 8t
M.E. 5§
M.E 6
CE. 81
CE. 10(a)
C.E. 18
Chem. 2(b)
F.E.1(c)
E.E. 1
o
E.E. 2
CO
Bot. 7(a)f_
F.E. 16§
Geol. 4
Apl20
Ap 210
00
C.E. 10(a)
C.E. 22
Chem. 16(a).
C.E. 28
F.E. 16§
Geol. 11..
M.E. 15
Met. 8(a) .
Ap216
Apl02
Geol. 11
M.E. 15
Met. 7
M204
C.E. 80
a, b, c
d, e,f
a, b, c, d
l
2, 7, 8
8, 6
1
2
h
h
8
6
6,7,8
Ap208
S210
Ap 100
S800
Me 132
Me 109
S413
Ap 216
AP235
AP235
Me 208
Me 210
M204
Phys. 4
a, b.c
d, e, f
c, d
2,4
3, 6
1. «, 7, 8
h
1
2
k s< e A
S,7,8
Ap 100
Ap 202
Ap 216
Me 109
Apl02
Ap235
S413
Ap237
Me 208
M204
Phys. 4
b
d,e,f
a, b, c, d
1
2,4
8
6
6
5, 7,8
1
2
2
3
6
5
7
8
h
U
S 212
Eng. 8
Geol. 1
Eng. 4
C.E. 8
E.E. 3
Geol. 2
F.E 14
Chem. 9
C.E. 19
M.E. 15
Met. 2 .1
CE. 30
Ap 208
Ap 100
S 800
Geol. 1
Chem. 3
C.E. 8
M.E. 6
Ap210
M.E. 7
E.E. 5
Chem. 16(a).
C.E. 22
M.E. 8t
M.E. 58
o
CO
•
F.E. 6t
F.E. 10§
E.E. 11
Mining 1
Chem.l6(a)..
C.E. 24t
C.E.298
E.E. 11
M206
S413
Ap 237
Ap 216
E.E. 14
E.E. 14
Me 210
Ap 120
M204
Ap235
Ap235
Geol. 6
Met. 3(b)
Mining 4
F.E. 6t
F.E.108
C.E. 30
a, b, c
a, b, c, d
5
8, 6 J
2, 7, 8, "-I
1
1
2
S
h
k
6,8
6
Ap208
Ap 202
Ap 100
Me 109
Me 182
S 413
AP216
Me 208
Ap 285
Ap 285
Ap 120
Me 210
Math. 4
a, b, c
d, e, f
a, b, c, d
1,5, 7
2
3
4
6
6
5, 7.8
1
2
S
A
&
6
8
Ap204
Ap202
S 200
S 400
Ap 216
Me 109
Ap 235
Me 111
Me 111
M206
S413
Ap237
Me 208
Me 210
M204
b
d, e. f
a, o, c,d
5
2, 7,8
3, 6
1
2
2
S
h
h
6,8
6
7
S212
Ap208
Ap 202
Ap 100
Math. 6
Biol. 1
Math. 2
C.E. 4
Math. 7
M.E. 4
M.E. 6
Chem. 4
C.E. 14
E.E. 5
F.E2(c)t
M.E. 8t
M.E. 5§
Mining 1
Chem. 8
C.E. 23
E.E. 9
F.E. 88
F.E. lit
M.E. 16
Mining 4
Biol. 1
M.E. 6
Phys. 10
Chem. 7 _..
C.E. 22
E.E. 12
M.E. 7
o
CO
•
Chem. 7
C.E. 25t
C.E. 298
E.E. 12 _...
F.E. 8§
Ap237
Ap216
Me 208
Ap 285
Ap235
Ap 120
o
F.E. 88
I-H
F.E. lit
Geol. 8
M.E. 19
F.E. lit
Geol. 8
M.E. 16
Met. 8(b)
C.E. 8
C.E. 6
a, b, c
d, e, f
a, b, c, d
2,4
1, 8, 6, 7p
5,7,8
2
4
h
S
6
f, 7c, 8
Ap 100
Ap 202
Ap 237
Ap204
M. 206
Ap 216
Ap285
Ap235
Me 208
Me 210
M204
Bot. 1(b)
Eng. 3
Phys. 5
M.E. 6
M.E. 7
Geol. 5
Chem. 6
C.E. 22
F.E. 58
F.E. 7t -...
Geol. 12
E.E. 8t
M.E. 148
Mining 2
C
d, e, f
a, b, c, d
2,7,8
8,0
S
1
2
h
h
5
S
S
6,8
AplOl
Ap 100
S 200
Me 111
Me 109
Ap 106
S 413
Ap216
AP235
AP235
Ap 102
Me 208
Me 208
M204
Eng. 8
a, b, e
d, e, t
a, b, c, d
2
1, 3, 6, 7p
6,1
2
h
k
5
6,8
8
Ap 100
Ap208
Ap202
Ap 216
Ap204
Me 109
AP216
Ap2S«
Ap285
Ap 102
M204
M204
CE. 4
C.E. 6 ...
CE. 11
C.E. 17
Math. 8...- _.
M.D. 1
Math. 8
o
CO
•
Met. 1(c) S
C.E. 298
F.E. 7t
C.E. 17
F.E. 3t
F.E. Ǥ..
E.E. 13
l-H
Bot. 6(b) 8
Geol. 68
Mining 5t
Mining 78
M.E. 19
Mining 3
* t 8 See footnote at end of Time Table. .-.1944-1945
APPLIED SCIENCE
Science; M, Mining; Me, Mechanical; S, Science.
Thursday
Section*
or
Course
Room
Friday
Section*
or
Course
Room
Saturday
Section*
or
Course
Room
Math. 2
a, b, c
d, e, f
a, o, c, d
1, 2, 3, 4
6,7,8
»,S,5
6, 7,8
A
A
Ap204
Ap202
Ap 100
Ap208
AglOO
Ap285
Ap285
Math. 3
a, b, c
d, e, f
a, b
d
c
1,7,8
1, 3, 6, 7p
2
A
S
6
S, 7c, 8
Ap204
Ap202
Ap212
S205
Ap235
Me 111
Me 109
Ap287
Ap 205
Me 208
Me 210
M204
Phys. 4
Chem. 2(a)
c
d, e, f
1
2,4
8,6
8,6
5,7,8
5, 7,8
1,7
A
6
S212
S311,
815
S415
Ap287
S118
Ap205
Me 210
Math. 4
C.E. 10(a)
CE. 18...
Bot. 7(a) t ....
F.E. 1(c)
E.E 1 _
Math. 8
C.E.25t
F.E. 16§
M.E. 148
M.E. 17
Mining 3,
CE. 8t _.
E.E. 2t
E.E. 88...-
Met. 5t
o
C9
•
CO
Chem. 8(b)...
F.E. 15t
Phys. 4
a, b, c
d, e, f
2, 4, a
3, 6
1, 5, 7, 8
1
2
S
A
A
6
6
7
Ap 100
Ap210
Me 109
Apl02
S413
Ap287
Me 208
Ap285
Ap285
Ap 120
Me 210
M204
a, b, c
d, e, f
a, b
d
2,3,4,5,6,7,8
1
%
A
A
3
6
6
7
Ap 100
Ap 212
S 205
Ap202
S118
Ap216
Ap285
Ap 285
Me 208
Apl06
, Me 210
c
d, e, t
a, b
c, d
1
2,4
4
3, 6
3, 6
5,7,8
5, 7, 8
1, 7
A
6
S212
S311,
315
Ap212
Ap208
S415
Ap287
Ap205
S118
Ap 205
Me 210-
C.E. 5
Chem. 2(a)...
C.E. 1
Geol. 2
C.E. 12(a)
Chem. 16(b)..
C.E. 25
C.E. 8t
F.E. 6t
F.E. 108
E.E. 9 _.
Geol. 7
F.E. 2(b) 8 .
E.E. 2t
E.E. 38
Met. 5t
F.E. at
F.E. 108
o
•
o>
M.E. 188 _
Met. 3(a)
Met. 68
Chem. 8(b)
F.E.15t
a, b, c
d, e, f
a, b, c, d
1,6, 7
8
6
6
5, 7, 8
1
Ii
2, 2, 4
3
6
Ap 204
Ap202
S200
S400
Ap210
Ap210
M 206
S 413
Ap 205
Ap287
Me 208
Me 210
a, b, c
d, e, f
a, b
d
3, 6
5, 6, 7, 8,
5, 7, 8
1
t
S
A
A
6,8
e
7
Ap 100
Ap208
Ap 212
S205
Me 109
Me 111
M 204
S118
Ap216
Me 208
Ap 285
Apl20
Me 210
c
d, e, f
a, b
c, d
1
2,4
4
3, 6
8, 6
5, 7, 8
5, 7, 8
1, 7
2
A
6
S212
S.811,
315
Ap212
Ap208
S415
Ap287
Ap205
S418
Me 210
C.E. 30
C.E. 5
Chem. 2(a)...
C.E. 1
Phys. 5
E.E. 2
M.E. 8t
Met,l(a)t
Met. Kb) 8
Chem. 18(b)
C.E. 25t
Chem. 8
C.E. 8t
o
CO
F.E. 2(b)8
Chem. 8
Bot. 6(b)S
o
F.E.lit
F.E. 88
1—1
Met. 68
M.E. 11
M.E. 18§
F.E.15t
Bot. 1 (b)
Chem. 2(a)...
c
d, e, f
a, b, c, d
8
4
6
6
5, «, 7, 8
5, 7, 8
1
2
A
h
6
8
Ap 101
S 300
S 200
Ap 285
Ap 210
Ap210
Me 109
M206
S418
Ap216
Ap 285
Ap205
Ap 102
M206
Chem. 2(a)
a, b, c
d, e, f
a, b, c, d
2, 4
3,6
5,8
7
1
2
e
3
A
7
ssoo
Ap 208
Ap202
Me 111
Me 109
Ap 120
M 116
S118
Ap 216
Me 210
Me 208
Ap 235
C.E. 81..-.
C.E. 1 -
S'.E. 2(b) 8
Chem. B
C.E. 27
a, b
c,d
4
1
t
Ap208
Ap212
Ap205
S418
Math. 6
C.E. 14
F.E. 2(c) t
M.E. 8t
M.E. 58
Met. l(a)t
Met. 1(b) 8
Chem. 6..
C.E. 17
Met. 1(c) 8
Chem. 16(b)..
C.E. 25t
M.E. 11
o
CO
•
1—1
1—1
F.E. 58
Bot. 6(b) 8
Geol. 12
Mining 2 ... TIME TABLE
Monday
Section*
or
Course
Room
Tuesday
Section*
or
Course
Room
Wednesday
Section*
or
Course
Room
M.E. 1
Chem. 2(b)...
C.E. 5
d,e,f
a, b
c,d
1
2, 8, 4, 5
6, 7,8
2
1
4
A
6
6
7,8
6a
3
Ap208
S311
Ap212
S413
Ap202
Ap216
S411
Ap205
Ap 205
Apl02
Me 210
M 116
El 120
C.E. 4
a, b, c
a
c, d
1
2,3,4
6, 7, 8
5
1
2
A
A
5
6
7,8
3
Ap208
S205
Ap 120
S411
S816
Ap216
Ap 205
Ap205
Ap 106
Me 132
Chem. 2(a) ..
Phys. 4
a, b, c
d
b
c, d
2, i
5
1, 7,8
2
2
6
6b
A
4
8
SSll,
Geol. 1
Chem. 4
C.E. 10 a-b
Biol. 1 -
Chem. 9
C.E. 298
F.E. 6t
CE. 1
Ap 212
Ap214
Ap216
Ap216
Ap 106
C.E. 17..-
Chem. 7 _
F.E. 2(c)t
F.E. 188
Geol. 11 —
M.E. 16
M.D. 8
Met. 1(c) 8
C.E. 14
o
CO
•
l-H
Geol. 108
E.E. 1
CE. 25t
C.E. 178 -
Geol. 7
Met. 8
M.E. 10
Met. 1(c) 8
Zool. 10t
F.E.158
Geol. 3t
M 116
Apl20
a
d, e, f
a, b
c, d
1
2, 3, 4, 5
6,7,8
2
1
S
4
A
6
7,8
6a
S212
Ap208
S311
Ap212
S415
Ap202
Ap216
S 411
El 120
Ap205
AP205
Me 210
M 116
C.E. 4
a, b, c
a
c, d
1
5
2, 8, 4 j
6, 7, 8 1
1
3
A
A
5 ^
6
7,8
Ap208
S205
Ap 120
S411
SS16
Ap205
Ap205
Ap 106
Me 132
Chem. 2(a)...
Phys. 4
Phys. 5
C.E. 1
Geol. I0§
E.E. 1
C.E. 25t
Geol. 7
Met. 1(c) 8
Met. 8
a, b, c
d
6
c, d
5
1, 7, 8
2
5
66
7
A
2
A
8
S311,
Phys. 5
315
Chem. 2(b)
C.E. 5
Geol. 1
Chem. 4
Biol. 1
C.E. 10 a-b .„
Chem. 9
E.E. 11...
S205
o
Chem. 5
C.E. 12
Ap 212
Ap 120
Ap 216
m
Chem. 7
Apl06
C4
M 116
F.E. 2(c)t .
F.E.138 .
F.E. 8§
Geol. 7
M.E. 10
Zool. 10t
C.E. 178
F.E. 158
Geol. 8t
Ap 105
M.D. 8
Met. 1(c) 8
Apl20
a
d, e, f
a, b
c, d
1
2, 3, 4, 5
6, 7, 8
A
I
2
3
A
6
7,8
6a
S 212
Ap208
SSll
Ap212
S415
Ap202
Ap205
S411
Ap216
El 120
Ap 205
Me 210
M 116
C.E. 30
V a, b, c
a
1
> 2, 3, 4
6, 7,8
1
3
A
A
6
6
Ap208
S205
S411
S816
Ap205
Ap205
Ap 106
Me 132
Chem. 2(a)...
a, b, c
d
6
c, d
2
A
6b
7
A
2
S 311,
Chem. 2(b)...
C.E. 5
Chem. 4
C.E. 10 a^b
S212
Phys. 5
S 205
C.E. 1
C.E. 25t
F.E. 158
Met. l (e) 8
Bot. 7(a) t
Chem. 7
o
F.E. 6t
CO
F.E. 88
C9
Zool. 10t
C.E.17§
F.E. 138
M.D. 8
Met. 1(c) 8
a
1
2, 8, 4, 5,
6, 7,8
3
A
6
7,8
2
S 212
S415
Ap 202
El 120
Ap205
Me 210
Ap216
C.E. 30
CE. lObt
Chem. 9
a, b, c
2, 3, 4,
6, 7, 8
1
A
6
Ap 208
Ap202
S 316
Ap 205
Me 182
Chem. 5
o
CO
E.E. 12
Bot. 7(a) t
•
C.E. 178
* Sections—Second Year—a, b, c d, e, f.
Third Year—a, b, c, d.
t First term only.
8 Second term only.
Note.—Second Year Forest Engineering students register
in Section c.
Third Year Forest Engineering students register in
Section c. —Continued
* Courses—1 Chemical Engineering.
2 Civil Engineering.
8 Electrical Engineering.
4 Forest Engineering.
5 Geological Engineering.
6 Mechanical Engineering.
7 Metallurgical Engineering.
8 Mining Engineering.
Fifth year course numbers shown in italics.
Thursday
Section*
or
Course
Room
Friday
Section*
or
Course
Room
Phys. 4
Geol. 1
e
a, b
c
l
2, 4, 8
3a, 6a
6b
5,7,8
5,7,8
2
1
6
U
A
6, 7c
3
7p
S212
Ap 120
S205
S318
Ap210
Me 132
Ap216
S118
Ap205
Ap205
Ap 110
Me 208
M 116
M.E. 1
a, b, c
f
a, b
c, d
2,4
3, 6
3,6
1, 5, 7, 8
1, 5, 7, 8
1
3
A
A
8
7
6a
Ap208
S 212
Ap 212
S311
Ap237
Ap 110
Ap 110
S118
Me 208
Ap205
Ap205
Ap 120
Phys. 5
C.E. 31
Chem. 2(b).
C.E. 9
M.E. 7
E.E. 2t
Met. 5t
Geol. 2(a) t-
Geol. 2(b)S-.
Chem. 16(b).
E.E. 7
F.E. 108 . ..
F.E.lit
Geol. 3
M.D. 28
C.E. 24
o
CO
Chem. 16(b)
E.E. 14
■—i
F.E. 2(a)t
F.E. 58
Geol. 9
E.E. 10
M.E. 82
Phys. 4
e
a, b
c
1
2,4,8
8a, 6a
6b
5, 7, 8
5,7,8
2
1
3
6
A
A
5, 7c
7V
S212
Ap 120
S205
S318
Ap210
Me 132
Ap216
S118
Me 208
Ap205
Ap205
Ap 110
M 116
M.E. 1
a, b, c
f
a, b
c, d
2,4
2, 4
3,6
3, 6
1, 5, 7, 8
1, 5, 7, 8
1
3
It
A
6,8
6a
7
Ap 208
S 212
Ap212
S311 ,
Ap210
Ap 210
Ap 110
Ap 110
S118
Me 208
Ap 205
Ap 205
Apl20
Geol. 1
Phys. 4
C.E. 81
Phys. 5
Chem. 2(b)
C.E. 13t
C.E. 158
E.E. 2t
C.E. 9
M.E. 7
M.E. 31
Met. 5t
M.D. 28
Geol. 2(a)t...
Geol. 2(b) 8-
Chem. 16b
CO
C.E. 24
Chem. 16(b).
.E.E. 10
C-4
E.E. 14
F.E.108
F.E. lit
F.E. 2(a)t
F.E. 5§
M.E. 82
Met. 9
Bot. 1(b)
c
e
c
1
2, 4,8
3b, 6b
6a
5, 7, 8
5, 7, 8
1
2
6
A
A
5, 7c
5
7p
AplOl
S212
S205
S 318 ,
Ap 210 1
Me 132
S118
Ap216
Ap205
Ap 205
Ap 110
Ap 120
M 116
M.E. 1
a, b, c
f
a, b
c, d
2, 4
5, 8
2, 4
3,6
3,6
7
1
3
h
A
7
6b
Ap 208
S212
Ap 212
S311
Ap 210
Ap 210
Ap 210
S 118
Me 208
Ap205
Ap205
Phys. 4
Phys. 5
Chem. 3
C.E. 9 _
C.E. 31
Chem. 2(b)...
CE. 13t
C.E. 138
C.E. 158
M.E. 7
M.E. 31
Met. 5t
o
C9
M.D. 28
Chem. 16(b)..
C.E. 24
Met. 1(c) 8
Chem. 16(b)..
CO
E.E. 14
F.E. 2(a) t
F.E. 58
F.E 108
F.E. lit
Geol. .9
Bot. 1(b)
c
2, 4, 8
8b, 6b
6a
5, 7,8
5, 7, 8
1
6
t
Ap 101
Ap 210
Me 132
S118
Ap 120
Ap 216
C.E. 13t
C.E. 13§
C.E. 158 -
Met. 1(0 8 ....
Chem. 16(b)
2, 4
5, 8
2,4
7
1
3
A
A
6b
Ap210
Ap210
Ap210
S118
Me 208
Ap205
Ap205
M.E. 7
M.E. 81
Met. 5t
o
CO
M.D. 28
«
Chem. 16(b)
F.E.108
F.E.lit
M.E. 82
C.E. 248 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
FOREWORD
The object of the courses in Applied Science is to train students
in exact and fertile thinking, and to give them a sound knowledge
of natural laws and of the means of utilizing natural forces and
natural products for the benefit of man and the advancement of
civilization. Experience shows that such a training is the best yet
devised for a large and increasing proportion of the administrative,
supervisory, and technical positions. '
The object, then, is to turn out, not finished engineers or
industrial leaders—these are the product of years of development
in the school of experience—but young men with a special capacity
and training for attaining these goals, and thus for helping to
develop the industries of the Province. Consequently the undergraduate course is made broad and general rather than narrow and
highly specialized. 1 ^
Furthermore, such a course is not only better suited to the
British Columbia conditions that the graduate will encounter in his
after-life, but also better for later specialization, for it furnishes
a more solid foundation, a better background, a broader outlook,
and a more stimulating atmosphere, all necessary if the specialist
is to achieve the maximum results of which he is capable.
The student is offered a full undergraduate course and an additional year of graduate study. The First Year is intended to
increase the student's general knowledge and to broaden his outlook.
It is hoped that enough interest will be aroused to encourage the
student to continue some study of the humanities as a hobby or
recreation.
The Second and Third Years in Applied Science are spent in a
general course that includes mathematics and all the basic sciences.
This gives not only a broad training, but enables the student to
discover the work for which he has special liking or aptitude and
to select more intelligently the subjects in which to specialize
during the final two years. During these two years students
acquire more detailed knowledge and get practice in applying
scientific principles and knowledge, in solving problems, in doing
things; and there is also training in economics, law, and industrial
management.
During the long period between sessions, the student is required
to engage in some industrial or professional work that will afford
practical experience not obtainable in the laboratory or field classes,
but that is a necessary supplement to academic study. 220 Faculty of Applied Science
An engineering degree in the Applied Science Course of the
University is accepted by the Association of Professional Engineers
of the Province of British Columbia in lieu of two of the six
years' practical experience required by the Engineering Act of the
Province for registration to practise engineering.
Students are advised to register with the Association of Professional Engineers of British Columbia in their Third Year; and
to associate themselves with the appropriate engineering societies.
ADMISSION
The general requirements for admission to the University are
given on pages 32-34.
As for Arts, complete University Entrance or its equivalent is
required for admission to Applied Science, and no student may
enter with any supplemental outstanding in University Entrance.
No student with defective standing will be admitted either to
the Second or to the Third Year in Applied Science.
The Faculty reserves the right of selection and admission of the
students entering the Second Year of the Combined Course and
the Third Year of the Double Course in Nursing. Applications
for admission to the Second Year in Nursing, or to the Third Year
in the Double Course in Arts and Science and Nursing, must be
made to the Registrar on or before August 15th. Application to
the associated hospital school of nursing must be completed before
that date.
Candidates who expect to complete the requisite entrance standing through University or Senior Matriculation supplemental
examinations, held in August or September, may apply for admission as specified above and their applications will be considered
subject to the results of these examinations.
Admission to the Second Year in Applied Science may be granted
to students who have fulfilled the requirements of the First Year,
as outlined below, by Senior Matriculation or similar work taken
outside of the University; but students who are considering entering Applied Science are recommended to take the First Year at
the University because in the opinion of the Faculty it is highly
desirable for students to have a year's experience at the University
before entering Second Year Applied Science.
This experience includes special orientation lectures, contact
with Arts students, with Applied Science senior students, with
specialists, with college organizations, and generally with the
University methods and adjustments which prepare them to attack
the difficult and heavy work of the Second Year efficiently from the Admission 221
outset, or to select another University course, if desired, on the basis
of a year's experience and without loss of time.
For requirements for admission to courses in Nursing and
Health, see pages 242 and 248.
DEGREES
The degrees offered students in this Faculty are:
Bachelor of Applied Science (B.A.Sc). (See below.)
Bachelor of Science in Forestry (B.S.F.). (See page 232.)
Master of Applied Science (M.A.Sc). (See page 249.)
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.Sc.
The degree of Bachelor of Applied Science is granted on the
completion of the work in one of the courses* given below:
1. Chemical Engineering.
2. Civil Engineering.
3. Electrical Engineering.
4. Forest Engineering.
5. Geological Engineering.
6. Mechanical Engineering.
7. Metallurgical Engineering.
8. Mining Engineering.
9. Nursing and Health.
Double courses are offered in Arts and Science and Applied
Science leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc. (Engineering),
B.A. and B.A.Sc. (Nursing), B.A. and B.S.F., and B.Com. and
B.S.F. For the regulations governing these, see the section Double
Courses, at the end of the Calendar.
The Double Course leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc.
(Engineering) is strongly recommended to students who are young
enough to afford the time and to students wishing to enter Applied
Science, and who have to their credit some, but not all, of the
requirements of First Year Applied Science as set forth on page
223. The latter can select subjects in their Second Year Arts that
will satisfy the Arts requirements for the double degree, and at the
same time complete the work of First Year Applied Science. Thus
they may qualify for an Arts degree without expending any more
time than would be required to qualify them for entrance into
Second Year Applied Science.
*The curriculum described in the following pages may be changed from time to
time as deemed advisable by the Senate. 222 Faculty of Applied Science
PRACTICAL WORK OUTSIDE THE
UNIVERSITY
In order to master professional subjects it is very important
that the work done at the University should be supplemented by
practical experience in related work outside. Therefore students
are expected to spend their summers in employment that will give
such experience.
Before a degree will be granted, a candidate is required to
satisfy the department concerned that he has done at least four
months' practical work related to his chosen profession. Fourth
and Fifth Year essays (see page 225) should be based, as far as
possible, upon the summer work.
Upon approval of the Dean and the head of the department
concerned, University credit may be granted for work done outside
the University under the immediate supervision of the University
staff, during the University session.
Practical work such as shop-work, freehand drawing, mechanical drawing, surveying, etc., done outside the University may
be accepted in lieu of laboratory or field work (but not in lieu of
lectures) in these subjects, on the recommendation of the head
of the department and approval of the Dean. Students seeking
exemption as above must make written application to the Dean,
accompanied by certificates indicating the character of the work
done and the time devoted to it.
OPENING OF SESSION
It is essential to the success of the student that he should be in
attendance at the opening of the session, for, in order to allow as
much time as possible for practical work in the summer, the length
of the session has been reduced to the minimum consistent with the
ground to be covered. Consequently a student requires the full
session to master the work. A mere pass standing is a very unsatisfactory preparation for subsequent work or professional life.
Further, from this standpoint, the opening work is the most important of the whole session for the student, for in it are given the
general instructions necessary for the proper attack upon the work.
The only exception is when the summer employment affords
experience necessary for the course in which the student is specializing, and when it will lighten to some extent the work of the
session (such as in Geological Survey field work for geological
students) and then only provided the nature of this work makes it
impossible for the student to reach the University on the opening Courses in Applied Science 223
day. Under these circumstances, if the student furnishes a statement from his employer showing that it was impossible for him to
release the student earlier, the Dean may allow the student to enter
without penalty as to class attendance. The student must, however,
register at the opening of the session in accordance with the regulations in reference to registration.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS
A student with supplementals must write them off at the regular
time for supplemental examinations before the opening of the
session, for he will need the entire session for the current year's
work. It is also necessary, for a successful year, to have a satisfactory knowledge of the foundational work of the preceding year.
No exceptions to the above rule will be granted except as under
paragraph 2, above. See regulations 4 and 5, page 251.
GENERAL OUTLINE OF UNIVERSITY COURSES
Students desiring to enrol in Nursing and Health register for
the First Year in Arts and Science and take the special course
outlined on pages 243-244; students desiring to enrol in the Double
Course for the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc, register for the first
two years in Arts and Science and take the courses outlined on
pages 317-318. All other students of Applied Science except those
in Forest Engineering have a general course common to all for the
first three years as under.
FIRST YEAR
For admission to the Faculty of Applied Science the course in
Physical Sciences in University Entrance is required.
The students register in Arts and Science, and take the following
classes as Arts students:
English 1 (a and b).
Mathematics 1.
Chemistry 1.
Physics 1.
Latin 1 or French 1 or Beginners' German*.
The passing grade is 60 per cent in Mathematics, Chemistry, and
Physics and 50 per cent in the other subjects.
♦Applied Science students are advised to take Beginners' German. 224
Faculty of Applied Science
Students in Nursing and Health are required to obtain a grade
of 60 per cent in either Biology or Chemistry; for all other subjects
a grade of 50 per cent will be accepted.
No student with defective standing will be admitted to Second
Year Applied Science.
A reading knowledge of French and German is desirable for
students in Engineering.
Students who have passed First Year Arts and Science, but who
have failed to make the necessary entrance requirements for the
Second Year Applied Science, may take the September supplemental examinations of Arts and Science.
First Year students are advised to attend the noon-hour talks
on the choice of a profession and on the life and work in various
callings likely to be selected by Applied Science graduates, as these
may assist the student in determining whether Applied Science is
the best course for him. If he finds it is not, he can proceed in Arts
without any loss of time.
The work of the Second and Third Years is the same in all
courses, except those in Nursing and Health and Forest Engineering.
SECOND YEAR
Subject
First Term
■5*
1 « u
Second Term
■S °-*
;- u CD
5-°
Math. 2 Trigonometry and Solid
Geometry
Math. 3 Algebra
Math. 4 Calculus
M.E. 1 Drawing 1
Physics 4(a) Mechanics
Physics 4(b) Heat
*Chem. 2(a) Qual. Analysis
C.E. 2 Surveying
C.E. 3 General Engineering
C.E. 4 Graphical Statics
C.E. 30 Engineering Problems
English 3 Composition
■fBot. 1(b) General Forest Botany.
270
270
270
271
286
286
253
256
256
256
262
263
253
1
Field
1
3
Work
NOTE.—The sum of $8.00 as caution money must be deposited before Field Work
in C.E. 2.
*Not required for Forestry students.
tFor Forestry students only. Courses in Applied Science
225
THIRD YEAR
No student with defective standing will be admitted to the Third
Year of Applied Science.
Subject
First Term
Second Term
t/i
•OS
11
il
o ®
gas
■§§*
3*
H
5%
S 60 «
£ U 4)
is*
225
270
3
3
271
2
2
254
1
3
1
3
286
2
3
2
3
256
3
3
256
3
3
257
2
2
257
Field
Work
262 1
2
3
2
3
268
2
2
2
2
271
275
Summer Term
263
1
1
264
3
3
Essay
Math. 6 Calculus
Math. 7 Geometry
*Chem. 2(b) Quan. Analysis
Physics 5 Electricity
CE. 1 Descriptive Geometry
C.E. 5 Mapping
C.E. 6 Surveying
tC.E. 7 Surveying
C.E. 31 Mechanics and Engineering
Problems
Geology 1 General
tM.E. 2 Mechanical Drawing
tM.E. 30 Machine Shop Practice
English 4 Technical Writing
§F.E. 1(c) General Forestry
NOTE.—The sum of $8.00 caution money must be deposited before Survey School
opens.
*Not required for Forestry students.
tStudents entering Civil, Forest, Geological, and Mining Engineering are required
to take Civil Engineering 7 (see page 257) immediately after the spring examinations.
{Students entering Chemical, Electrical, Mechanical, and Metallurgical Engineering
are required to take M.E. 2 and M.E. 30 (see pages 271 and 275) immediately after
the spring examinations.
SFor Forestry students only.
THIRD, FOURTH, AND FIFTH YEARS
Essays
Students entering the Third Year are required to submit an
essay of not less than 1,000 words. This should take the form of a
scientific report based preferably upon original observations made
during the summer. Any suitable subject, however, may be chosen.
Emphasis will be placed upon the precise and accurate use of
English, but credit will also be given to subject matter, form, and
illustrations. If the essay is not up to the standard of a pass mark
in English, it will be returned for re-writing. One copy only is
required, which may be retained for future reference by the department most interested. 226 Faculty of Applied Science
Essays are required of all students entering the Fourth and
Fifth Years, except that the essay is optional for students entering
Fifth Year Chemical Engineering and is not required of students
entering Fifth Year Geological Engineering. The following regulations should be observed.
1. The essay shall consist of not less than 2,000 words.
2. Two copies shall be submitted in properly bound form. Only one
copy need contain maps and illustrations.
3. The essay shall be a technical description of the engineering
aspects of the work on which the student was engaged during the
summer, or of any scientific or engineering work with which he
is familiar. In the preparation of the essay, advantage may be
taken of any source of information, but due acknowledgment must
be made of all authorities consulted. It should be suitably illustrated by drawings, sketches, photographs, or specimens.
4. The essays shall be typewritten, or clearly written on paper of
substantial quality, standard letter size (8%xll inches), on one
side of the paper only, leaving a clear margin on top and left-
hand side. Every student shall submit a duplicate copy of his
essay, for the correction of English. If typewritten, essays must
be "double-spaced." Students are recommended to examine
sample reports to be found in the departments and also copies
of Masters' theses in the library.
5. The latest date for receiving graduating essays in the Second
Term shall be the last day of lectures; and the corresponding
date for the Autumn Congregation shall be October 1. All other
essays shall be handed in to the Dean not later than November 15.
6. In the Final Year, students in Nursing and Health will be
required to submit a graduating essay, or to present a seminar,
covering an original study based upon experiences gained during
the academic and professional years, and developed from topics
assigned by the Department early in the year. All essays must
be handed in, or seminars presented, during the Second Term.
All essays, when handed in, become the property of the department concerned, and are filed for reference. A duplicate copy may
be submitted in competition for the students' prizes of the Engineering Institute of Canada, or the Canadian Institute of Mining and
Metallurgy.
Essays will be considered as final Christmas examinations. A
maximum of 100 marks is allowed, the value being based on pre- Courses in Applied Science
227
sentation, English, and matter. In Fourth Year essays, presentation, that is, the manner in which the matter is arranged and presented to the reader, is given greatest weight, with English second
and matter third. In Fifth Year essays greatest emphasis is
placed on matter, but consideration is also given to presentation
and English.
COURSES
1. Chemical Engineering
The cohrse in Chemical Engineering has been planned to prepare
the student for the task of designing, constructing, or operating a
chemical plant. As such he must not only be conversant with the
chemical processes involved, but be prepared to design and to
oversee the construction of new buildings and to direct the installation and use of machinery. Hence the course of study includes,
especially in the first three years, a number of courses in the older
branches of engineering. In the Fourth Year the student receives
an introduction to the principles of chemical engineering proper,
and in the Fifth Year the advanced part of the subject is undertaken. During these years the maximum amount of chemical
training allowed by the time at the disposal of the student is given
in inorganic, organic, and physical chemistry.
-k Fourth Year
n
&H CO
First Term
Second Term
Subject
TO ^J
•-1 a
o « .
"3 ^
g GO h
•-* a
l§*
TO _fl
8*.
IF
225
CE. 17 Structural Design
259
2
3
2
6
CE. 18 Engineering Economics
259
1
1
1
1
C.E. 19 Law—Contracts
260
1
1
C.E. 22 Municipal Engineering
260
2
2
2
2
C.E. 23 Highway Engineering
261
2
2
C.E. 24 Reinforced Concrete Design
261
2
3
4
C.E. 25 Theory of Structures
261
2
6
C.E. 26 Trips
261
Requi
red Sa
t.A.M.
CE. 27 Thesis
262 (
8
6
C.E. 28 Seminar
262 '
1
1
CE. 29 Water Power Development
262
2
2
For course for graduate students, see page 26
3. Electrical Engineering
This course is designed to enable students to obtain a thorough
knowledge of those principles which form the basis of all the main
branches of electrical'engineering. It involves a detailed study of
the generation, transmission, and utilization of electrical energy,
electrical communication, and the design of electrical apparatus.
There is also additional work in mathematics and in the theory and
characteristics of steam engines and turbines and hydraulic machinery. Well equipped laboratories provide for experimental work
in most of these subjects.
Fourth and Fifth Year students have the opportunity of presenting and discussing papers at regular meetings of the Students'
Branch of the American Institute of Electrical Engineers. Courses in Applied Science
231
Fourth Year
♦Alternate weeks,
t Optional.
TO
ft TO
FirstTerm
Second Term
Subject
•J ft
£ TO "U
3-«
8-2
31
la-
| s s
Essay
225
276
276
276
271
272
273
258
258
258
259
275
1}
2
3
2
3
2
1
1
3
3
3*
3*
2
2
2
1}
2
3
2
3
2
1
E.E. 2 Principles of D.C. Machines
E.E. 3 Principles of Alternating
Currents
3
E.E. 5 Electric and Magnetic
Measurements and Instruments
Math. 8 Applied Calculus and
Differential Equations
M.E. 4 Dynamics of Machines
M.E. 7 Applied Thermodynamics
CE. 10(a) Strength of Materials
C.E. 10(b) Materials Testing
3
3*
3*
CE. 12(a)- Hydraulics
2
C.E. 12(b) Hydraulics Laboratory
fM.E. 31 Machine Shop Practice
2
2
Fifth Year
•
TO
•eg
First Term
Second Term
Subject
2*
H
a*
" a
o» .
■S a-M
£ TO 0*
TO.J
51
■J a
5»
Essay :
225
277
277
277
277
277
278
278
273
274
259
1
2
2
2
3
1
3
1
3
2
4
4
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
2
3
1
E.E. 7 Electrical Machine Design
E.E. 8 Principles of Illuminating
Engineering
E.E. 9 Electric Power Transmission
3
E.E. 10 Electrical Problems Course
E.E. 11 Electrical Communication
E.E. 12 Principles of A.C. Machines..
E.E. 13 Transient Phenomena
2
4
4
1
M.E. 14 Mechanical Design
CE. 18 Engineering Economics
1
For course for graduate students, see page 278. 232 Faculty of Applied Science
4. Forestry and Forest Engineering
Four avenues of approach are open to students who wish to enter
forestry, namely: .through courses in either Botany, Economics, or
Commerce as given in the Faculty of Arts and Science, leading to
the Double Degree of B.A. and B.S.F. (see pages 318-319), or
through courses in Applied Science leading to the Degree of B.A.Sc.
These curricula allow the student to select an aspect of forestry,
and a corresponding field of study, to which he is attracted and
for which he may be adapted. Thus a varied but thorough course
of studies prepares the student to enter the diversified forestry
activities of the Province or to undertake graduate work in the
field of his undergraduate preparation, or in a specialized field of
forestry. Students who anticipate courses in Forestry are advised
to consult the Registrar, the Dean, or the Head of the Department
of Forestry.
The affiliation of the Forest Products Laboratory of Canada,
maintained at the University by a cooperative arrangement with the
Dominion Forestry Branch, affords opportunities for instruction in
testing the mechanical properties of timber and other structural
materials, and facilities are now provided for experimental and
demonstration work in wood seasoning.
The University Forest Reserve
On March 1, 1943, the Provincial Government leased to the
University, for twenty-one years subject to further renewal, an
area of forest land of approximately 9,600 acres between Pitt Lake
and the town of Haney for "forest research and demonstration
purposes.''
The area comprises a solid block of land about 7 miles long and
2y2 miles wide. From the standpoint of size, accessibility, variation
in forest sites, and variety of timber types and age classes it is
undoubtedly one of the finest school forests on the continent. Thus
ample scope is provided for field work in cruising, mensuration,
silviculture, logging engineering, and forest management, and for
research in forestry and related sciences.
The University Forest
The Forest, which consists of a narrow belt on the southern and
western sides of the University site, and which is typical of the
lowland stands on the southern coast, contains the principal species
of trees and shrubs of the region, including specimens of the old
trees as well as young growth of different ages, and serves as a
convenient demonstration and field study area for the departments
of Forestry, Biology and Botany, and Zoology. Coueses in Applied Science
233
A small forest nursery has been established for experimental
and demonstration work in silviculture and also to provide planting
stock for the forest, which is operated on a sustained yield basis.
Second Year
The same as Second Year Applied Science (see page 224), except
that F.E. 1 (b), General Forest Botany (see page 264) is taken
instead of Chemistry 2 (a).
Third Year
The same as Third Year Applied Science (see page 225), except
that F.E. 1 (c), General Forestry (see page 264), is taken instead
of Chemistry 2 (b).
Fourth Year
The same as Fourth Year Civil Engineering (see page 229),
except that F.E. 2 (c), Forest Mensuration, in the First Term and
F.E. 2 (b), Cruising and Stumpage Appraisal, in the Second Term
(see page 265) are taken instead of one of the electives E.E. 1 or
M.E. 6.
Fifth Year
Common to Double Course and Applied Science students.
Subject
-*■* fen
First Term
o« .
fe u v
11*
Second Term
£ TO V
b u «
Essay
F.E. 2(a) Log Scaling
F.E. 3 Forest Protection
F.E. 6 Forest Management
F.E. 7 History
fF.E. 11 Milling, Products, and
Marketing
§Bot. 7(a) Ecology
Zool. 10 Forest Entomology
F.E. 14 Seminar
F.E. 15 Thesis
F.E. 16 Forest Economics
F.E. 5 Wood Technology
•fF.E. 8 Silviculture
*tF.E. 10 Logging Engineering
F.E. 13 Lumber Grading
Bot. 6(b) Forest Pathology
225
264
265
265
265
266
253
287
267
267
267
265
266
266
266
253
*Also field work for a total of 10 days immediately after spring examinations.
t Field trips are required in these courses and students should be prepared for a total
expense which should not exceed $20 per student.
IStudents who have completed the Honours course in Biology and Botany (Forestry
option) for the B.A. degree will take Botany 1(b) instead of Botany 1(a).
(See page 2S3.) 234
Faculty of Applied Science
5. Geological Engineering
This course is designed to meet the requirements of students who
intend to enter geology as a profession, and such students are
strongly advised to take this particular course.
It gives a broad training not only in geology, but also in the
sciences of biology, chemistry, physics, and mathematics, which
are extensively applied in the solution of geological problems. The
engineering subjects are useful not only to the mining and consulting geologist and the geological surveyor, but to the geologist
engaged in original research in any branch of the science.
The course therefore furnishes a foundation for the professions
of mineralogist, geological surveyor, mining geologist, consulting
geologist, palaeontologist, geographer, etc., and is useful for those
who will be in any way connected with the discovery or development of the natural resources of the country.
As a supplement to the work in the classroom, laboratory, and
field during the session, the student is expected to obtain practical
experience during the summer vacation. '
Students are advised to become student members of the Canadian
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. .
Note. For special advantages enjoyed by engineering graduates
when registering in the Association of Professional Engineers of
the Province of British Columbia see page 220.
Fourth Year
Subject
fcS
First Term
5 % ■
g s as
Second Term
■J 8.
Eh *
™ w OJ
fe *-• **
2s*
Essay
Geol. 2 Mineralogy
Geol. 4 Structural
Geol. 5 History of the Earth Sciences
and Geological Theories
•Geol. 10 Field Geology
Min. 1 Metal Mining
Met. 1(a) Physical Metallurgy
Met. 1(b) Reduction Metallurgy
Met. 5 Fire Assaying
Met. 6 Wet Assaying
Ore Dressing 1 General
Ore Dressing 2 Lab.
Biology 1
CE. 12(a) Hydraulics _
C.E. 12(b) Hydraulics Laboratory...
C.E. 13 Mapping
225
268
269
269
269
279
280
280
281
281
282
282
252
258
259
259
•■■Includes 10 days' field work after lectures close in the Second Term. Courses in Applied Science
235
Fifth Year
Subject
fa!
First Term
it
S « .
™ WJ 0)
b »h «
Second Term
Geol. 6 Palaeontology
Geol. 7 Petrography
Geol. 8 Economic Geology
Geol. 9 Mineralography
Geol. 11 Regional Geology
Geol. 12 Geomorphology
Chem. 4(b) Theoretical Chemistry.
C.E. 18 Engineering Economics
Min. 3 Metal Mining
Min. 5 Surveying
Met. 2 Reduction Metallurgy
Thesis
269
269
269
269
269
269
254
259
279
279
280
2 or 4
2 or 4
Master of Applied Science Options
Economic Geology.—Required subjects: Geology 26, and three units fYom
Geology 20, 24, and 25.
Mineralography.—Required subjects: Geology 24, and three units from the
following: Geology 23, 25, 26.
Mineralogy.—Required subjects: Geology 23, and three units from Geology
20, 24, 25, 26.
Palaeontology.—Required subjects: Geology 21, and three units from
Geology 20, Biology 3, Zoology 1, 2, and 3.
Petrology.—Required subjects: Geology 25, and three units selected from
Geology 23, 24, and 26.
Stratigraphy.—Required subjects: Geology 20, and three units selected from
Geology 21, 25, and Agronomy 15.
Electives: Under each of the above options, electives to the value of six
units are required. These will be selected in consultation with the Department of Geology. The following subjects are recommended for
consideration: selected courses from Chemistry, Physics, Metallurgy,
Mineral Dressing, Biology, Botany, Zoology, Bacteriology, Agronomy 15,
English, Modern Languages, Mathematics, and Economics.
A thesis of the minimum value of three units is required in each option. 236
Faculty of Applied Science
6. Mechanical Engineering
The course in Mechanical Engineering has been designed to
give the student a thorough knowledge of the theory and application of those basic subjects which are essential in this branch of
engineering.
With this in view, stress has been laid upon such subjects as
mathematics, physics, applied mechanics, strength of materials,
applied thermodynamics, and hydraulics. Graduates of this course
are therefore qualified to enter upon any of the many specialized
branches of this profession, especially in British Columbia, whose
rapid industrial development demands mechanical engineers prepared to attack a great diversity of problems.
Although fundamentally general in character, the course embodies design of prime movers, mechanical and hydraulic machinery
design, power plant operation and design, and the testing of
engines and power plants, thus giving sufficient specialized training
in mechanical engineering to enable students to enter the field of
design or research should they so desire.
Students following this course are given a general course in the
fundamentals of electrical engineering.
Fourth Year
Subject
* TO
First Term
o £ •
£ to «
a •- tu
•§g*
Second Term
•s*
Essay
CE. 10(a) Strength of Materials
CE. 10(b) Materials Testing
CE. 12(a) Hydraulics
CE. 12(b) Hydraulics Laboratory
M.E. 3 Kinematics of Machines
M.E. 4 Dynamics of Machines
M.E. 5 Machine Design
M.E. 7 Applied Thermodynamics..'
E.E. 2 and 3 Principles of D.C.
Machines and Alternating Currents
Math. 8 Applied Calculus and
Differential Equations
M.E. 31 Machine Shop Practice
225
258
258
258
259
272
272
272
273
276
271
275
■•"Alternate weeks. Courses in Applied Science
237
Fifth Year
Subject
St
Eirst Term
5* *h 4-
Second Term
•5*
Essay
M.E. 10 Mech. Eng. Laboratory
M.E. 11 Heating, Ventilating, Air
Conditioning, and Refrigeration
M.E. 12 Power Plant Design
M.E. 15 Prime Movers
M.E. 16 Machine Design
M.E. 17 Applied Mechanics
M.E. 18 Aeronautics
M.E. 19 Problems in Mech. and Elect
Eng
E.E. 14 Alternating Current Machines
Met. 1(a) Physical Metallurgy
Met. 1 (c) Metallography
C.E. 18 Engineering Economics
M.E. 32 Machine Shop Practice
225
273
273
273
274
274
274
275
275
278
2801
280
259
275
7. Metallurgical Engineering
The two principal branches of metallurgical engineering are
chemical metallurgy, which includes milling, smelting, and refining;
and physical metallurgy, which is concerned, chiefly, with the production and fabrication of alloys.
The course in the Fourth Year deals with subjects of a general
nature, common to both branches, while in the Fifth Year opportunity is offered for some degree of specialization in either chemical
or physical metallurgy. The development of metal manufacturing
in British Columbia indicates an increasing need for graduates with
specialized training in physical metallurgy.
Graduate courses leading to a Master's Degree in mineral dressing or metallurgy are available. Through the close association of
the Department with the work of the British Columbia Council of Faculty of Applied Science
Industrial and Scientific Eesearch, an excellent opportunity is
offered to students planning to undertake graduate studies of a
research character.
The laboratory equipment at present installed, while hot on a
.large scale, is first-class and modern and has been carefully selected
to give thorough and adequate training in the laboratory courses
covering the methods and processes employed in chemical metallurgy, physical metallurgy, and metallography.
Students are expected to spend their vacations in practical work
in connection with metallurgical operations and are required to do
so between the Fourth and Fifth Years as an essential part of
their course.
Students are advised to become student members of the Canadian
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
Fourth Year
Subject
First Term
S g .
■£ a*
£ TO QJ
5"! •- w
IF
Second Term
c>.
3 -y
■3 a-*
£ « »
Essay
C.E. 10(a) Strength of Materials...
C.E. 10(b) Materials Testing
C.E. 12(a) Hydraulics
M.E. 6 Applied Thermodynamics....
Geol. 2 Mineralogy
E.E. 1 General
Min. 1 Metal Mining
Met. 1(a) Physical Metallurgy
Met. 1(b) Reduction Metallurgy
Met. 1(c) Metallography
Met. 5 Fire Assaying
Met. 6 Wet Assaying
Mineral Dressing 1
Mineral Dressing 2 Lab
225
258
258
258
272
268
276
279
280
280
280
281
281
282
282
3*
3*
2
3
2
2
'Alternate weeks. Courses in Applied Science
239
Fifth Year
Subject
First Term
2-8
Second Term
■S*
Essay
•Geol. 9 Mineralography
CE. 18 Engineering Economics
Chem. 4(b) Theoretical
Chem. 8 Electrochemistry Laboratory
fMath. 8 Applied Calculus and Differential Equations
Mineral Dressing 3 Laboratory
•Min. 3 Metal Mining
Met. 2 Reduction Metallurgy
Met. 3(a) Physical Metallurgy
Met. 3(b) Calculations
Met. 4 Laboratory
Met. 7 Base Metal Production
Met. 8 Process Laboratory
tMet. 9 Metallography
225
269
259
254
254
271
283
279
280
280
281
281
281
282
282
*For Students taking Chemical Metallurgy Option.
tFor Students taking Physical Metallurgy Option.
8. Mining Engineering
The courses offered are intended to give the students a broad
training, and knowledge of the fundamental, technical, economic,
and social principles involved, to serve as a sufficient foundation
for advancement in any branch of the work that the student may
enter after graduation. Sufficient specialized training is given in
draughting, assaying, and mine surveying to equip the student
for the actual job which he is likely to enter upon graduating.
Coal, iron, and steel are covered in general courses and specialization is chiefly in non-ferrous mining, with particular reference
to British Columbia conditions.
Students are expected to spend their vacations in practical work
in connection with mining and are required to do so between the
Fourth and Fifth Years as an essential part of their course.
Vancouver is conveniently located in proximity to coal and metal
mining districts, and is an important mining centre. Students and
graduates have normally little trouble in getting positions, through
the generous co-operation of the mining companies in the Province.
Students are advised to become student members of the Canadian
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. 240
Faculty of Applied Science
Fourth Year
Subject
First Term
3*
t- h.
fe *" «
-?J3
Second Term
.sis
3 « .
JS OS U
*- *h 4)
Essay
C.E. 10(a) Strength of Materials..
CE. 10(b) Materials Testing
CE. 12(a) Hydraulics
C.E. 13 Mapping
M.E. 6 Applied Thermodynamics...
Geol. 2 Mineralogy
E.E. 1 General
Min. 1 Metal Mining
Met. 1(a) Physical Metallurgy
Met. 1(b) Reduction Metallurgy
Met. 5 Fire Assaying
Met. 6 Wet Assaying
Mineral Dressing 1
Mineral Dressing 2 Lab
225
258
258
258
259
272
268
276
279
280
280
281
281
282
282
3*
3*
2
3
3
2
2
*Alternate weeks.
Fifth Year
'ft
First Term
Second Term
Subject
£ a> <1>
21
Is
►J a
»m a*
J"! ^ 3*
si*
Essay
225
269
269
269
257
259
280
283
279
279
279
279
280
2
3
4
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
3
1
6
2
3
4
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
Geol. 3 Petrology
Geol. 4 Structural
Geol. 8 Economics
CE. 9 Element. Design
C.E. 18 Engineering Economics
Met. 2 Reduction Metallurgy
Mineral Dressing 3 Laboratory
3
1
6
Min. 2 Coal and Placer
Min. 3 Metal Mining
Min. 7 Methods Courses in Applied Science 241
Master of Applied Science Options in Mineral Dressing
and Metallurgy
1. Mineral Dressing.—Required course: Mineral Dressing 101, and thesis.
Electives: Suitable courses to be selected, as approved
by the Department.
2. Metallurgy.—Required course: Metallurgy 102, and thesis.
Electives: Suitable courses to be selected in relation to
the specific option undertaken, as approved by the
Department.
9. Nursing and Health
The University offers courses in Nursing to students who desire
to receive a broader education than can be secured in a hospital
school of nursing alone, and who wish, at the same time, to prepare
themselves for teaching or supervisory positions in schools of
nursing or for Public Health Nursing service.
A combined university and hospital course leading to the degree
of B.A.Sc. (Nursing) and to the Diploma in Nursing of an associated hospital is offered. A double course leading to the degrees
of B.A. and BA.Sc: (Nursing) is also offered. Students who take
the double course will receive the degree of B.A. on the successful
completion of their hospital training, and the degree of B.A.Sc.
on the successful completion of the specialized courses of their
final year. (See Double Courses, page 317.)
These courses are given by the University in collaboration with
the schools of nursing of associated hospitals, which means those
hospitals that have signified their willingness to supply the professional part of the course, and have received the approval of
the University Senate for that purpose. Up to the present time,
the Vancouver General Hospital is the only hospital which has
entered into association with the University to this end. For convenience of reference, the courses given at the University during
the preclinical year and during the hospital training are designated
Nursing A. (See page 242.)
After graduation from hospital, the student will select one or
other of the following specialized courses:
Nursing B—Public Health Nursing. (See pages 246 and 248.)
Nursing C—Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing.
(See pages 247 and 248.)
Nurses who have graduated from recognized schools of nursing,
and who are personally fitted for their proposed work, may apply 242 Faculty of Applied Science
to take Nursing B or Nursing C. Satisfactory completion of these
courses leads to a Certificate in Public Health Nursing or a Certificate in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing respectively.
Students of all courses in Nursing are subject to the general
University regulations, and to special regulations of the Faculty
of Applied Science. The special regulations concerning the Second
and higher years of the degree courses in Nursing are included in
the general outline which follows.
Nursing A—Admission
Applicants for admission to the Second Year of the Combined
Course in Nursing (or to the Third Year of the Double Course)
must be eighteen years of age; they must have completed the work
of First Year Arts, or Senior Matriculation, attaining standing
in the required subjects as stated below; they must also have
completed their application and must satisfy the entrance requirements of an associated hospital. Application for admission to the
Second Year of the Combined Course, or to the Third Year of the
Double Course, must be made to the Registrar on or before August
15th. Applicants will be notified of the acceptance or rejection of
their application.
The Faculty reserves the right of selection and admission of
students entering the Second Year of the Combined Course and
the Third Year of the Double Course in Nursing. The candidates
must, in the opinion of the Department, be personally fitted for
the branches of nursing to which the University nursing courses
lead. (See page 220.)
Applications from graduate nurses for admission to the undergraduate course leading to the degree of B.A.Sc. will be considered
only upon fulfilment of the following conditions:
(1) The requirements of the first two years, as outlined on
pages 243-244, shall be met (the work of the Second Year shall be
covered by attendance at a "Winter Session).
(2) The candidate shall have graduated from a hospital school
of nursing approved by the University Senate.
(3) The candidate's professional and academic record shall indicate ability above the average.
(4) The candidate shall have graduated from the hospital school
of nursing within five years of the date upon which she applies for
enrolment in Second Year Nursing. Courses in Applied Science
243
(5) Candidates who had taken the one-year certificate course
(Nursing B or C) prior to the Session of 1938-39 must fulfil the
requirements (1), (2), (3), and (4) as stated above, and the passing grade in their work of the certificate course shall have met the
standard now set for the degree course students in the final year.
All regulations are subject to change from year to year, and
subjects or courses may be modified during the year as the Faculty
may deem advisable.
Nursing A—General Outline of Course
The First and Second Years (of the Combined Course), or the
First, Second, and Third Years (of the Double Course), which are
academic, give the students an introduction to general cultural
subjects and a foundation in the sciences underlying the practice
of nursing.
First Year (Academic)
The students register in the Faculty of Arts and Science, and
take the following courses as Arts students:
CB Q)
ft w
First Term
Second Term
Subject
•« .^
" a
*- it
o % ■
■s °-<
£ a) CD
S *- CU
h
S 2 ■
™«CJ
Jh J- CU
English 1(a)
158
159
138
187
190
183
129
121
2
2
3
3
4
4
3
2
3
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
3
2
English 1(b)
Choice of
or French 1 _
Mathematics 1
3
Biology 1
2
A passing grade of 60 per cent in either Biology or Chemistry is
required; for all other subjects a grade of 50 per cent will be
accepted. (See page 224.)
Second Year (Academic)
No student with defective standing will be admitted to the Second
Year of the course in Nursing. 244
Faculty of Applied Science
The students register in the Faculty of Applied Science, and
take the following courses as Nursing students:
Subject
o v
First Term
•3*
3 a •
get
a-*
2
Second Term
•§-*-■•«
2 w <»
IP
English 2
Zoology 1
Physics A or Physics 1 ,
Psychology 1
Nursing 1 History of Nursing
Nursing 2 Elementary
Biochemistry
Nursing 3 Bacteriology in
Relation to Health and Disease
159
287
200
196
283
283
284
Following these academic or preclinical years, the student enters
the associated hospital school of nursing for a period of thirty-two
months, the first four months of which are a probationary period.
This professional course is planned to afford a wide experience
and training in the care of the sick, to develop the skill, observation, and judgment necessary to the efficient practice of nursing,
and to include a study of community as well as institutional health
problems.
Probationary Period (Hospital)
It has been arranged that the students of both the Combined
Course and the Double Course will enter the associated hospital
along with the regular class of probationers entering the hospital
in September. Students who are unable to meet the requirements
for entrance in September, who subsequently remove outstanding
supplementals, may be admitted with a later regular class of
probationers. The students must meet all admission requirements
of the associated hospital school of nursing.
During this probationary period the student will undergo rigid
examination as to fitness in physique, temperament, and character,
thus affording the hospital school of nursing information upon
which to judge the student's qualifications for the profession of
nursing. It also enables the student to determine whether she feels
herself personally fitted or inclined to proceed with the course. The
hospital school of nursing reserves the right to reject candidates
who do not reach the required standards. Courses in Applied Science 245
Third, Fourth, and Fifth Years (Professional)
The Third, Fourth, and Fifth Years of the Combined Course (or
the Fourth, Fifth, and Sixth Years of the Double Course) will be
spent in the associated hospital school of nursing. Students in these
years are required to register with the University even though during this portion of the course they are in residence at the hospital.
During these professional years students are subject to the authority
and are under the direction of the officers of the associated hospital
school of nursing. Students who have lost time during the hospital
period may be required to postpone the Final (Academic) Year.
The professional course is given partly within the associated hospital
and partly through affiliations with other institutions or organizations. Full maintenance and such allowance as the associated
hospital authorities may designate are provided, and a yearly
vacation is granted at the convenience of the superintendent of
the school of nursing. A registration fee may be required by the
associated hospital.
The following is an outline of the course as given in the Vancouver General Hospital, which is the only hospital at present
associated with the University in giving the Combined Course.
Instruction in the following Nursing subjects is given by members of the medical staff and by qualified nurse instructors: Ethics
of Nursing; Principles and Practices of Nursing; Personal Hygiene; Anatomy and Physiology; Psychology; Normal Nutrition
and Diet Therapy; Pharmacology and Therapeutics; Urinalysis;
Introduction to Anaesthesia; Introduction to Physiotherapy,
X-Ray, and Community Health and Social Needs.
This schedule is open to change at any time, at the discretion
of the associated hospital school of nursing.
The period of hospital service includes instruction and actual
nursing experience in the following departments:
Medical Eye, Ear, Nose, and throat
Surgical Obstetrical
Gynecological Communicable Diseases (inelud-
Pediatric and Orthopedic ing Tuberculosis and Venereal
Psychiatric Diseases)
Infants Diet Kitchen
Operating Room Out-patient
The preventive aspects of medicine and nursing, while included
in every phase of the hospital course, are particularly stressed in
the clinics, in the Out-patient Department, and through the affiliations arranged with other institutions or public health organiza- 246 Faculty of Applied Science
tions. These affiliations may vary from time to time, and from the
opportunities available a selection will be made of the experiences
most valuable to the student.
The diploma of the hospital school of nursing will be granted
at the completion of this period.
Final Year (Academic and Professional)
The Final Year will be spent in either Nursing B or Nursing C,
at the option of the student. The Department of Nursing and
Health must be notified by each student of her selection of course
for the Final Year; this notification must be received by July 15th
of the year in which the student proposes to return to the University for the Final Year's work. Upon successful completion of
the Final Year, the degree of Bachelor of Applied Science (Nursing) will be awarded.
Students will be required to submit a graduating essay, presenting an original study based upon experiences gained during
the academic and professional years, and developed from topics
assigned or selected early in the course. These essays must be
handed in before the last day of lectures in the Final Year. (See
page 225.)
Candidates in the Final Year of the B.A.Sc. course in Nursing,
in order to obtain this degree, must obtain at least 50 per cent, in
each subject, and at least 65 per cent, on the aggregate. (See page
250.)
Nursing B (Public Health)—General Outline
A course for graduate nurses, including academic work in the
University, with appropriate field work under the supervision of
the following public health and social welfare organizations: the
Children's Aid Society of Vancouver; the Family Welfare Bureau
of Greater Vancouver; the Metropolitan Health Committee of
Greater Vancouver; the Provincial Department of Health, and
Health Services at Abbotsford, Chilliwack, Duncan, Nanaimo,
Saanich, and other centres; the Provincial Mental Hospital, Esson-
dale; the Provincial Division of Tuberculosis Control; the Provincial Division of Venereal Disease Control; the Vancouver General
Hospital, Social Service Department; and the Victorian Order
of Nurses. Courses in Applied Science
247
Subject
For Details
see page:
Total hours
of lectures
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
Nursing
4 Preventive Medicine
5 Mental Hygiene
7 Infant and Child Hygiene
9 Sanitation
11 Public Health Organization
12 Vital Statistics
13 Principles of Public Health Nursing...
14 Practice of Public Health Nursing
16 Methods in Health Teaching
17 Current Nursing Problems
21 Social Case Work
27 Sociology